The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutCNEW2008-01822Date k"n Og A. Permit # Project Name I�d1 1�.rV-�y l�n�1z� �11 J COMMERCIAL CO a'7 Planning (Lindsay Boyer, Jennifer Prochazka, Jennifer Reeves, rissy Hart, Jason Schubert, Grant Wencel, Molly Hitchcock) Bridgette George Development Engineers (Alan Gibbs, Josh Norton, Carol Cotter) City Engineer (Bob Mosley, Jerry Jones, John Logan, Robert Bumpurs, William Ethridge) OK Environmental Services (Eaphrame Thomas, James Boykin, Pete Garcia) r` Fire Department (Eric Hurt, Eric Dotson, Jerry Duffey, Steve Smith) Drainage (Donnie Willis) r ` Public Works - Sanitation I (Wally Urrutia) Electrical Services (Tony Michalsky) 1L Water/Wastewater Services (Joe Mike Garcia, Paul Schoenfeld, Mitchell Carson) Miscellaneous Notes City of College Station 1101 TEXAS AVENUE COLLEGE STATION TX 77840 C E R T I F I C A T E O F O C C U P A N C Y P E R M A N E N T Issue Date . . . . . . Parcel Number . . . . . Property Address . . . Subdivision Name . . . Legal Description . . . Property Zoning . . . . Owner . . . . . . . . . Contractor . . . . . . Application number Description of Work Construction type . . . Occupancy type . . . . Flood Zone . . . . . . Approved . . . . . . 11/07/08 582400-0500-0010 1801 HARVEY MITCHELL PKWY S COLLEGE STATION TX 77840 SOUTHWOOD #5 SOUTHWOOD #5, LOT TR 1, ACRES 40.00 UNKNOWN COLLEGE STATION ISD PEPPER-LAWSON CONSTRUCTION 281 371-3100 08-00001822 000 000 COMMERCIAL, SCHOOLS & OTHER EDUCATION NON-COMBUSTIBLE EDUCATIONAL _C � A' Bui-rdincr O al VOID UNLESS SIGNED BY BUILDING OFFICIAL (11/7/2008) Gma Southerland RE: Calking for C.O. @ 1801 Harvey Mitchell Pkwy S A&M Consolidated High School (Ag IBdiA' From: Eric Dotson To: Glsoutherland@cstx.gov Date: 11 /7/2008 9:31 AM Subject: RE: Calling for C.O. @ 1801 Harvey Mitchell Pkwy S A&M Consolidated High School (Ag Building) Good through fire. Sent from my Windows Mobile® phone. -----Original Message ----- From: Gina Southerland <Glsoutherland@cstx.gov> Sent: Wednesday, November 05, 2008 1:31 PM To: Alan Gibbs <Agibbs@cstx.gov>; Bridgette George <BGEORGE@cstx.gov>; Brenda Godfrey <Bgodfrey@cstx.gov>; Benjamin McCarty <BMcCarty@cstx.gov>; Carol Cotter <Ccotter@cstx.gov>; Christina Court <Ccourt@cstx.gov>; Cindy Dillard <Cdillard@cstx.gov>; Crissy Hartl <Chartl@cstx.gov>; Chris Haver <Chaver@cstx.gov>; Donnie Willis <Dwillis@cstx.gov>; Erika Bridges <Ebridges@cstx.gov>; Gina Southerland <Glsoutherland@cstx.gov>; Josh Norton <Jnorton@cstx.gov>; Jennifer Prochazka <JProchazka@cstx.gov>; Jason Schubert <Jschubert@cstx.gov>; Lindsay Boyer <Lboyer@cstx.gov>; Lauren Hovde <Lhovde@cstx.gov>; Molly Hitchcock <Mhitchcock@cstx.gov>; Matthew Robinson <Mrobinson@cstx.gov>; Doug Ervin <Dervin@cstx.gov>; Eric Dotson <Edotson@cstx.gov>; Eric Hurt <EHURT@cstx.gov>; Julie Caler <Jcaler@cstx.gov>; Jerry Duffey <Jduffey@cstx.gov>; John LeBlanc <JLeBlanc@cstx.gov>; Joe Wilbert III <Jwilbert@cstx.gov>; Steve Smith <Ssmith@cstx.gov>; Wally Urrutia <Wurrutia@cstx.gov>; Sean Dwyer <Sdwyer@cstx.gov>; Israel Koite <Ikoite@cstx.gov>; Jerry Jones <Jjones@cstx.gov>; John Logan <Jlogan@cstx.gov>; Keith Tinker <Ktinker@cstx.gov>; Rodney Harris <Rharris@cstx.gov>; Brent Read <Bread@cstx.gov>; James Boykin <Jboykin@cstx.gov>; Joe Garcia <JGARCIA@cstx.gov>; Mitchell Carson <Mcarson@cstx.gov>; Pete Garcia <pgarcia@cstx.gov>; Paul Schoenfeld <Pschoenfeld@cstx.gov>; Tony Michalsky <Tmichalsky@cstx.gov>; Weldon Davis <Wdavis@cstx.gov> Subject: Calling for C.O. @ 1801 Harvey Mitchell Pkwy S A&M Consolidated High School (Ag Building) BP# 08-1822 Contact info: Pepper Lawson @ 281-371-3100 Gina Southerland CSR - Planning & Development Services City of College Station 979-764-3570 www.cstx.gov Benjamin McCarty - Re: Calling for C.O. @ 1801 Harvey Mitchell Pkwy S A&M Consolidated High chool (Ag Building) From: Pete Garcia To: COS Date: 11/6/2008 12:23 PM Subject: Re: Calling for C.O. @ 1801 Harvey Mitchell Pkwy S A&M Consolidated High School (Ag Building) They are OK. 'Do not ask the Lord to Guide your Footsteps if you are not wilting to move your Feet' This e-mail and/or attachment is for the sole use of the intended recipient(s) and may contain confidential and /or legally privileged information. Any unauthorized review, use, disclosure or distribution is prohibited. If you are not the intended recipient, please contact the sender by reply e-mail and destroy all electronic and paper copies of the original message and any attachments. Thank You. >> On 11/5/2008 at 1:31 PM, in message<4911A048.6D9C.0039.0@cstx.gov>, Gina Southerland wrote: BP# 08-1822 Contact info: Pepper Lawson @ 281-371-3100 Gina Southerland CSR - Planning & Development Services City of College Station 979-764-3570 www.csb(.gov Ben amin McCart - Re: Calling for C.O. @ 1801 Harvey Mitchell Pk S A&M Consolidated Hi h School Ag Building) _Pa e 1 From: Paul Schoenfeld To: Alan Gibbs; Benjamin McCarty; Brenda Godfrey; Brent Read; Bridgette George; Carol Cotter; Chris Haver; Christina Court; Cindy Dillard; Crissy Hartl; Donnie Willis; Doug Ervin; Eric Dotson; Eric Hurt; Erika Bridges; Gina Southerland; Israel Koite; James Boykin; Jason Schubert; Jennifer Prochazka; Jerry Duffey; Jerry Jones; Joe Garcia; Joe Wilbert III; John LeBlanc; John Logan; Josh Norton; Julie Caler; Keith Tinker; Lauren Hovde; Lindsay Boyer; Matthew Robinson; Mitchell Carson; Molly Hitchcock; Pete Garcia; Rodney Harris; Sean Dwyer; Steve Smith; Tony Michalsky; Wally Urrutia; Weldon Davis Date: 11/5/2008 3:51:16 PM Subject: Re: Calling for C.O. @ 1801 Harvey Mitchell Pkwy S A&M Consolidated High School (Ag Building) All ok on our side. Paul >>> Gina Southerland 11/5/2008 1:31 PM >>> BP# 08-1822 Contact info: Pepper Lawson @ 281-371-3100 Gina Southerland CSR - Planning & Development Services City of College Station 979-764-3570 www.cstx.gov Benjamin McCarty - Re: Calling for C.O. 1801 Harvey Mitchell Pk wy S A&M Consolidated High School Ag Building) Page 1 ° From: Rodney Harris To: Alan Gibbs; Benjamin McCarty; Brenda Godfrey; Brent Read; Bridgette George; Carol Cotter; Chris Haver; Christina Court; Cindy Dillard; Crissy Hard; Donnie Willis; Doug Ervin; Eric Dotson; Eric Hurt; Erika Bridges; Gina Southerland; Israel Koite; James Boykin; Jason Schubert; Jennifer Prochazka; Jerry Duffey; Jerry Jones; Joe Garcia; Joe Wilbert III; John LeBlanc; John Logan; Josh Norton; Julie Caler; Keith Tinker; Lauren Hovde; Lindsay Boyer; Matthew Robinson; Mitchell Carson; Molly Hitchcock; Paul Schoenfeld; Pete Garcia; Sean Dwyer; Steve Smith; Tony Michalsky; Wally Urrutia; Weldon Davis Date: 11/5/2008 3:09:27 PM Subject: Re: Calling for C.O. @ 1801 Harvey Mitchell Pkwy S A&M Consolidated High School (Ag Building) No Sanitation Issues. Rodney Harris Sanitation Foreman Public Works Tel(979)764-3698 Fax(979)764-3489 email:rharris@cstx.gov >>> Gina Southerland 11/5/2008 1:31 PM >>> BP# 08-1822 Contact info: Pepper Lawson @ 281-371-3100 Gina Southerland CSR - Planning & Development Services City of College Station 979-764-3570 www. cstx. qov PREPARED 10/21/08, 12:23:08 INSPECTION TICKET PAGE 9 City of College Station INSPECTOR: BUILDING INSPECTOR DATE 10/21/08 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ADDRESS . : 1801 HARVEY MITCHELL PKWY S SUBDIV: SOUTHWOOD #5 TENANT, NBR: A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH CONTRACTOR PEPPER-LAWSON CONSTRUCTION PHONE (281) 371-3100 OWNER COLLEGE STATION ISD PHONE PARCEL 582400-0500-0010 APPL NUMBER: 08-00001822 COMMERCIAL, SCHOOLS & OTHER EDUCATION ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ PERMIT: BLDG 00 BUILDING PERMIT REQUESTED INSP DESCRIPTION TYP/SQ COMPLETED RESULT RESULTS/COMMENTS B125 01 10/ 1/ 8 88 BLDG, FINAL TIME: 17:00 16 9�102 AP O C October 21, 2008 9:27:44 AM glsouth. -------------------------------------- COMMENTS AND NOTES-------------------------------------- BUILDING PERMIT CITY OF COLLEGE STATION 1101 TEXAS AVENUE, COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840 PHONE: (979)764-3570 FAX: (979)764-3496 http://bpinspect.cstx.gov ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Application Number . . . . . 08-00001822 Date 7/01/08 Application pin number . . . 041768 Property Address . . . . . . 180liHARVEY MITCHELL PKWY S Property ID: 5824.00--0500-0010 R #: R42248) Tenant nbr, name . . . . . . A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH Application type description COMMERCIAL, SCHOOLS & OTHER EDUCATION Subdivision Name . . . . . . SOUTHWOOD #5 Property Use . . . . . . . . EDUCATIONAL Property Zoning . . . . . . . UNKNOWN Application valuation . . . . 352350 Owner Contractor ------------------------ ------------------------ COLLEGE STATION ISD PEPPER-LAWSON CONSTRUCTION 1812 WELSH AVE # 120 4555 KATY HOCKLEY COLLEGE STATION TX 778404800 KATY TX 77493 (281) 371-3100 --- Structure Information 000 000 AGRICULTURAL SHOP & PAINT BOOTH Construction Type . . . . . NON-COMBUSTIBLE Occupancy Type . . . . . . EDUCATIONAL Other struct info . . . . . EXTERIOR WALL TYPE BRICK IMPACT/PRORATA FEES PAID N/A FOUNDATION TYPE SLAB HEATED AREA .10 INTERIOR WALL TYPE SHEETROCK SEWER TYPE PUBLIC TRAFFIC IMPACT ANAL (TAZ) 371.00 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Permit . . . . . . BUILDING PERMIT Additional desc . . GS Permit pin number . 584847 Permit Fee . . . . .00 Plan Check Fee .00 Issue Date . . . . 7/01/08 Valuation . . . . 352350 Expiration Date . . 12/28/08 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Special Notes and Comments THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH REQUIRES AN ASBESTOS SURVEY IN CERTAIN CIRCUMSTANCES - CALL TDH ® (254) 778-6744 FOR MORE INFORMATION PROVIDE COMBUSTION AIR: FOR GAS -FIRED APPLIANCES PER SECTION 304 OF THE 2006 INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE; FOR OTHER FUELS TO COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 7 OF THE 2006 IMC. *ALL UTILITIES MUST BE DISCONNECTED BEFORE DEMOLITION BEGINS. PLUMBING SEWER LINES MUST BE CAPPED TO AVOID STORM WATER FLOWING INTO LINES. MAINTAIN SAFE JOB SITE AND REMOVE --------------------------------------------------- --- ----------------- BUILDING DEPT PRECN ATIV • APPLICANT: C_ +�,�� BUILDING PERMIT CITY OF COLLEGE STATION 1101 TEXAS AVENUE, COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840 PHONE: (979)764-3570 FAX: (979)764-3496 http://bpinspect.cstx.gov Application Number . . . . . 08-00001822 Application pin number . . . 041768 Special Notes and Comments ALL DEBRI PROMPTLY. *ELECTRICAL SHALL BE INSTALLED Code & LOCAL AMENDMENTS PROVIDE EXTERIOR LANDING LEVEL REQUIRED EXIT DOOR(S) Page 2 Date 7/01/08 PER 2005 National Electrical WITH THE INTERIOR FLOOR FOR SUBMIT FIRE ALARM PLANS WITH PRODUCT DATA SHEETS - DESIGN AND INSTALL AS PER NFPA 72 NO WORK SHALL START UNTIL PLANS HAVE BEEN REVIEWED AND RETURNED PROVIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHER(S) - VERIFY LOCATION AND PLACEMENT WITH THE FIRE MARSHALL'S OFFICE (MIN. 2A10BC) SUBMIT FIRE SPRINKLER PLANS AND CALCULATIONS FOR REVIEW NO WORK ON SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BEGIN UNTIL PLANS HAVE BEEN REVIEW AND RETURNED. SPRINKLER SYSTEM CONTROLS AND WATER FLOW SWITCHES ARE REQUIRED TO BE MONITORED BY AN APPROVED MONITORING COMPANY. A COPY OF THE MONITORING CONTRACT SHALL BE SENT TO THE COLLEGE STATION FIRE DEPARTMENT, FIRE PREVENTION DIVISION. GUARDS SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION 1013 OF THE 2006 IBC. *Assure Proper GFI Locations, Including One Within 25' Of Outside A/C Unit HANDRAILS SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION R-311 (2003 IRC) OR SECTION 1009 (2003 IBC) AS APPROPRIATE REQUIRED EXIT DOORS SHALL BE OPENABLE FROM THE INSIDE WITHOUT THE USE OF A KEY,TOOL OR SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE/EFFORT INTERIOR LIGHTING SHALL MEET THE CONTROLS AND WATTAGE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 505 OF THE 2006 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE. CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY BETWEEN THE HOURS OF 10:00 PM AND 7:00 AM MUST COMPLY WITH THE NOISE ORDINANCE (MAX. 55 DBA) *ANY CHANGES OR ALTERATIONS TO SUBMITTED PLANS MUST BE RESUBMITTED AND APPROVED BEFORE WORK IS DONE IN ORDER TO ASSURE CODE COMPLIANCE *POST PERMIT CARD ON JOB SITE TO BE VISIBLE FROM ROAD *REMOVE ALL VEGETATION AND FOREIGN MATERIAL FROM SLAB AREA PRIOR TO PLACING FILL. FILL SHALL BE FREE FROM VEGETATION AND FOREIGN MATERIAL. *ALL PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL, AND HVAC (mechanical) WORK MUST BE PERFORMED BY LICENSED CONTRACTORS. CONTACT BUILDING DEPARTMENT FOR INSPECTIONS PRIOR TO COVERING ANY WORK ---------------------------------------------tf-------- r-------------- - - - - - - BUILDING DEPT APPLICANT: VE: BUILDING PERMIT CITY OF COLLEGE STATION 1101 TEXAS AVENUE, COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840 PHONE: (979)764-3570 FAX: (979)764-3496 http://bpinspect.cstx.gov ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 3 Application Number . . . . . 08-00001822 Date 7/01/08 Application ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- pin number . . . 041768 Fee summary ----------------- Charged ---------- Paid Credited ---------- Due ---------- Permit Fee Total .00 ---------- .00 .00 .00 Plan Check Total .00 .00 .00 .00 Grand Total .00 .00 .00 .00 ------------------- BUILDING DE APPLICANT: APPLICATION FOR BUILDING PERMIT DATE: �I ISBa CITY OF COLLEGE STATION • 1101 TEXAS AVENUE APPLICATION # IVA COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840 TEMP POLE # Crty OF COLLEGE. STATION (979) 764-3570 (979) 764-3496 FAX !'/r,lai,g.� Derclopmrnr Srtrea WWW.CSTX.GOV ADDRESS/LOCATION: I SO I Hap va y M tT-c(-fEL.L PAP.r-wAY 5o„rr LOT BLOCK SUBDIVISION SEC/PH BUSINESS/OWNER NAME: (fOLC.-ECirz % STwwz I S D PHONE: q l `Cy . _164,c�1U0 CONTRACTOR/HOMEOWNER: FEPpEr but5w ( me&e 1C.Z w&j PHONE: 1-41.. CAP 3056 CONTACT PERSON FOR REVIEW COMMENTS: I-IEOc[iFS PHONE: 2-9 • G39,130 FAX: 141. 615. 10-15 EMAIL: 11A 0 6_41So/1 0 C40 ELECTRICIAN: /�) I� tf' �l.e .TRI C. PLUMBER: Il /"0111 V a HVAC: �hC 'e'TPf_S GOOD CENTS (Residential only): ACCESSORY/STORAGE MOVING RE -ROOF ADDITION NEW CONSTRUCTION` SHELL ONLY DEMOLITION (ASBESTOS SURVEY) PORTABLE STORAGE (RESIDENTIAL) SLAB ONLY DUPLEX (LANDSCAPE PLANS REQUIRED) PORTABLE STORAGE (NON-RESIDENTIAL) SWIMMING POOL LOCATION REMODEL/RENOVATION* TENT RETAINING WALL El [� DESCRIPTION OF WORK: /" n QQM dJ OF 04447- &QUI 4f ii1C�O��0i9�ril1 VT� 14�j �[1[,r a PROPOSED USE: LiAtayA ci A6 Eoye STRUCTURE USE: HOMEOWNER ASSOCIATION/ARCHITECTUAL OR DESIGN REVIEW COMMITTEE APPROVAL: TEXAS �ACCESSIBILITY STANDARD (TAS) PROJECT REGISTRATION NO. EAbr-MI VALUATION: $ 3S'2-, 3sa TOTAL AREA: 2 3 S-q HEATED AREA: (Cost of Labor and Materials) PUBLIC SEWER EPTIC/TREATMENT SYSTEM ss!/— SEWER TAP: SIZE WATER TAP: SIZE OTHER TAP: SIZE TEMP POLE GARAGE TYPE: SINGLE ATTACHED NUMBER OF BEDROOMS: NUMBER OF BATHROOMS: INTERIOR WALL TYPE: EXTERIOR WALL TYPE: FOUNDATION TYPE: ROOF TYPE: DOUBLE ( IE,TACHED TRIPLE CARPORT G SIGNATURE OF APPLICANT: *If proposed work involves new commerc onstruction or facade improvements/renovations to an existing commercial property, building elevations are required. ............................................................ Official �Use �Only C ents: E r NO Plans Examiner Zoning Official Ilk ;�Aj VLK ARCHITECTS PROJECT MANUAL FOR A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITION COLLEGE STATION I.S.D. COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS PROJECT NO. 2737.04 APRIL 21, 2008 OWNER: COLLEGE STATION INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT 1812 WELSH STREET COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840 SET NO. ceTt)er aTen ca, rst We of archiVlcis 7915 FM 1960 west suae 214 toustoe texas 77070 on 251 671 2300 tax 29' 671 2313 rtx31c^.rtedstcm r0 PROJECT MANUAL FOR PROJECT: A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITION COLLEGE STATION I.S.D. COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS PROJECT NO: DATE: 2737.04 APRIL 21, 2008 OWNER: COLLEGE STATION INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT 1812 WELSH STREET, COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840 (979) 764-5400 ARCHITECT: VLK ARCHITECTS, INC. STEVE ALOWAY, AIA, LEED® AP 7915 FM 1960 WEST, SUITE 214 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77070 (281) 671-2300 FAX (281) 671-2313 STRUCTURAL MY•D STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS ENGINEER: MAHENDRA P. YAJNIK, P.E. 305 N.E. LOOP 820, SUITE 507 HURST, TX 76053 817.284.8056 817.284.5075 fax Copyright (C) 2008, VLK Architects, Inc. .gar,.....: ..11 INUK .. .. .. .i 43432 sue• �' ' �•••..__..••_ .cam • MEP ENGINEER: KALMANS MARSHALL ENGINEERING, INC. MELVIN KALMANS, P.E. 10930 W. SAM HOUSTON PARKWAY N., SUITE 900 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77064 (281) 664-1900 (281) 664-1912 FAX • Copyright (C) 2008, VLK Architects, Inc. • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Section 00 3132 - Geotechnical Data ............................................... . DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work ................................................ 0 12300 - Alternates .........................:............................ 012900- Payment Procedures .............................................. 013100 - Project Management and Coordination ............... ................. . 013119 - Project Meetings ................................................. 013120 - Preconstruction Meetings .......................................... 013216 - Construction Progress Schedules .................................... 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples ............................ 013500 - Alteration Project Procedures ....................................... 014100 - Regulatory Requirements .......................................... 014200- References..................................................... 01 4500 - Quality Control ................................................... 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services ..................................... 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls .................................... 016200 - Product Options .................................................. 016500 - Product Delivery Requirements ...................................... 016600 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching .............................................. 01 7413-Progress Cleaning ................................................ 01 7700- Closeout Procedures .............................................. 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data .................................... 01 7830 - Warranties and Bonds ............................................ . 01 7839 - Project Record Documents ......................................... 01 7840 - Spare Parts, Overages and Maintenance Materials ...................... DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 4119 - Selective Structure Demolition ...................................... . DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 00 3132-1-20 01 1100-1-4 01 2300-1-2 01 2900-1-2 01 3100-1 01 3119-1-2 01 3120-1 01 3216-1-2 01 3323-1-3 01 3500-1-4 01 4100-1 01 4200-1-5 01 4500-1-2 01 4523-1-5 01 5000-1-3 01 6200-1-5 01 6500-1 01 6600-1-2 01 7329-1-2 01.7413-1-2 01 7700-1-3 01 7823-1-3 01 7830-1 01 7839-1-2 01 7840-1 02 4119-1-3 Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forming and Accessories ................................... 03 1100-1-3 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing .............................................. 03 2000-1-2 03 3000 - Cast -in -place Concrete ............................................ 03 3000-1-7 03 3519 - Colored Concrete Finishing ......................................... 03 3519-1-3 DIVISION 04 and 05 - Not used. DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Section 06 1000- Rough Carpentry ................................................. DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 06 1000-1-3 Section 07 5150 - Built-up Bituminous Roofing Repair ................................... 07 5150-1-2 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ...................................... 07 6200-1-3 07 9200 - Joint Sealants ................................................... 07 9200-1-4 TABLE OF CONTENTS VLK Architects, 2008 TOC - 1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School CATE Renovations College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas DIVISION 08 - Not used. DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Section 09 9100 - Painting......................................................... 09 9100-1-7 DIVISION 10 - Not used. DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT Section 11 3423 -Spray Paint Booth ................................................ 11 3423-1-3 DIVISION 12 through 21 - Not used. DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section 22 0500 - Plumbing General Provisions ....................................... 22 0500-1-6 22 0510 - Plumbing Contract Quality Control ................................... 22 0510-1-2 22 2200 - Plumbing Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General ............................. 22 2200-1-5 DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Section 23 0100 - HVAC Operating and Maintenance Manuals ............................ 22 0100-1-4 23 0500 - Mechanical General Provisions ...................................... 23 0500-1-6 23 0510 - HVAC Contract Quality Control ...................................... 23 0510-1-2 23 0512 - HVAC Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings and Product Data ............ 23 0512-1-5 23 0513 - Electrical Provisions of HVAC Work .................................. 23 0513-1-3 23 0517-HVAC Access Doors .............................................. 23 0517-1 23 3113 - Ductwork....................................................... 23 3416 Fans 23 3113-1-6 - ........................................................... 23 3416-1-4 23 3713 - Air Devices ..................................................... 23 3713-1-2 23 4100 - Air Filtration..................................................... 23 4100-1 DIVISION 24 and 25 - Not used. DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 0100 - Electrical Operating and Maintenance Manuals ......................... 26 0100-1-4 26 0500 - Electrical General Provisions ........................................ 26 0500-1-10 26 0510 - Contract Quality Control ........................................... 26 0510-1-2 26 0519 - Conductors and Connectors - 600 Volt ................................ 26 0519-1-5 26 0533 - Conduit Systems .................................................. 26 0533-1-11 26 0537 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings ........................................ 26 0537-1-4 26 1216 - Three -Phase, Energy Efficient Dry -Type Harmonic Mitigating Transformers ... 26 1216-1-4 26 2416 - Panelboards and Enclosures ........................................ 26 2416-1-4 26 2425 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers ............................... 26 2425-1-3 26 2913 - Combination Motor Controllers ...................................... 26 2913-1-3 DIVISION 27 and 30 - Not used. DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK Section 31 1000-Site Clearing .................................................... 31 1000-1 312300 - Excavation and Fill ............................................... 31 2300-1-4 312313 - Building Subgrade Preparation ...................................... 31 2313-1-3 312333 - Trenching and Backfilling........................................... 31 2333-1-2 313200 - Soil Stabilization................................................. 31 3200-1-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS VLK Architects, 2008 TOC - 2 2737.04 0 Ll C11 0; A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving ................................................. 32 1313-1-3 32 3113 - Chain Link Fences and Gates ....................................... 32 3113-1-2 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES - Not used. DIVISION 34 through 40 - Not used. None in this project. DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT Section 410000 - Not used. DIVISION 42 through 49 - Not used. TABLE OF CONTENTS VLK Architects, 2008 TOC - 3 2737.04 109 1 0 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility • Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas DOCUMENT 00 3132 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 1.01 LOG OF BORINGS/CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY fr A• A copy of the locations and log of borings is bound herein. Subsurface soil data deriv given only for the convenience of the Contractor, and neither the Owner nor the Architect assumes for the accuracy of or for the Contractors interpretation of the data. Contractor is Architect assf m test borings are drawn from the boring data and is responsible for the work without extra compensation ibles men responsibility or not the subsurface conditions encountered agree with the boring data, or any conclusions 1 02 pective of whether REPORT A. The full geotechnical reportprepared by the Owner's independent geotechnical and testing laboratory is available in the Architect's office for inspection by the Contractor. B. This geotechnical report is not a part of the Contract Documents. VLK Architects, 2008 END OF DOCUMENT GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00 3132 -1 2737 nd C. C C. C C. C E ST ADHp SE t_D CD D rn W x � Qr r x Glk BM (6 GRANDST x x x 01 ((( 6/ x 19 5.) x x DSTAND KEY 100 0 100 FEET 2b � BORING LOCATION, DESIGNATION AND DEPTH PLAN OF BORINGS CME TESTINGOV45FWOWEPJNG, INC. STADIUM FIELD HOUSE/TURF REPLACEMENT \LY IV A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL PreparW For7 PROJECT.7119 LOCATION: COLLEGE STATION TEXAS COLLEGE STATION I.S.D. APPR: MFC I REV. DATE: — DRAWN BY: NCT/AEA I SCALE: AS SHOWN DATE: 10/31/07 1 FIGURE NO.: 2 LOG OF BORING NO. B-1 PROPOSED STADIUM FIELD HOUSE ADDITION C i LOG OF BORING NO. B-2 PROPOSED STADUIM FIELD HOUSE ADDITION CSISD HIGH SCHOOL ATHLETIC FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: LedfordAm LOCATION: See Plan of Borings bi DESCRIPTION OF MATERLii. SURFACE BIEVA?ION: Not Known x r. a b3 2 o k �� 4 D N -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFlNED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIADaAL SHEAR TEST COHEMON, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 Q50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 plastic Waterumit L[quid 10 20 30 n � 50 60 �70 Medium dense to dense, tan and red, very clayey SAND. with seams and pockets of —ten, sand. dry becoming brownish —tan from 1' to 2' -�• --- 7 ' 7 FYn gjn 1.5+ no to eery , r —gray. raft CIAT. $ odium dense to dense, reddish —brown, with of gray, clayey SAND, with seems of and tan, fat clay, slightly moist 31 % es 1.5+ to ♦ery stiff, tan to brown, fat CLAY, th vertical seams of dark gray. sandy. fat y, slightly moist 1 — — -- 90.2 --- Z ft -- tes �. Very stiff to hard, dark brown, sandy, fat ClAY, with seams and pockets of tan sand. buy moist sand seams becoming thicker at IS to 18' Oaf) 47.3 F4n ( d S 1.5+ mm) 1.5+ 2 2 10 15 20 25 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 2W DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: Borehole dry during and DATE: 09/15/07 DATE: immediately after drilling on 09/15/07 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-4 PROPOSED NEW MULTI —SUPPORT FIELD HOUSE ADDITION CSISD HIGH SCHOOL ATHLETIC FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE 3-1/2" Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Ledford/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings a a ` • ' DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known x a' ii; 10 -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIAIMAL SHEAR TEST COBESION. TON/SQ. Fr. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic water Liquid t Content, 7i 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 laose to medium dense. brawn, clayey SAND. dry 41 + 6 RR --- 1 Ms 5 light grayish —tan, very sandy. lean Y, moist to median dense, light tgrayish—tan, aSAND, slightly moist 5 R es tiff to very atilt, grayish —ten, tat CLAY, with sand and with oreagish—brown and brown ferrous stains, slightly moist — 7 — .7 R --- Fine -- -+ 10 to very stilt, brawn to dark brown, tat ClAY, with sand, and with numerous thin seem of light tan sand, slightly moist —becoming dark brown from 1&5' to 29' with pockets and seams of Tight tan sand below IU' UNDILTER NOM 9. Borehole dry during drilling on 09/15/07 Water level at 24' depth immediately otter drilling on 09/15/07 8&1 _ X F nes 9 1.5+ 1 5 20 26 90 COMPLETION DEPTH: 25' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: See notes above DATE: 09/15/07 DATE See notes above CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. • LOG OF BORING NO. B-5 PROPOSED NEW MULTI —SUPPORT FIELD HOUSE ADDITION CSISD HIGH SCHOOL ATHLETIC FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Ledford/IEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings q o DESCRI]MON OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known .� o a'� o $ A R ] a 19 -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIADOAL SHEAR TEST COLON, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic hater Liquid Content, x Limit ----- 10 20 30 400 50 60 �70 brown, very sandy. lean CLAY, dry to slightly moist RR Very stiff. grayish -tan, sandy. lean CLAY, with vertical seams of grayclayey sand, moist with small orange ferrous stains, becoming slightly moist to moist below 4' 57. six X _ es L5+ 5 Very stiff, light grayish -tan. sandy, lean ClAY, with small orangish-brown, ferrous stains. slightly moist to moist -- B x E31 Very stiff, light grayish -tan, fat CLAY, with sand, and with seams of dark, brown, fat may, and with orangish-brown, ferrous slightly moist to moist _ _ 772 # X _ _ _ es _ 117— 1.5+ 10 Very stiff, mottled, dark brown and brown, at CLAY, with sand, and with pockets of range sand, slightly moist becoming dark brown below 18' with numerous seams of light gray sand, metimes thinly interbedded below 23' ♦ 62. 61.4F1 ♦ x F Sand nes aes 1 -+ 1.6+ 1.5+ 15 20 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 25' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: Borehole dry dunng'and DATE. 09/15/07 DATE: immediately after drilling on 09/15/07 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-6 PROPOSED FOOTBALL FIELD TURF REPLACEMENT PROJECT CSISD HIGH SCHOOL ATHLETIC FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS COLLEGE STATION. TEXAS 0 -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST «p A -- TRIAWAL SHEAR TEST COMMON, TON/SQ. FT. DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL 4! 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plague ater ■ a �� ° Limit Content, X Limit --- -- --- -- -} SURFACE EI.evATtoN: Not Known g o'3 � 10+-- 0 404- 20 3-50 so- 70 gray. cat UAT, WiTa 80110. 10018L miog gray below S' &-tan, fat CLAY, with sand, and with a and oranglsh-brown ferrous stains. 73. III COMPLETION110/0 /DEPTH 6' DDTE nmediotely oftTO WATER IN ardiing anBorehole / 7 during and III LOG OF BORING NO. B-7 PROPOSED FOOTBALL FIELD TURF REPLACEMENT PROJECT CSISD HIGH SCHOOL ATHLETIC FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS LOCATIOW Son Plan of Rarinm y, a DE.9CRlPTION OF MATERIAL STIRFACB BL6VATiAN: Not Known x s�3 d .. ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O — UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- 1RIADGAL SHEAR TEST COMMON. TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 Q75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic Oaten Limit content. x Liquid 10} 20 30 40- 50 60 70 to dark brova SAND One GRAYS. Dark gray; fat CLAY. With sand, slightly moist to moist -becombg gray below S' With streaks al tan below 4' 5 Graylalt-tan. fat CLAY, with send. and with ferrous stahm 311AUT moist to moist - _ - -- 10 COMPLETION DEPTH: 6' DEPTH TO WATER IN t?ORINO: Borehde dry during and DATE: 10/09/07 DAIS: immedioteiy after drIlIng an 10/09/07 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. • LOG OF BORING NO. B-8 PROPOSED FOOTBALL FIELD TURF REPLACEMENT PROJECT CSISD HIGH SCHOOL ATHLETIC FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS DESCRDPTION OF MATERIAL j a a ] SURFACZ n VATION: Not Known vw[] oath gray, sandy tat cuy. raptly moist gist becoming dark gray with streaks of tan below 9' 5 with germs of dark gray day below 4' 9 -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONRNED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIADOAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 p' A Plastic I I water «� Limit Content, X 10} 20 30 40 50 60 #70 67 III COMPLETION /DEPTH: 6' D07 EPTH i7nWw�y IN BORING: Borehole dry during and III LOG OF BORING NO. B-9 PROPOSED FOOTBALL FIELD TURF REPLACEMENT PROJECT CSISD HIGH SCHOOL ATHLETIC FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS LOCATIONLSM Plan of Barinna ^ DESCRIPTION OF HATERIAL SURFACE 11MATION. Not Known 1~ a. p'a « • -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFlNED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIADOAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. 0- 5 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic water Ltquld limit Content, X . t 10+ 20 30 40 —50 — 60 "70 rown SAND. fine grained. aiightty moist finegralued, withtan sand rbeeoming Ydark Drown and dark gray sandyAY. slightly moist —tan and dark gray below 9' 5 —tan and gray. sandy. fat CLAY, slightly becotray, with places of wood below 5' • --56, -- --- I� OhIPLE110NDEPTH: 6' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING Borehole dry during and Fpc- ATE: 1o/Os/07 DATE immediately after drming on 10/O9/07 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-10 PROPOSED FOOTBALL FIELD TURF REPLACEMENT PROJECT CSISD HIGH SCHOOL ATHLETIC FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS COLLEGE STATION. TEXAS ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIADOAL SHEAR TEST DESCRIPTION OF VATEMAL COLLBS[ON. TON/SQ. F!. ; M25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 `� a A. p' Plastic water Liquid I ~ 1A pt content.x ---- Lg�it SURFACE ffiSVAY[ON: Not Known 10 20 30 40 50 60-}70 9my. Emy, 10 t7-11 II II II II II 1 l l l l l l l COMPLETION DEPTH: 6' DEPTH TO, WATER IN BORING: Borehole dry during and DATE 10/09/07 DAIS immediately after drilling on 10/09/07 LOG OF BORING NO. B-11 PROPOSED FOOTBALL FIELD TURF REPLACEMENT PROJECT CSISD HIGH SCHOOL ATHLETIC FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS COLLEGE STATION. TEXAS 9 DESCRipfION OF NA?EBLAL. SURFACK IMATION: Not Known a' � 0 -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIADCAL SHEAR TEST COiiIC310N, ?ON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plague Water Liquid Limit Content. x It 10} 20 30 40— 50 60 70 mediumgained. dW&Uy moist d brown panel,, fine pWnedfat FiDSAN, CLAY. with and. ftOy moistto81 intermix d Drawn and dart[ pay S' Finming 5 y. fat CLAY with arsoge ferrous stains 10 COMPLETION DEPTH: 6' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: Borehole dry during and DATE 10/09/07 DATE immediately after drWhg an 10/09/07 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. 0 • ty, • KEY TO SYMBOLS AND SOIL CLASSIFICATION . Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487) SAMPLE TYPES COAWSSIVE STRENGTH TESTS AND LABORATORY TEST DATA 0+0A cow SpR d Penrbometbr Oishabed Cuttigs No Hood Tamar Uneardard Canpression U-U Tube Recovery Par4anew Recovery Trimud 30Q Rix - Pace nt Finer than No. 200 Serve Major Divisions Group Symbols Typical Names Relative Density of Coarse Strained Soils o • z a z° GW% 's well -Graded Grovels` Gravel -Sand hGzt�ues. Little or No Fines penetration Resistance motive c3 (81oas/Pte) Term s (n FOle J o M i-n e0-4 i i3 d Vey 4-10 ��L� GP • ~ t Poorly Graded Grovels. Grovel -Sand Mixtures, Little No Flees Q o ; or 10-30 Medium Dense 30-50 J O OC 5. N Dense Over 50 Very Dense .. • Silty Gravels, Gravel -sand -Sit zd N � + GM 5 o Mixtures •Based on driving a split -barrel GC Clayey Gravels, Gravd-sand-Clay W Z a w sampler with a 140 lb weight dropped 30 inches Q Mixtures a Soil Modifiers zo $ zo SW wex-Graded sands, Gravelly sander w t S •::::.•. Little or No Fines Q c� �" oo `' 25 CLAYEY SP Poorly Graded sands. Gravelly v = D Za Sands, Little or No Fines = SM silty sands, sand -silt Mixtures Qzi�iy N S z SILTY z �� .. F f SANDY ! SC Clayey Sands, Sand -Clay Wadixes Consistency Terms of Fine -Grained Soils S ML ko►9ank silt, with slight Plasticity 5 J1` v o compressive Strength. 9u Descr!pUve (ton/s9 h) Tam CL Inorganic Clays of Low to Medium Plasticity, Gravelly pays, Lean Cloys O Q 0 to M25 OL r r r r r Organic Silts and Organic Silty p a "�' U j V Soft M25 to 0.50 soft W a Z v p 1 r r r r r Clays of tow Plasticity I M50 to 1.00 Firm 1.00 to 2.00 stiff Q S a s MH Inorganic Silts. Micaceous or Diatomoeears Fine sand or Silty, 2-00 to 4.00 Very Stiff Over 4.00 Hard o Soft Elastk Sits CH Inorganic says of Nigh Plasticity. Fat sage N E 5 Groundwater Levels 5 0 - srAnc WATER t.EvEL OH Organic says of Medlu n to High Plasticity. organic Silts V -HYDROSTATIC WATER LEVEL HARDNESS CLASSIFICATION OF INTACT ROCK Rock Classification APPROX. RANGE OF UNIAXIAL COMPRESSION STRENGTH lil lil HARDNESS (P.S.I.) SHALE :1:1=1:1 SILTSTONE EXTRUELY HARD >13.9W VERY NARD 6,940 - 13.900 LIMESTONE CLAYSTONE .1j/ HARD 3.470 - 6.940 SOFT 1,740 - 3,470 SANDSTONE COAL VERY SOFT 70 - 1,740 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC. CME T E ST I N G AND E N G I N E E R I N G, I N C. '/ : Summary of Laboratory Test Results L--3 w �'' i_' /~'. l^� f^ �, /-`• f ''` f 7 0 004- 0 ,i '� ,{` 7 r^' (:: xi k �.. _. _. CIVIE T E S T I N G A N D E N G I N E E R I N G, I N C. SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS Proposed CSISD A&M Consolidated High School Proposed Stadium Field House Addition, Proposed New Multi -Support Field House, and Proposed Football Field Turf Replacement Project; Welsh Avenue near Nueces Drive; College Station, Texas Boring No. Sample No. De tb Moisture Content Percent Fines (4200 Sieve) Liquid Limit Plastic Limit Plasticity Index Compression Strength Strain Lateral Pressure Type of Failure DryDensity Pocket Penetro- meter' Comments (ft) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) NO (%) (psi) (Pcn (tsf) _B-1 S -1_ 0.2 6.2 39.1 25 15 10 — — -- -- -- _....... 1.75_tsf --_. __ _ S 2_.. 2.4 ._ — _ .. » ..� » _ .. 4.5+ tsf S - 3 4 - 6 14.9 45.7 29 15 14 -- -- -- -- 4.5+ tsf S - 4 6-8 — -- » — ._ » ._ .. _. .. 4.5+ tsf _ S - 3- 8 - 10 32.2 - 73.6 57 37 -- = -- -- — + 4.5+ tsf _20 — _.._ S - 6 13. 1 S » » » ._ .. .. _- .. V .. 4.5+ tsf S - 7 18 - 20 3.75 tsf S - 81 23 - 25 -- -- -. — .. .. » .. .. ._ 4.5+ tsf See Notes at end of table. B-1 f C M E TESTING AND ENGINEERING, I N C. SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS Proposed CSISD A&M Consolidated High School Proposed Stadium Field House Addition, Proposed New Multi -Support Field House, and Proposed Football Field Turf Replacement Project; Welsh Avenue near Nueces Drive; College Station, Texas Boring No. Sample No. De tb Moisture Content Percent Fines (4200 Sieve) Liquid Limit Plastic Limit Plasticity Index Compression Strength Strain Lateral Pressure Type of Failure Dry Density Pocket Penetro- meter' Comments (psi) (pcn (Wn B-2 S - 1 0-2 7.7 44.7 32 16 16 _� — -- — _�- 3.0 tsf 25 R S - 2 2-4 11.4 45.7 41 18 23 -- — -- -- -- 4.5+ tsf S - 3 4-6 9.1 31.4 33 16 17 — — -- -- -- 4.5+ tsf S - 4 6-8 38.2 90.2 75 22 53 - 3.75 tsf S - 5 8 - 10 -- — — -- -- -- -- — -- -- 92.0 .......... ............ ... 3.75 tsf 4.5+ tsf S - 6 13. 15 34.8 47.3 53 19 34 4.4 2.4% 0 Shear S - 7 18 - 20 -- — — _ _ __ _ _ ___...-.__ .. __ 4.5+ tsf S - 8 23 - 25 -- _ _ -. _ _ ._ ._ _ _ 4.0 tsf See Notes at end of table. CME -TESTING AND ENGINEERING, I N C. SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS Proposed CSISD A&M Consolidated High School Proposed Stadium Field House Addition, Proposed New Multi -Support Field House, and Proposed Football Field Turf Replacement Project; Welsh Avenue near Nueces Drive; College Station, Texas Boring No. Sample No. Depth Moisture Content Percent Fines (-#= Sieve) Liquid Limit Plastic Limit Plasticity Index Compression Strength Strain Lateral Pressure Type of Failure Dry Density Pocket Penetro- meter' Comments (psi) (Pei) (tso B-3 S 1 0-2 » -. -. __ » » » .. .. 2.7Htsf _(2 ft)_....__.._..............-- S - 2 _2.4 _16.3 60.0 46 _18 28 4.5+ tsf S - 3 4-6 4.25 tsf .......__. ,..........._ ....._.._ ...... S - 4 6.8 4.25 tsf S - 5 8 -10 34.9 87.9 64 21 43 » » -- -- -- 4.5+ tsf S-6 13-15 » » — — » .. » » » -- 4.0tsf S-7 18-20 » » » 4.5+tsf See Notes at end of table.; B-3 - - CME TESTING -AND- ENGINEERING, I N C. SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS Proposed CSISD A&M Consolidated High School Proposed Stadium Field House Addition, Proposed New Multi -Support Field House, and Proposed Football Field Turf Replacement Project; Welsh Avenue near Nueces Drive; College Station, Texas Boring No. Sample No. Depth Moisture Content Percent Fines (4200 Sieve) Liquid Limit Plastic Limit Plasticity bdez Compression Strength Strain Lateral Pressure Type of Failure Dry Density Pocket Penetro- meter' Comments (ft) (%) (%) (%) (%) ('/o) (tsf) ('/o) (psi) (pet) (tst) B4 S - 1 ..__._ 0.2 _._.. 9.6 _ 44.6 32 16 _._._._.._.. 16 _ .__.._-. — ..---_._....._._........_ -- _.._.._._...._.._..__......._.__..__. — — -- ____...__ _ 1.75 tsf _.._...__..___ _.__.__...-......_-_ �?SftZ .............. S - 2 2-4 — — -- — _- -- -- -- 3.0 tsf S - 3 4.6 20.1 56.0 29 15 14 -- — -- -- 2.5 tsf _............... S - 4 6.8 18.0 27.5 27 16 11 -- -- — -- 0.75 tsf S - 5 8.10 31.7 73.7 66 21 45 -- -- -- - -- 3.25 tsf S - 6 13 - 15 32.3 72.5 60 21 39 1.5 3.1% 0 Shear 88.1 4.5+ tsf S - 7 18 - 20 -- _. -- .. .. -_ .. __ - -- -- 4.0 tsf S - 8 23 .. 25 — — — -- -- -_ — -- -- -- 2.25 tsf See Notes at end of table. � ,.:.., �" �•'.�j 4`'� it :� �,, : t,. � � ,: � ,,...� � �: q � t:: CIVIE TESTING AND ENGINEERING, I N C. SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS Proposed CSISD A&M Consolidated High School Proposed Stadium Field House Addition, Proposed New Multi -Support Field House, and Proposed Football Field Turf Replacement Project; Welsh Avenue near Nueces Drive; College Station, Texas Boring No. Sample No. Depth Moisture Content Percent Fines (4200 Sieve) Liquid Limit Plastic Limit Plasticity Index Compression Strength Strain Lateral Pressure Type of Failure Dry Density Pocket Penetro- meter' Comments (ft) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (tsf) (%) (Psi) (PN (tsq _B-5 S -1 0.2 14.6 53.8 20 14 6 --�� --1.25 tsf 25 ft — — — __ _ — --- --- — _ ----- �_ S - 2 2.4 16.4 57.2 35 17 18 — — — -- -- — -- 3.75 tsf S.3 4.6 17.7 62.8 34 1 16 18 - --4.5+ tsf S - 4 6.8 19.3 61.7 48 19 29 -- -- -- -- — 3.25 tsf S - 5 8. 10 34.6 77.2 58 20 38 -- -- — — — 4.5+ tsf S - 6 13 -15 — -- __ _ .. ._ .. .. — 4.5+ tsf S - 7 18-20 26.1 61.4 56 19 __._ 37 __._.---.- — __--__ -- _____ -- _.__-_•— -- ---.._.__._.__.._..._.._..__.......... -- N.A. b _....... ....__.._..__.___._. S - 8 23 - 25 22.3 62.4 26 15 11 — -- — - - 4.5+ tsf See Notes at end of table. B-5 C M E TESTING AND ENGINEERING, I N C. SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS Proposed CSISD A&M Consolidated High School Proposed Stadium Field House Addition, Proposed New Multi -Support Field House, and Proposed Football Field Turf Replacement Project; Welsh Avenue near Nueces Drive; College Station, Texas Boring No. Sample No. Depth Moisture Content Percent Fines (4200 Sieve) Liquid Limit Plastic Limit Plasticity Index Compression Strength Strain Lateral Pressure Type of Failure Dry Density Pocket Penetro- meter' Comments (ft) (•/.) (•h) (°h) ('h) (%) (tN ow (psi) (pcn NO B-6 S - 3 2-3 33.7 73.7� 80 24 56 -- — — -- (6 ft . .._..._..._____..._ -- ..,..._...__....._ -- ....... ............................._..... S - 5 4.5 39.9 80.3 58 20 38 -- -- -- — -- -....—................._......._........__................. -- -- ...... ................... B-7 S - 6 5-6 T` 27.3 70.6 50 19 31 — — _. -- -- 6 ft) ......- - -- - -- B-8 S - 3 -- 2 - 3 21.4 67.1 54 19 35 _J6ft �. _ S - 4 3.4 22.8 64.0 1 53 20 33 — — -- -- See Notes at end of table. 4D 0 0 0 10 ("So 0 0 9 0 0 0 9 0 0 (�� ('I r f.1 0: C M E TESTING AND ENGINEERING, I N C. SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS Proposed CSISD A&M Consolidated High School Proposed Stadium Field House Addition, Proposed New Multi -Support Field House, and Proposed Football Field Turf Replacement Project; Welsh Avenue near Nueces Drive; College Station, Texas Boring No. Sample No. Depth Moisture Content Percent Fines (4200 Sieve) Liquid Limit Plastic Limit Plasticity Index Compression Strength Strain Lateral Pressure Type of Failure Dry Density Pocket Penetro- meter' Comments (tsf) M (psi) (pet) (B>l -- ...............-._..__...__.._._... __....... . ....... .. ...... B-9 S - 6 5-6 16.1 56.2 45 18 27 - -- - -- 6ft _..__-.._ __...__._._ _._...__....__.... ..._....__....... ..... ._ B-10 S - 4 3-4 17.9 54.3 41 18 23 (6 ft ................................. - _B-11 S - 3 2-3 34.1 81.2 61 21 W 40 --_ -- - -- ..._._._._................. ..._...._ -- _j6 I+____ _ Notes: a. PP - Pocket penetrometer reading. Estimate of unconfined compression strength in tons per square foot (tsf). b. NA - PP Not Applicable due to granular nature of sample or sample disturbance. c. N - blow count from Standard Penetration Test d. NP — Non -plastic, i.e., Liquid Limit (LL) — Plastic Limit (PL) - 0 Plasticity Index (PI). B-7 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 1100 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Documents/Sections 1. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules: Format of work schedule. 2. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services. 3. Section 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The work comprises the Renovation and Addition of the Agricultural Facility at A&M Consolidated High School for College Station Independent School District, College Station, Texas, as shown on the drawings and described in the Project Manual. The work shall be done under one lump sum contract. B. Indication on the drawings or mention in the specifications of articles, materials, operations or methods requires that the Contractor provide each item indicated or mentioned of the quality or subject to the qualifications noted, and perform according to the conditions stated each operation described and provide therefor all necessary labor, equipment, services and incidentals. 1. All subcontractors are responsible for examining the architectural drawings for structural, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing items. Any items shown on these drawings shall be furnished by the appropriate subcontractor. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the bidding documents, including Drawings and Specifications, by additions, deletions, clarifications . or corrections. Addenda will become part of the Contract Documents when the Construction Contract is executed. B. "VLK Architects, Inc.' will be hereafter referred to in this Project Manual as "Architect" and all correspondence shall be addressed to: 7915 FM 1960 West, Suite 214, Houston, Texas 77070. C. "College Station ISD' will be hereafter referred to in this Project Manual as "Owner". D. "Pepper -Lawson Construction L.P." Will be hereafter referred to in the Bidding Documents as "Construction Manager", "General Contractor", or "Contractor". E. Suppliers and Subcontractors will be hereafter referred to in the Construction Documents as "Contractor", "Subcontractor", "Supplier", "Proposer", or "Offerer". F. Miscellaneous Definitions 1. The term "product" as used in the Construction Documents includes materials, systems, and equipment. 2. The term "provide" as used in the Construction Documents means to furnish and install. 1.03 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. Subcontractors may review a copy of the General Conditions of the Contract and Supplementary Conditions at the Construction Manager's offices, form a part thereof and shall govern the work under each section. 1.04 EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall visit and examine the site. Upon award of the Contract, the Contractor shall accept the condition of the site before beginning the work required. 1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Construction Manager shall be required to use the project management website system (Projectmates) at • www.vlkprojects.com during the Construction Phase of this project. All Submittals, RFI's, ASI's, and other construction documents shall be submitted and managed through this website based system. SUMMARY OF WORK VLK Architects, 2008 01 1100 -1 2737.04 ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Construction Manager shall assume responsibility for the protection of all areas of work and shall provide and maintain all protections required. Provide necessary dust screens, drop cloths and temporary walls and/or coverings as may be required for protection. Existing surfaces that are damaged due to construction shall be patched or replaced to original condition. C. Execute Certificate of Substantial Completion for each designated portion of work prior to Owner occupancy. Following execution of a Substantial Completion Certificate for a designated portion of the work, the Contractor shall permit: 1. Access for Owner personnel. 2. Use of parking facilities for the benefit of the Owner. 3. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems for the benefit of the Owner. Despite partial Owner occupancy, the Contractor shall remain responsiblefor all portionsof the work which have not attained Substantial Completion and for which a Substantial Completion Certificate, which shall designate the date on which the Owner shall become responsible for utilities, maintenance, security, damage to the work and insurance, has not been executed. D. The loop fire lane and fire hydrants are required by the City to be in place and operational prior to steel erection. 1.06 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION A. Work shall be started upon formal "Notice -to -Proceed" and shall reach Substantial Completion August 15, 2008. 1.07 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Construction Manager shall limit use of premises for work, for storage and for access, to allow for Owner occupancy. B. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner. C. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract. D. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed when required for operations under this Contract. E. There shall be no fires on the site or in the building. There shall be no dumping on Owner's property. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Drawing details and other sections of these specifications covering work connected with or relating to that specified under a specific heading shall be examined for conditions which may affect that part of the work. Failure to do so will not relieve those furnishing materials and/or labor under a specification heading from supplying materials or performing work reasonably necessary to properly coordinate theirwork with that of other trades. 1.9 LAYING OUT WORK, MEASUREMENTS A. Employ a competent engineer or surveyor to establish and maintain lines and levels. Establish and maintain at least two elevation bench marks remote from each other and located outside the building area. Set alignment and location stakes. B. Verify all measurements at the building. No extra compensation will be allowed for differences between actual dimensions and dimensions indicated on the drawings. In all cases, figured dimensions and measurements taken at the site shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. 1.10 DISCREPANCIES A. In case of discrepancies within the drawings, within the specifications, or between the drawings and specifications, the better quality and greater quantity, in the opinion of the Architect, shall be furnished and installed. • • • SUMMARY OF WORK VLK Architects, 2008 01 1100 - 2 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 0 1.11 PIPING A. Should active piping or conduit be encountered below grade within the building structure and be found at variancewith the known conditions indicated by the drawings and specifications, said piping and/or conduit shall be relocated as required by the Architect, and the contract sum shall be fairly adjusted on the basis of the cost of labor and materials. The Contractor shall provide temporary support of active piping and conduit encountered in the excavations until permanently supported or removed. The Contractor shall cut off and cap or plug abandoned lines at least 3 ft. outside the building lines. In all cases, conform to the applicable requirements of the locality or governing agency. 12 PROTECTION A. General: Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated; allow for Owner occupancy in adjacent spaces and around the site. 1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of the building which are outside the areas construction operations are indicated, are not to be disturbed. 2. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner and the Owner's employees at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials without prior approval. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. 3. Do not dispose of organic and hazardous material on site, either by burial or by burning. All disposable material and trash must be removed properly. B. Construction Manager shall take over and assume responsibilityforthe premises and shall provide and maintain all protections required by the governing laws, regulations and ordinances. The Construction Manager shall be responsible for any loss or damage caused by him or his workmen to the property of the Owner or to the work or materials installed, and shall make good any loss, damage or injury without cost to the Owner. C. The protection of adjacent property shall include but will not necessarily be limited to the erection and maintenance of shoring, underpinning and fences as necessary to protect and support existing work to be left D. in place. Finished floors be shall protected against damage by workmen and equipment during the work. Where materials are carried into the building, the building floors shall be covered to protect the work against dirt or grit being ground in. E. Trees and shrubs on the site which do not have to be removed for the new work shall be protected against damage. No Contractor shall remove or trim any trees and shrubs in the area without the express approval of the Architect. F. Construction Manager shall send proper notices, make necessary arrangements and perform other services required for the care, protection and maintenance of Public Utilities, including fire plugs and wires and all other items of this character on and around the building site. G. Construction Manager shall maintain accessible all building exits required by the City during all phases of construction. Protection of these exits shall include dust -proof enclosures, illumination and exit lighting required. 1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and chasing of existing construction for relocation of mechanical and electrical work and for installation of pipes and ducts will be done by the trades concerned. All patching and finishing shall be done by the Contractor. This work shall be done with proper tools and by careful workmen of the particular trade to which such work belongs and shall be done without extra cost to the Owner. 1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Construction Manager shall maintain a complete clean set of "blueline" prints in the project field office for the sole purpose of recording installed" conditions. Installed conditions shall include addendum items, change orders, or any other items which come up during the construction phase which deviate from the Construction Documents. All changes made in these drawings in connection with the final construction and installation shall be neatly made in red ink on the prints. Upon completion of the project, the marked set of prints shall be delivered to the Architect for subsequent transmittal to the Owner. These drawings shall be maintained to reflect the current conditions of the work and changes shall be reviewed on a monthly basis with the Architect's representative. The Contractor's updating of the "installed" condition drawings shall be a prerequisite to the monthly review of the Contractor's payment request by the Architect's representative. SUMMARY OF WORK VLK Architects, 2008 01 1100 - 3 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.15 INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING ASBESTOS A. In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos which has not been rendered harmless, the Construction Managershall immediately stop work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner in writing. If, in fact the material is asbestos and has not been rendered harmless, the work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed until the asbestos has been removed or rendered harmless by the Owner. The work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos, or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Construction Manager. B. The Construction Manager shall not be required to perform without consent any work relating to asbestos. END OF SECTION • VLK Architects, 2008 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100 - 4 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station Independent School District College Station, Texas SECTION 012300 ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Requirements Included: 1. Identification and description of alternate work. 2. The amount shown in the Proposal Form for each alternate shall include all overhead, profit, insurance and other costs incidental to the performance under the alternate. B. Related Requirements% 1. Proposal Form: Quotation of cost of each alternate. 2. Contract Form: Alternates by Owner for incorporation into the work. 3. Section of specifications identified in each alternate. 1.02 PROCEDURES A. Proposers are required to submit Alternate amounts to add work or to deduct work from the Base Proposal as described below. Failure to submit Alternate amounts in spaces provided on Proposal Form shall be basis for disqualification of Proposal. B. The successful Proposer shall not modify, withdraw or cancel any of the Alternate Proposals or any part thereof for 30 days after date of receipt of Proposals, unless specifically noted otherwise. C. Contractor shall be responsible for any changes in the Work affected by acceptance of Alternates. Claims for additional costs or time extensions resulting from changes to the Work as a result of the Owner's election of any or all Alternates will not be allowed. D. Refer to Drawings and Technical Specifications Sections for items of work affected by Altemates. E. Election of Alternates will be exercised at the option of Owner. F. Coordinate related work and modify or adjust surrounding work as required to complete the Work, including changes under each Alternate. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items incidental to, or required for, a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. 2. Cost listed for each alternate include cost of related coordination, modification, or adjustment. G. Notification: Immediately following the award of contract, Contractor shall prepare and distribute to each entity or person to be involved in the performance of the Work, a notification of the status of each alternate scheduled herein. Indicate which alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a_ complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates, if any. 1.03 SELECTION AND AWARD OF ALTERNATES A. Indicate variation in Base Proposal amount as a result of the prices for the Alternates described below and listed on the Proposal Form Document or any supplement to it, by adding to, or deducting from, the Base Proposal amount or by indicating " No Change." B. Indicating "No Proposal" as an alternate is unacceptable and is reason for rejection of proposal. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: State in the Proposal Form the amount to be added to the Base Proposal for providing a Gas Fired Air Make Up Unit and Deluxe VFD Auto -Balance Panel as specified. Refer to Section 11 3423 - Spray Paint Booth. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION • Not Used ALTERNATES VLK Architects, 2006 01 2300 -1 0000.00 Project Name Owner Location END OF SECTION ALTERNATES VLK Architects, 2006 012300 - 2 0000.00 • C A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Applications and Certificates for Payment. 2. Change Order Procedures. 3. Schedule of Values: Submit to the Architect the Schedule of Values allocated to various portions ofthe work within 5 days after "Notice -to -Proceed". Upon request of Architect, support values with data which will substantiate their correctness. B. Related Documents/Sections: 1. Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 2. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules. 3. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 4. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. 1.02 APPLICATIONS AND CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT A. Progress payments shall be made as the work proceeds at intervals stated in the Contract. B. All work covered by progress payments shall, at the time of payment, become the property of the Owner. C. Form of Application and Certificate for Payment shall be notarized AIA Document G702 - Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AIA document G703 - Continuation Sheet, submitted in quintuplicate. D. Conditions governing regular schedule for applications, payment and retainage are as stated in the Contract. E. With each Application for Payment, Contractor shall certify that such Application for Payment represents a just estimate of cost reimbursable to Contractor under terms of Contract. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. Contractor to submit to Architect within 5 days of execution of Owner/Contractor Agreement name of individual authorized to accept changes on behalf of Contractor, and to be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ of changes in the work. B. Change Order forms will be furnished and issued by Architect. C. Contractor Documentation of Changes: 1. Maintain detailed records of work done on an accounting basis acceptable to Architect and Owner. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes. 2. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation. 3. On request, provide additional data to support computations: a. Quantities of products, labor and equipment. b. Insurance and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 4. Support each request for additional costs, and for work proposed on a time and material basis, with description of products, equipment, cost of labor and subcontracts, completely documented. 5. Computation for changes in work will be computed in one of the manners described in the Conditions of the Contract. D. Initiation of Changes: 1. Architect may submit Proposal Request which includes detailed description of change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications. 2. Contractor may initiate a proposed change by submittal of a request to Architect describing proposed change with statement of reason for change, and proposed effect on Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement of the effect on work of separate contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with SECTION 016200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS. Submission of such requests and receipt of same by Architect does not mean acceptance, or approval of proposed change. VLK Architects, 2008 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas E. Authorization: 1. The Owner may request, through the Architect, a Construction Change Directive, in writing, instructing Contractor to proceed with changes of all or in part of work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order that is pending. Directive will propose basis for necessary adjustments, if any, to Contract Sum or Time. 2. All changes that affect Contract Sum and/or Contract Time will require a Change Order signed by the Owner and the Architect. Contractor's signature indicates agreement. Any other orders, written or oral, by the Owner through the Architect or by the Architect shall be treated as a Change Order only if Contractor gives Owner proper written notice as described in Conditions of Contract 3. Promptly execute the change in work only upon receipt of approved Change Order or Owner's written Construction Change Directive. F. Execution: 1. Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of Contract. 2. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust Contract Sum as shown on Change Order. 3. Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub -schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by Change, and resubmit Schedule. 4. Promptly enter Changes in Project Record Documents. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM AND CONTENT A. Type schedule on 8%"x 11"white paper; Contractor's standard forms and automated printout will be considered for approval by Architect upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with: 1. Title of project and location. 2. Architect and Architect's project number. 3. Name and address of Contractor. 4. Contract designation. 5. Date of submission. B. Follow the table of contents of this project manual as the format for listing component items. 1. Identify each fine item with the number and title of the respective major section of the specifications. C. For each major line item list sub -values of major products or operations under the item. D. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total contract sum. E. Indicate separate value associated with materials and labor. F. Resubmittal: After review by Architect, revise and resubmit schedule as necessary. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION • PAYMENT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2008 01 2900 - 2 2737.04 • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION A. Section Includes: Coordination of work of the contract. B. Related Sections 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Sequence of construction and Owner occupancy. 2. Section 013119 - Project Meetings. 3. Section 016200 - Product Options. 4. Section 017329 - Cutting and Patching. 5. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout submittals. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals and work of the various sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later. B. Coordinate sequence of work to accommodate Owner occupancy as specified in SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK. 1.03 MEETINGS A. In addition to progress meetings specified in SECTION 01 3119 - PROJECT MEETINGS, hold coordination meetings and pre -installation conferences with personnel and subcontractors to assure coordination of work. • 1.04 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for equipment, such as installing, connecting to and placing in service. C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating elements and effect on work of other sections. 1.05 COORDINATION OF SPACE A. Coordinate use of Project space and sequence of installation of mechanical and electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routings shown for pipes, ducts and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance and for repairs. B. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. 1.06 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion of portions of work designated for Owner partial occupancy. B. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by various sections for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owne►'s activities. C. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION VLK Architects, 2008 01 3100 -1 2737.04 • SECTION 013119 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas A. Section Includes 1. Scheduling and administration of progress meetings. 2. Pre -installation conferences. B. Related Sections 1. Section 013100 - Project Management and Coordination. 2. Section 01 3120 - Preconstruction Meetings: Owner's preconstruction conference and pre -mobilization conference. 3. Section 013216 - Construction Progress Schedules. 4. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 5. Section 014500 - Quality Control. 6. Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 7. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Architect will schedule and administer monthly construction progress meetings, throughout progress of work. He will prepare agenda and distribute notice of each meeting to participants B. Contractor shall make physical arrangements. C. Architect will preside at meetings. D. Location of Meetings: Construction Managers field office. E. Attendance: Contractor, job superintendent, and Architect Owner and professional consultants will attend as appropriate. Subcontractors and suppliers shall attend as Architect sees necessary to agenda. Anticipated Agenda 1. Review of Contractor's updated Construction Schedule. 2. Review of work in -progress. 3. Field observations, problems and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to work. 1.03 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When required in individual specification section, convene a pre -installation conference at work site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, work of the section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes and distribute copies within two days after conference to participants, with two copies to Architect. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures and coordination with related work. PROJECT MEETINGS VLK Architects, 2008 01 3119 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION An Not applicable. END OF SECTION • • PROJECT MEETINGS VLK Architects, 2008 01 3119 - 2 2737.04 • PART 1 - GENERAL ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 013120 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Contractor participation in preconstruction conferences. B. Related Sections/Documents 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Administrative Provisions. 2. Section 013100 -Project Management and Coordination: Coordination of multiple -contract work. 3. Section 013119 - Project Meetings. 1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Architect will schedule conference within 15 days after notice of award. B. Attendance: Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, and representatives of major subcontractors. C. Agenda 1. Submittal of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submittal of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values and progress schedule. 5. Designation of responsible personnel. 6. Procedures and processing offield decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications forpayments, proposal requests, change orders, allowances and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. 8. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. • 9. Owner's requirements and occupancy. 10. Temporary facilities. 11. Survey and building layout 12. Security and housekeeping procedures. 13. Procedures for testing. 14. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 15. Requirements for startup of equipment 16. Accessibility Issues. 17. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 18. Notice to proceed. 19. Color samples. 20. Procedures for site meetings. 21. Site access and security. 22. Substantial and final project completion procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. • END OF SECTION PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS VLK Architects, 2008 01 3120 -1 2737.04 • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 3216 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Procedures for preparation and submittal of construction progress schedules and periodical updating. B. Related Sections 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Work sequence. 2. Section 012100 -Allowances. 3. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 4. Section 012900 - Payment Procedures: Schedule of Values. 1.02 WORK SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Within 21 days of the contract date, Contractor shall prepare and submit a Critical Path construction schedule for the work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Contractor shall prosecute the work vigorously and make every effort to start and complete each phase of the work on or before the dates stated. B. Should actual construction of project vary from the Critical Path schedule, Contractor shall take whatever actions are necessary to improve progress as quickly as possible in order to meet pre -determined milestones. Revise and re -submit schedule not less than every 30 calendar days. Presentation of the existing or updated Critical Path schedule, in three copies, along with the Certificate of Payment Request shall be a prerequisite to the monthly review of the payment request by the Architects representative. C. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. D. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions. E. Sheet Size: Minimum 11" x 17". 1.03 CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. B. Identify each item by major specification section number. C. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. D. Provide sub -schedules for each stage of work identified in SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK. E. Provide sub -schedules to define critical portions of entire schedule. F. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of work completed, as of the first day of each month. G. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data and samples, including Owner furnished products and products specified under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Show decision dates for selection of finishes. H. Show delivery dates for Owner furnished products and products specified under Allowances. I. Coordinate content with SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES, Schedule of Values. 1.04 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. B. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope and other identifiable changes. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES VLK Architects, 2008 01 3216 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed and its effect. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit initial Schedules within 15 days from Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within 5 days. B. Submit revised Critical Path Construction Schedule with each Application for Payment. C. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires plus two copies which will be retained by Architect. D. Submit under transmittal letter specified in SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. 1.06 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to job site file, subcontractors, suppliers and other concerned entities. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION • F- A CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES VLK Architects, 2008 01 3216 - 2 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 013323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Documents/Sections: 1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Definitions and basic responsibilities of entities. 2. Section 013100 - Project Management and Coordination: Coordination of submittals. 3. Section 013216 - Construction Progress Schedules: Schedules for submittals. 4. Section 014500 - Quality Control: Mockups and samples for testing. 5. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Project management software. 6. Section 016200 - Product Options. 7. Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 8. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. 1.02 GENERAL A. Refer to General Conditions, Paragraph 3.12 (Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples). B. Submit to the Architect, or applicable consultant, shop drawings, product data, and samples required by specification sections. Do not submit illegible fax copies nor carbon copies of shop drawings and product data. 1. The submittals shall be logged in by the Contractor and tracked using the "Submittal" feature in the Architect's project management program (Projectmates). C. Within 30 days of the contract date Contractor shall prepare and submit with the Schedule of Values a comprehensive list of shop drawings, product data and samples. This list shall include products which are proposed for substitution. Also include the estimated date of each submittal and anticipated date of submittal return. Allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.. is1. The list shall be compiled and submitted using the "Submittal" feature in the Architect's project management program (Projectrnates). D. Prepare list on basis of each specification section. E. For products specified under reference standards, include with listing of each product: 1. Name and address of manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data, including performance and test data, reference standards. 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepared by a qualified detailer. B. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on Contract Documents. C. Reproductions for Submittals: Reproducible transparency and three opaque diazo prints. D. Present in a clear and thorough manner original drawings which illustrate the portion of the work showing fabrication, layout, setting, or erection details, prepared by a qualified detailer. Title each drawing with Project and Contract name and number; identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, schedule, or room number of Contract Documents. 1.04 PRODUCT DATA A. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: 1. Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to the work. 2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information specifically applicable to the work. B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other ® standard descriptive data: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models. 2. Show dimensions and clearances required. 3. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES VLK Architects, 2008 01 3323 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Submit only pages which are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to specification section and Article number. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions; and required clearances. D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information not applicable. E. Submit number of copies of product data which the Contractor requires for distribution and for the Owner's record copy (to be turned over at project close-out), plus 2 copies which will be retained by the Architect and the Architect's Consultants. 1.05 SAMPLES A. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of product or material, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color samples. B. Field Samples and Mock-ups: 1. Erect at project site at location acceptable to Architect 2. Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including work of all trades required in finish work. 3. Install each sample complete and finished. Acceptable finishes in place may be retained in completed work. C. Submit full range of manufacturer's standard finishes except when more restrictive requirements are specified, indicating colors, textures and patterns, for Architect selection. D. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of products, including parts and attachments. E. Approved samples which may be used in the work are indicated in the specification section. F. Label each sample with identification required for transmittal letter. 1.06 CONTRACTOR REVIEW A. Review submittals prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements, field construction criteria, quantities and details, manufacturers catalog numbers and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Coordinate submittals with requirements of work and of Contract Documents. C. Sign or initial in a rubber-stamped review block format, each sheetof shop drawings and product data and each sample label to certify compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Notify Architect in writing at time of submittal, of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. D. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittals until return of submittal with Architect acceptance. E. Contractors responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals. F. Contractors responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of contract documents is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals, unless Architect gives specific written acceptance of deviations. Architect will review submittals for general conformance to design intent only. 1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Submit shop drawing and product data as soon as practicable after award of contract but not later than 30 days before dates reviewed submittals will be needed. 1. The submittals shall be logged in and tracked using the "Submittal" feature in the Architect's project management program (Projectmates). B. Submit all office samples as soon as practicable but not later than 60 days after award of contract in order to facilitate color selections and coordination of the various materials. Final color selections and release of shop drawings contingent upon color selection will not be made until all office samples have been submitted, coordinated and approved. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES VLK Architects, 2008 01 3323 - 2 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Reference SHOP DRAWINGS Paragraph, PRODUCT DATA Paragraph, and SAMPLES Paragraph within this specification section for submittal quantity requirements. D. Submittals to be reviewed by consultants shall be submitted directly to the applicable consultant with a copy of the transmittal simultaneously forwarded to the Architect's office. Submittals will be reviewed by the consultant and then delivered to the Architect for his review prior to returning them to the contractor. Submittals to be reviewed by the testing lab shall be handled in the same manner. E. Contractor is responsible for the costs associated with the delivery of all submittals to the Architect and the Architect's consultants and retrieval of all submittals from the Architect. F. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter containing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Identification of specification section and submittal numbers. 5. The number of each shop drawing, product data and sample submitted. 6. Notification of deviations from contract documents. 7. Other pertinent data. G. Submittals shall include: 1. Date and revision dates. 2. Project title and number. 3. Names of Architect, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier and manufacturer. 4. Identification of product or material and specification section number. 5. Relation to adjacent structure, materials or other critical features. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Applicable reference standards. 8. A blank space 3" x 4" for Architect's stamp. 9. Identification of deviations from contract documents. 10. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of field measurements, compliance with contract documents and coordination with requirements of the work. Note: Absence of the Contractor's stamp shall constitute grounds for rejection of the submittal until such time as the submittal has been processed in accordance with this requirement 11. Other pertinent data required by specifications. 1.08 RE -SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Re -submission: For shop drawings and product data not approved by Architect, make corrections and changes in submittals required by Architect and re -submit until approved. 1. The re -submission shall be logged in using the "Resubmit" feature in the Architect's project management program (Projectmates). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Revise initial drawings and re -submit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Indicate on drawings any changes which have been made, other than those requested by Architect. C. Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as specified for initial submittal 1.09 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS AFTER REVIEW A. Distribute reviewed copies of shop drawings and product data which carry Architect's stamp as follows: Contractor's file, project site file, record documents file, other prime contractors. B. Keep and maintain a full set of submittals throughout the construction phase to be submitted to the Architect with other Close-out documents for delivery to the Owner for his permanent record. Set of submittals shall be delivered to the Architect in cardboard file boxes with string and button type closures. Organize submittals by CSI divisions, utilizing neatly labeled pressboard dividers to separate the sections. Neatly label short end of box with project name, contents and duration of construction. END OF SECTION SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES VLK Architects, 2008 01 3323 - 3 2737.04 • C� • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 3500 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General: The procedures and administrative requirements of this section apply to all of the sections of the specification which are involved in alterations to the existing building. 2. Extent Notes: Cut into or partially remove portions of the existing buildings as necessary to make way for new construction. Include such work as: a. Cutting, moving, or removal of items shown to be cut, moved, or removed. b. Cutting, moving, or removal of items not shown to be cut, moved, or removed, but which must be cut, moved, or removed to allow the new work to proceed. Work or items which are to remain in the finished work shall be patched or reinstalled after their cutting, moving, or removal, and their joints and finishes made to match adjacent or similar work. c. Removal of existing surface finishes as needed to install new work or finishes. d. Removal of abandoned items and removal of items serving no useful purpose, such as abandoned piping. e. Repair or removal of dangerous or unsanitary conditions resulting from alterations work. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work; Sequence of construction and instructions concerning asbestos. 2. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 3. Section 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching. 4. Section 017413 - Progress Cleaning. 5. Section 02 4119 - Selective Structure Demolition. 1.02 SCHEDULING AND ACCESS A. Maintenance of Access and Operations: 1. During period of construction, do not obstruct in any manner existing exit ways of Owner -occupied areas. Prior to removal of existing exit ways (stairs, corridors, doors) as part of new work, provide and maintain new exit ways so as to maintain same number of exit ways. Maintain existing fire doors in an operable condition. B. Maintenance of Existing Services: 1. Maintain environmental control in existing buildings, especially temperature, humidity and dust control. 2. Providetemporary lines and connections as requiredto maintain existing mechanical and electrical services in buildings. 3. Notify Owner a minimum of seven days prior to each required interruption of mechanical or electrical services in buildings. Such interruptions shall be only at such times and for lengths of time as approved by the Owner. In no event shall interruption occur without prior approval of the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING EXTENDING WORK A. New Materials: As specified in individual sections. B. Match existing products and work for patching and extending work. C. Determine type and quality of existing products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by use of existing as a standard. Presence of a product, finish, or type of work, requires that patching, extending, or matching shall be performed as necessary to make work complete and consistent with existing quality or specifications if more stringent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new work. B. Beginning of restoration work means acceptance of existing conditions. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2008 01 3500 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work; replace and restore at completion. B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, rusted materials, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace materials as specked for finished work. C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. D. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new finishes. E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion. B. Project shall be complete in all respects. C. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products and finishes to specified condition. D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent new finishes. E. Install products as specified in individual sections. 3.04 ALTERATIONS, CUTTING, AND PROTECTION A. Extent 1. Cutting and removal work shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is necessary and so as not to damage adjacent work. 2. Conduct work in such a manner as to minimize noise and to minimize accumulation and spread of dirt and dust. . 3. Perform cutting for ductwork and other rectangular openings with carborundum saw with approved dust arrestor. 4. Drill holes for conduit and piping using core drills. B. Shoring, Bracing, and Capping: Provide shores, needling and bracing as needed to keep buildings structurally secure and free of deflection in all its parts, and as needed for installation of new structural members. C. Responsibility and Assignment to Trades: 1. Contractor shall assign the work of moving, removal, cutting, patching and repair to trades raider his supervision so as to cause the least damage to each type of work encountered, and so as to return the buildings as much as possible to the appearance of new work. 2. Patching of finish materials shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in the work of the finish trade involved. D. Protection: 1. Protect remaining finishes, equipment, and adjacent work from damage caused by cutting, moving, removal and patching operations. Protect surfaces which will remain a part of the finished work. 2. Protect existing facilities and features, within designated construction limits and along corridor access route to construction area. 3. Cover existing wall and floor finishes in work areas, in adjacent areas and along corridor access route to prevent damage from product delivery and construction operations. Use reinforced sheeting, listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as having a flame spread rating of less than 25 and smoke developed rating of less than 50. Apply double thickness of sheeting, fastened to one side with no -tear fasteners. Tape joints continuously. 4. During demolition, cutting and construction, provide positive dust control by wetting dust debris and by completely sealing openings to Owner -occupied areas with temporary partitions, so as to prevent spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 5. After materials, equipment and machinery are installed, properly protect work until final acceptance. 6. Any damage resulting from construction operations shall be repaired by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. 7. During non -working hours, provide continuous securityatopenings cut into existing exteriorwalls and roofs. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2008 01 3500 - 2 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas E. Debris: 1. Remove debris promptly from the site each day. Removed material, except that listed or marked by the Architect for retention, becomes property of the Contractor. Load removed material directly on trucks for removal from site. Do not allow debris to enter sewers. 2. Do not let piled material endanger structure. 3. During cutting and coring operations, use metal lined wood box secured tight against surface, to catch falling debris and water. 3.05 PATCHING, EXTENDING, AND MATCHING A. Skill: Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching the existing quality of workmanship. The quality of patched or extended work shall not be less than that specified in the sections of the product and execution specifications which follow these general requirements. B. Patching: 1. In areas where any portion of an existing finishing surface is damaged, lifted, stained, or otherwise made or found to be imperfect, patch or replace the imperfect portion of the surface with matching material. 2. Provide adequate support or substrate for patching of finishes. 3. If the imperfect surface was a painted or coated one, re -paint or re -coat the patched portion in such a way that uniform color and texture over the entire surface results. 4. If the surrounding surface cannot be matched, re -paint or re -coat the entire surface. C. Quality: 1. In the sections of the product and execution of specifications which follow these general requirements, no concerted attempt has been made to describe each of the various existing products that must be used to patch, match, extend or replace existing work. Obtain all such products in time to complete the work on schedule. Such products shall be provided in quality which is in no way inferior to the existing products. 2. The quality of the products that existing in the buildings, as apparent during pre -bid site visits, shall serve as the specification requirement for strength, appearance, and other characteristics. D. Transitions: 1. Where new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make the transition as smooth and workmanlike as possible. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so as to make the patch or transition invisible to the eye. 2. Where masonry, or other finished surface is cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate the existing surface in a neat fashion along a straight line at a natural line of division and provide trim appropriate to the finished surface. 3. Where two or more spaces are indicated to become one space, rework floors and ceilings so that horizontal planes, without breaks, steps or bulkheads result. 4. In cases of extreme change of level (3" or morel obtain instructions from Architect as to method of making transition. Either stepping, bulkheading, encasement, ramping, sloping or change of transition line shall be employed, or combination of these, as directed in each case by the Architect. E. Matching: 1. Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to its condition at the time of the start of the work. 2. At locations in existing areas where partitions are removed, patch the floors, walls, and ceilings with finish materials to match adjacent finishes. 3. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.06 REPAIR A. Replace work damaged in the course of alterations, except at areas approved by the Architect for repair. B. Where full removal of extensive amounts of almost -suitable workwould be needed to replace damaged portions, then filling, spackling, straightening, and similar repair techniques, followed by full painting or other finishing, will be permitted. C. If the repaired work is not brought up to the standard for new.work, the Architect will direct that it be cut out and replaced with new work. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2008 01 3500 - 3 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.07 FIRESTOPPING A• Where existing partitions or walls are penetrated by new work, approved and listed safing. 3.08 CLEANING seal around penetrating • conduit or sleeve with A• In f addition to cleaning specified in SECTION 017413 -PROGRESS CLEANING, clean Owner -occupied areas END OF SECTION • VLK Architects, 2008 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 nsnn _ w V • • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 014100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CODES A. Where references are made on drawings or specifications to codes, they shall be considered an integral part of the contract documents as minimum standards. Nothing contained in the contract documents shall be so construed as to be in conflict with any law, bylaw or regulation of the municipal, state, federal orother authorities having jurisdiction. B. Perform work in compliance with all City of College Station ordinances and requirements. 1.02 GOVERNING LAWS A. Additional information with legal implications regarding applicable governing laws and jurisdictions can befound in the conditions of the contract. 1.03 PERMITTING A. Contractor shall, without additional expense to Owner, obtain necessary licenses and permits, and be responsible for complying with any federal, state, county and municipal laws, codes and regulations applicable to the performance of the work, including, but not limited to, any laws or regulations requiring the use of licensed contractors to perform parts of the work. END OF SECTION REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS VLK Architects, 2008 01 4100 -1 2737.04 El • SECTION 014200 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the contract documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the contract documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the contract documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the contract documents. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the contract documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in specifications or other contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterway Experiment Station www.wes.arm.mil 800.872.2253 202.272.0080 601.634.2355 DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards 215.697.6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil FED -STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil Available from General Services Administration www.fss.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences www.nibs.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Services, Inc. www.icc-es.org MIL See MILSPEC MIL -STD See MILSPEC MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil TAS Texas Accessibility Standards P.O. Box 12157 Austin, TX 78711 www.license.state.tx.us/ab/abtas.htm. REFERENCES VLK Architects, 2008 01 4200 -1 215.697.6257 202.501.1021 202.289.7800 800.423.6587 562.699.0543 215.697.6257 512.463.3211 2737.04 - A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.02 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in specifications or other contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) 202.862.5100 www.aluminum.org AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 847.303.5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway 202.624.5800 and Transportation Officials www.transportation.org ACI ACllntemational 248.848.3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org AGA American Gas Association 202.824.7000 www.aga.org AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 800.644.2400 www.aisc.org 312.670.2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 202.452.7100 www.steel.org ANSI American National Standards Institute 202.293.8020 www.ansi.org APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association 253.565.6600 www.apawood.org ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and 404.636.8400 Air Conditioning Engineers www.ashrao.org ASTM ASTM International 610.832.9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials Intemational) www.astm.org AW I Architectural Woodwork Institute 800.449.8811 www.awinet.org 703.733.0600 AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association 334.874.9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society 800.443.9353 www.aws.org 305.443.9353 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 212.297.2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) 703.620.0010 www.bia.org CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association 630.584.1919 www.cisca.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 301.596.2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 847.517.1200 www.crsi.org REFERENCES VLK Architects, 2008 01 4200 - 2 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas DHI Door and Hardware Institute 703.222.2010 ® www.dhi.org FM Factory Mutual System (See FMG) FMG FM Global 401.275.3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com GA Gypsum Association 202.289.5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America 785.271.0208 www.glasswebsite.com HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association 703.435.2900 www.hpva.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council 315.646.2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) 613.233.1510 www.igmaonline.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association 216.241.7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association 847.480.9138 www.maplefloororg MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association 312.644.6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MIA Masonry Institute of America 440.250.9222 www.marble-institute.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural 312.332.0405 Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association 703.713.1900 www.ncma.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association 207.829.6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 703.841.3200 www.nema.org NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) 800.344-3555 www.nfpa.org 617.770-3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council 301.589.1776 www.nfrc.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association 800.933.0318 www.natlhardwood.org 901.377.1818 ® NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority www.niga.org 604.524.2393 NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association 901.526.5016 www.nofma.org REFERENCES VLK Architects, 2008 01 4200 - 3 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 800.323.9545 . www.nrca.net 847.299.9070 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. 800.323.9736 www.ntma.com 540.751.0930 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (See W DMA) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute 312.786.0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America 800.332.7322 www.pdca.com 314.514.7322 SDI Steel Deck Institute 847.462.1930 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute 440.899.0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association 516.294.5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council 315.646.2234 www.sgcc.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (See IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute 843.626.1995 www.steeljoist.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning 703.803.2980 Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) 850.434.2611 www.spib.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. 864.646.8453 www.bleusa.com TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. 608.833.5900 www.tpinst.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 800.285.4476 www.ul.com 847.272.8800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council 202.828.7422 www.usgbc.org WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 800.283.1486 www.wc[ib.org 503.639.0651 WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association 800.223.2301 (Formerly. NWWA - National Wood Window 847.299.5200 and Door Association) www.wdma.com WWPA Western Wood Products Association 503.224.3930 www.wwpa.org REFERENCES VLK Architects, 2008 01 4200 - 4 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas ® B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in specifications or other contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents. BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) CABO Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing 909.472.4100 and Mechanical Officials www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICC International Code Council 703.931.4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.org SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) C. Federal GovemmentAgencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in specifications or other contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents. CE 'Army Corps of Engineers www.usacearmy.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 800.638.2772 www.cpsc.gov 301.504.6816 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 202.272.0167 www.epa.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration 800.321.6742 www.osha.gov 202.693.1999 PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION 0 Not applicable. END OF SECTION REFERENCES VLK Architects, 2008 01 4200 - 5 2737.04 V A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 014500 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL iIkriI_ltill A. Section Includes 1. Quality control of products and workmanship. 2. Manufacturer's instructions. 3. Manufacturer's certificates and field services. 4. Mockups. B. Related Sections 1. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Feld samples. Submittal of manufacturer's instructions. 2. Section 014200 - References. 3. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services. 4. Section 016200 - Product Options. 5. Individual Specifications Sections: Mockups required. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, workmanship, and site conditions, to produce worts in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards of the region exceptwhen more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Provide suitably qualified personnel to produce work of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. D. Provide finishes to match approved samples. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Require compliance with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required in individual Specifications section, submit manufactureescertificate, in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements, executed by responsible officer. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When required in individual Specifications section, have manufacturer or his authorized representative provide qualified representative to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect. B. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. C. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for review. 1.07 MOCKUPS A. Tests will be performed under provisions of SECTION 014523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES. QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2008 01 4500 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Assemble and erect complete, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashin s s C. Acceptable mockups in place may be retained in completed work. g ' eals, and finishes. 1.08 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specification sections for review. B• Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work. C. Where field sample is specified in individual sections to be removed, accepted by Architect/Engineer. clear area after field PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION sample has been Not applicable. END OF SECTION • 0 VLK Architects, 2008 QUALITY CONTROL 01 4500 - 2 V • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 014523 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Requirements Included: Owner provided materials testing laboratory services. B. Related Requirements: 1. Document 00 3132 - Geotechnical Data. 2. Terms and Conditions: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities. 3. Section 014500 - Contract Quality Control: Manufacturer's certificates. 4. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. 5. Individual Specifications Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for testing. 1.02 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Owner will employ services of an independent materials testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing and will pay for these services directly to the testing laboratory. B. Employmentof testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of contract documents. Contractor will pay all testing required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Laboratory shall comply with requirements of ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 and provide certifications to this effect. B. Laboratory shall maintain a full-time registered Engineer on staff to review specific tests required by this specification. C. Laboratory shall be authorized to operate in State in which project is located. D. Testing equipment shall be calibrated to ensure accurate results and values in order to ensure that test results are true and valid, and at intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either NBS Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.04 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide qualified personnel at site after due notice from the contractor, cooperate with Architect, Contractor, and appropriate public authorities having jurisdiction in performance of services. B. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with latest, up-to-date standards. C. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of contract documents. D. Promptly notify Architect, appropriate consultants, Contractor, Owner, and authority having jurisdiction of observed irregularities or non-conformance of work or products. E. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect, Owner, Contractor, or authority having jurisdiction. 1.05 LABORATORY REPORTS A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit two copies of laboratory report to Architect, one tD applicable consultant, one to Owner, one to Contractor, and one to City. Include: Date issued, project title and number, name of inspector, date and time of sampling or inspection, weather conditions, identification of product and specifications section, location in the project, type of inspection ortest, date of test, results of tests, and specific indication of conformance, or lack of such, with contract documents. When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES VLK Architects, 2008 01 4523 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.06 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of contract documents. B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the work. C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D. Laboratory has no authority to stop work. 1.07 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Deliver to laboratoryat designated location adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, together with proposed mix designs. B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and ensure ready access to work and to manufacturer's facilities, if requested by testing lab. C. Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site, or at source of products to be tested, in order to facilitate tests and inspections, and for storage and curing of test samples. D. Notify laboratoryof material sources and furnish lab -determined necessary quantities of representative samples of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested. E. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Cancel notifications in a timely manner if items or systems are not ready for inspection as intended. Reimburse Owner for trip charges when cancellation notifications are not made in a timely fashion. F. Advise laboratory in a timely fashion to complete required inspection and testing prior to subsequent work being performed. G. Reimburse Owner for all subsequent re -testing of products or systems found to be defective or otherwise not in accordance with specification requirements, and for any overtime pay required as a result of any inspection requirements that may fall outside of normal job -site weekday work schedule. Remove rejected products or work and replace with products or work of specified quality. H. Notification of Source Change: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory when the source of any material is changed after the original tests or inspections have been made. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK (SITE GENERAL) A. Make necessary soil tests (Atterberg Limit Series ASTM D 4318 and ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor) to determine moisture content and density of existing subgrade. Perform necessary soil tests (Atterberg Limit Series and ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor for each type of imported fill) to determine the moisture content and to inspect and test the placement of additional fill lifts to verify that all fill materials used are in accordance with the specifications for that use. Perform one field density test (ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017) per 5,000 S.F. of site area in the area affected on each lift prior to placement of additional fill material. B. Imported Topsoil Tests: Testing for topsoil quality compliance shall be performed by the Testing Laboratory. 3.02 PAVING OR SPECIAL SURFACE SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Perform one subgrade in -place density test per 7,500 S.F. of subgrade, after subgrade preparation, in accordance with ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017. Perform tests within 48 hours of pavement construction. B. Pulverization tests on lime subgrade, TEX101 E, Part III, at same frequency as density tests. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES VLK Architects, 2008 01 4523 - 2 2737.04 • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.03 BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. - Make necessary soil tests (Atterberg Limit Series and ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor for each type of fill) to determine the moisture content and density of existing subgrade and inspect and test the placement of additional fill lifts to verify that all fill materials used are in accordance with the specifications for that use. Perform one field densitytest (ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017) for each 5,000 S.F. of area within the building footprint on each lift prior to placement of additional fill material. 3.04 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PIERS A. The Independent Testing Laboratory shall provide the services of their registered geotechnical engineer at the initiation of the on -site pier drilling operations to determine the appropriate bearing material into which the piers are to be founded. Written documentation of the "determination" shall be prepared and forwarded to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. B. Make on -site full-time inspections of the pier drilling operation for each pier drilled and placed to verify that the proper strata and penetration, or depth, has been attained, and determine that shafts are properly clean and dry before placing concrete. C. Maintain a pier log for each pier showing design requirements and actual in place size and depth, in accordance with example noted in Specification SECTION 316329 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS. D. Verify that the excavation is of the proper size and adequately clean and dry. E. Verify that each shaft is founded at a depth in accordance with the geotechnical report, existing on -site conditions that may be encountered, and at the proper bearing strata. F. Verify that the reinforcing steel and concrete are properly placed in accordance with other testing provisions specified herein. G Notify the Architect and Contractor if soil or water conditions may require casing of piers. H. Inspection reports of pier drilling shall contain the following: 1. Pier Mark. 2. Pier Depth. 3. Depth of penetration into bearing strata. 4. Plumbness deviation. 5. Description of unusual conditions encountered, including groundwater. 6. Record of deviations from contract document requirements. 7. Other requirements, as defined in SECTION 31 6329 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS. 3.05 FORMWORK, REINFORCING STEEL AND INSERTS A. Make general inspection of formwork. B. Prior to each concrete pour, inspect fabrication and bending of bars, bar sizes, spacing, placement and tying in accordance with ACI 315. C. Priorto each concrete pour, inspect positioning of steel inserts and assemblies, sizes, and spacing, and inspect fusion -welded anchors and sheer connectors. 3.06 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Design Mixes: 1. At the beginning of the work, Contractor shall submit proposed concrete mixes for review by the Architect, structural engineering consultant, and testing laboratory, including the sieve analysis of fine and course aggregate ASTM C 136, dry rodded weight of coarse aggregate - ASTM C 29, and the specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry), of fine and coarse aggregates ASTM C 127 and C 128. 2. The testing laboratory will submit their findings to the structural consultant, who will subsequently forward this information, with their review of the submittals, to the Architect. 3. Contractor shall not mix concrete for placing in the work until confirmation laboratory reports are supplied to reflect that each proposed mix will develop the strength required. Successful past history in accordance with ACI 318 will be satisfactory. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES VLK Architects, 2008 01 4523 - 3 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Test Cylinders: Make at least one (1) test of each day's pouring of concrete or each 100 cubic yards, whichever is the least, on each different portion or section of the work. Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31, and test in accordance with ASTM C 39. Test cylinders shall be made and tested by the laboratory. Footings, walls, and floor systems constitute different sections. Each test shall consist of four (4) specimens, one (1) of which shall be broken at seven (7) days, two (2) at twenty-eight (28) days and one held in reserve. Determine temperature and air content for each set of test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 231. C. Field Quality Control: 1. Determine slump for each concrete strength test and whenever consistency of concrete varies, in accordance with ASTM C 143. 2. Monitor and record addition of water to concrete and length of time concrete is allowed to remain in truck. 3. Verify delivery tickets indicating class of concrete, amount of water added during initial batching, and time initial batching occurred. 4. Monitorwork being performed in accordance with ACI (American Concrete Institute) recommendations as a standard of quality. 5. Reference SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE for additional requirements. D. Source Quality Control: An independent testing laboratory representative shall periodically inspect and control concrete mixing and loading of transit mix trucks at batch plant at intervals appropriate to monitor quality of material issued on job. 3.07 MORTAR, GROUT, AND MASONRY REINFORCEMENT A. Coordinate with Owner's testing laboratory to provide periodic inspection of the following task: 1. As masonry construction begins, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance: a. Proportions of site prepared mortar. b. Constriction of mortar joints. c. Location of reinforcement and connectors. 2. The inspection program shall verify: a. Size and location of structural elements. b. Type, size, and location of anchors, including other details of anchorage of masonry members, frames, or other construction. c. Specified size, grade, and type of reinforcement. d. Protection of masonry during cold weather (temperature below 40°F.) or hot weather above 90°F.). 3. Prior m grouting, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance: a. Grout space is clean. b. Placement of reinforcement and connectors. c. Proportions of site -prepared grout. d. Construction of mortar joints. to structural (temperature B. Coordinate with Owner's testing laboratory to provide continuous inspection of the following task: 1. Grout placement shall be verified to ensure compliance with code and construction document provisions. 3.08 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Fabrication of, erection of, and connections between, structural steel members, including welding and tension in high strength bolts, will be accomplished under and subject to the inspection of an independent testing agency. The general contractor, structural steel fabricator, and erector shall afford full cooperation to the laboratory. B. Perform the following testing and inspection: (Prior to placement of steel deck) 1. Check location of condition of anchor bolts. 2. Check plumbness and tolerance of steel frame. 3. Qualification of welders and welding techniques (at Contractor's expense). 4. Visually inspect common bolts. 5. Inspection of high -strength bolting: a. Visually inspect connections. b. Check tightness of at least 33% of connections. c. Check at least two bolts of each girder to column connection. 6. Visually inspect field and shop welds. 7. Ultrasonic or X-ray testing of full penetration welds. 8. Re4nspect corrective measures required at expense of Contractor. 9. Verify that no members are damaged. 10. Verify that materials and installation are according to contract documents and industry standards. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES VLK Architects, 2008 01 4523 - 4 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will not be permitted on any member, unless specifically approved by the Structural Engineer. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when gas finish cutting is permitted. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. D. Correction: The fabricator or erector shall correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspection and test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with the specified requirements. Perform all additional tests required to reconfirm non-compliance of the original work and to show compliance of corrected work. Retesting of non -conforming work shall be paid by the Contractor. E. All welders employed during erection of structural steel must be certified by The American Welding Society for type of base materials and positions encountered. Certification testing to be performed at Contractor's expense and copies of Certifications shall be submitted for review upon request and maintained at the project site by the Contractor. 3.09 STEEL JOISTS A. All steel joists and connections to structural steel members shall be inspected. B. Quality Assurance: All welding performed during the manufacture and erection of steel joists shall comply with the requirements of AWS D1.1. C. Inspect condition of joists after erection; check method of attachment to structures and details of bridging and accessories to verify compliance with required standards. 3.10 METAL DECKING A. Qualification of Welders: Qualify the welding process and all welders (at Contractor expense), and periodically monitor the work in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.3. B. Testing Laboratory shall inspect steel decking to ensure the material and installation is in accordance with the specifications and shop drawings. 3.11 METAL DECK AND FIELD WELDED SHEAR STUDS: A. The erection of metal deck and field welded shear studs shall be subject to inspection by the testing agency. B. Shear Studs: 1. Test minimum of two shear studs welded at start of each production period in order to determine generator, control unit and stud welder setting. Studs shall be capable of being bent 45° from vertical without weld failure. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals that sound weld or a full 360° fillet has not been attained for a particular stud, such stud shall be struck with hammer and bent 15° off perpendicular to nearest end of beam. Studs failing under this test shall be replaced. 2. When the temperature is below 32°F., two studs from each group of 100 studs (or one stud if less than 100 studs are present) should be tested after cooling. Studs shall not be welded below 0°F. or when surfaces are wet with rain or snow. If stud fails in weld, two new studs shall pass test before resumption of welding. 3.12 CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING A. Application inspection to ensure the material and installation is in accordance with the specifications. B. Sample and verify the thickness and density of spray applied fireproofing in accordance with ASTM E 605 for each days application. 3.13 SMOKE TEST OF DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING A. Test to check for joint leakage in the sanitary sewer system and vent system. 3.14 OTHER WORK REQUIRING TESTS A. Refer to individual sections covered under Division 15 and 16 for other work requiring tests by independent testing laboratory. B. Other Tests: 1. Moisture content in face brick. END OF SECTION TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES VLK Architects, 2008 014523 - 5 2737.04 0 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.01 GENERAL A. Provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the work including, but not limited to those described in the Articles below. B. Maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe and proper completion of the work. 1.02 ACCESS A. Provide adequate access to and temporary roads to the site of the building if required for the prosecution of the work. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. 1.03 FIELD OFFICE A. Provide and maintain a weathertight temporary field office equipped with adequate illumination; with glazed operable windows; with smooth tables for perusal of drawings and specifications. During cold weather the field offices shall be equipped with a heating device to maintain 65°F. temperature during the work day. During hot weather the offices shall be equipped with an air conditioning device to maintain temperature below 80°F. Provide and pay for fuel and electric energy. In addition to the above listed equipment, provide a space to accommodate the site meetings and have a Iayout1conference table at 28" height and chairs for 12 people. Upon completion of the project, remove offices from the premises. 1.04 TELEPHONES AND ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SERVICE A. Provide telephones/mobile phones in the field office. Telephone shall be in operation from the commencement of work until the acceptance of the building. Contractor shall pay for installation, maintenance, and removal of telephone and for all use charges. B. Provide facsimile (fax) machine in the field office. Fax machine shall be in operation from the commencement of work until the acceptance of the building. Contractor shall pay for installation, maintenance, and removal of telephone line and for all use charges. C. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a computer, printer, high-speed data connection, and intemet service as required for the Contractor to maintain intemet access and e-mail correspondence. 1. The Architect's project management system is Projectmates by Systemates, which can be accessed by logging in at the following website: www.vlkprojects.com. Contractor shall utilize this system for all formal and informal correspondence with the Architect and Architect's Consultants, including E-Mails, Requests for Information, Proposals, Submittals, Submittal Transmittals, Meeting Minutes (for regularly scheduled meetings), and Warranty Responses (if warranty items are submitted in the system). In addition, Subcontractor Lists, Project Schedules, Schedule of Values and other documents requiring submission shall be uploaded in pdf. Word, or Excel format by the Contractor to the appropriate location in Projectmates. At the Contractor's option, Pay Applications, Project Schedules, and Transmittals, may be created or imported into the system, as well. 2. While the project management system is very userfriendly and easyto learn, Architect will provide informal training forthe Contractor as necessary to expedite the Contractor's familiarity with the program. 3. Contractor shall pay for installation, maintenance, and removal of high-speed data connection and for all use charges. 1.05 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The contractor shall provide, install, and maintain separate temporary electrical service, including a separate temporary electric meter and temporary pole, if required. The contractor shall be responsible for contacting and coordinating with the local utility company for the installation, maintenance and removal of the temporary service. The contractor shall pay for all costs associated with this separate temporary electrical service. B. Provide and maintain temporary electric powerto points in the building convenient for and available to all trades, including mechanical and other contracts, so that power can be secured anywhere in the building with no more than a 100 ft. extension cord. Energy charges shall be paid by the Contractor. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS VLK Architects, 2008 01 5000 -1 2737.04. A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.06 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain temporary lighting inside the building for safe and adequate working conditions throughout all areas where work of any kind is being performed. Provide at least Y2 watt of incandescent lighting for each square foot of space. Where practical, place temporary lights in the locations where the permanent lighting fixtures are to be installed. 1.07 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide necessary heat during the course of construction, including equipment, fuel and attendance where required. Equipment for temporary heating shall be of a non -smudging type. The permanent heating system may be used for temporary heat, when installed. Upon completion and before acceptance of the building, Contractor shall repair all damage caused by such temporary use and shall clean all filters. B. When the outside temperature is below freezing, inside of the building shall be kept at or above 40"17. at all times. While painting and finishing are in progress, thetemperature shall be kept at or above 60"F. Contractor shall make good all damage caused by insufficient heat 1.08 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Utilize existing ventilation equipment Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.09 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide and maintain a temporary water supply during the course of construction and pay water bill and meter installation or "tap" fee, if any. Include necessary piping and hose connections. Take precautions to avoid spattering and spilling water in the building. 1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain adequate sanitary toilet facilities on the project site. The toilet facilities shall meet the requirements of the public authorities having jurisdiction and their use strictly enforced. Sanitary sewer "tap" fee and monthly use fees, if any, shall be paid by Contractor if temporary facilities are connected to city sanitary sewer. 1.11 REFUSE A. The Contractor shall provide refuse removal service at all times. 12 PROTECTIVE FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain temporaryguardrails, handrails and covers for floor, roof and wall openings, vertical shafts and stairways. If movement of the protective facilities is required by a Subcontractor to perform his work, it will be the responsibility of that Subcontractor to give prior notification to the Contractor and to replace the protective facilities in a satisfactory manner. B. Provide and maintain, as per City of College Station requirements, fire lane(s) and other required fire protection at the appropriate time and sequence of construction. 1.13 BARRICADES A. Provide and maintain lighted barricades and fences for the public protection in accordance with requirements of the local City ordinances. 1.14 TEMPORARY FENCING A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction a temporary fence of design and type needed to prevent entry onto the work by the public. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS VLK Architects, 2008 01 5000 - 2 2737.04 • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.15 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Contractor shall provide adequate fire extinguishers on the premises during the course of construction, of the type and size recommended to control fires, which may result from the particular work being performed in accordance with the local Fire Marshal and Fire Codes. B. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of ignition for possible fires. 1. Keep work area free of combustible material. 2. A fire watch consisting of at least one man furnished by Contractor with a fire extinguisher in hand and with no other assigned duties, shall be posted to stand by and observe for potential hazards while welding or cutting is being done. Equip fire watch with suitable personal eye protection and fire extinguishers. 3. At completion of work operations, immediately inspect work and adjacent area for hazards. Re -inspect work for hazards at Y2 hour and at one hour after completion of welding and cutting operations. C. No smoking shall be allowed within the building or on the site. Post NO SMOKING signs in areas where work is in progress. 1.16 ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weathertight closures of openings in exterior surfaces to provide acceptable working conditions and protection for materials, to allow for temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide doors with self -closing hardware and locks. B. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing areas and equipment. Construction: Framing and sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces; STC rating 35 in accordance with ASTM E 90; Flame Spread Rating of25 in accordance with ASTM E 84; paint surfaces exposed to view in Owner occupied areas. 1.17 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide and operate pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. 1.18 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off site. B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. C. Refer to SECTION 01 7413 - PROGRESS CLEANING for additional cleaning requirements. 1.19 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction priorto Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Remove underground installations to a depth of 2'; grade site as indicated. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified, or to original, condition. 1.20 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Furnish and erect a project sign, approximately 4' high by 8' long of %" thick exterior grade plywood, in conformance with sign detail supplied by the Architect. Support on posts of framing of treated wood or steel. B. Erect sign within 30 days of start of construction and maintain in good condition until completion of project. Sign shall be located as directed by the Architect. C. No other signs or advertising of any kind, except precautionary warning signs, will be permitted. 0 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS VLK Architects, 2008 01 5000 - 3 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 40 SECTION 016200 PRODUCT OPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for product options and substitutions. B. Related Sections 1. Section 013100 - Project Management and Coordination: Coordination of construction. 2. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Product data submittals. 3. Section 014200 - References: Applicability of specified reference standards. 4. Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 5. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. 1.02 PRODUCT LIST A. Within 30 days after date of contract, submit to the Architect a list of products and materials which are proposed for substitution per SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, followed by the words "NO SUBSTITUTIONS", select one of the products/manufacturers named. C. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option unless a substitution is approved as specified below. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, followed by the words "NO SUBSTITUTIONS", there is no option. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Requests for substitution to material, products, or equipment instead of those specified will be considered if received at least 10 days prior to the bid date. Substitution request received within 10 days of the bid date will be returned without review. Refer to Substitution Request (During the Bidding Phase) form attached to this section. B. Within 30 days after Notice to Proceed, Architect will consider additional formal requests from the Contractor for substitutions of products in place of those specified. Refer to Substitution Request (After the Bidding Phase) form attached to this section. C. Submit a separate request for each substitution on a copy of the "SUBSTITUTION REQUEST" form, attached to this section. Include in request: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with contract documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturers literature, including product description, performance and test data and reference standards. c. Samples, if applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation. 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed written descriptions of proposed method. b. Complete drawings illustrating methods or revisions. 4. Itemized Comparison of qualities of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Changes required in other elements of work because of substitution. 6. Effect on construction schedule. D. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor: 1. Has personally investigated proposed product or method and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. Will provide same warranties for substitution as for product or method specified. PRODUCT OPTIONS VLK Architects, 2008 01 6200 - 1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the work, making such changes as maybe required for the work to be complete in all respects. 4. Waives all claims for additional cost, under his responsibility and related to substitution, which subsequently become apparent. E. Substitutions will not be considered it 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals withoutformal request submitted in accordance with this section. 2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of contract documents. F. If substitution is not approved or accepted, Contractor shall fumish specified product or method at no additional cost to the Owner. G Acceptance of a proposed substitution prior to the bid date will be in the form of an addendum. 1.05 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit five copies of request for substitution. B. Architect will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. C. For accepted products, submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. END OF SECTION PRODUCT OPTIONS VLK Architects, 2008 01 6200 - 2 2737.04 Project: To: Re: A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (During the Bidding Phase) (submit two copies -must be received 10 days prior to bid/proposal date) Substitution Request Number: From: Date: A/E Project Number. Contract For. Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone. Trade Name: Model No.: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, custom color/pre-selected color availability, photographs, and performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E/ design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. Submitted by: Signed by: Finn: Address: Telephone: A/E REVIEW AND ACTION ❑ Substitution approved - Submit bid/proposal based on accepted substitution. ❑ Substitution approved as noted - Submit bid/proposal based on accepted substitution - as noted. ❑ Substitution rejected - Submit bid/proposal for specified materials. ❑ Substitution Request received too late - Submit bid/proposal for specified materials. Signed by: Date: Supporting Data Attached: ❑ Drawings D Product Data ❑ Samples ❑ Tests ❑ Reports ❑ PRODUCT OPTIONS VLK Architects, 2008 01 6200 - 3 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SUBSTITUTION REQUEST After the(submit five copies - must be re eived notddinlate9 than 30 days after Notice to Proceed) Project: Substitution Request Number. From: To: Date: A/E Project Number. Re: Contract For: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Trade Name: Installer: Address: History: ❑ New product ❑ 2-5 years old ❑ 5-10 years old ❑ More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: _ Phone: Model No.: Phone: For finish materials and pre -finished equipment, list the colors available for the specified item and the colors available for the proposed substitution. ❑ Point -by -point comparative data attached - REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project Architect Address: Owner. Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑ No ❑ Yes; explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ❑ No ❑ Yes [Add] [Deduct] days. Supporting Data Attached: ❑ Drawings ❑ Product Data ❑ Samples ❑ Tests ❑ Reports ❑ VLK Architects, 2008 PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 6200 - 4 2737.04 • C. A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SUBSTITUTION REQUEST- Continued The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. • Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments: A/E REVIEW AND ACTION ❑ Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Section 01340. ❑ Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Section 01340. ❑ Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. ❑ Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: ❑ Contractor ❑ Subcontractor ❑ Supplier ❑ Manufacturer ❑ A/E ❑ PRODUCT OPTIONS VI.K Architects, 2008 01 6200 - 5 2737.04 W • • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 016500 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Requirements Included: 1. Packaging, Transportation. 2. Delivery and Receiving. 3. Product Handling. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules. 2. Section 01 3323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Manufacturers' Instructions. 3. Section 016600 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 4. Individual Sections: Specific requirements for packaging, shipping and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PACKAGING TRANSPORTATION A. Require supplier to package products in boxes or crates for protection during shipment, handling and storage. Protect sensitive products against exposure to elements and moisture. B. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion and other damage. 3.02 DELIVERY AND RECEIVING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction progress schedules. Allow time for inspection prior to installation. B. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site; limitations on storage space; availability of personnel and handling equipment; and Owner's use of premises. C. Deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. D. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify equipment and contents to permit easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly. E. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Accessories, and installation hardware are correct. 4. Containers and packages are intact and labels legible. 5. Products are protected and undamaged. 3.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling and damage. B. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging and surrounding surfaces. C. Handle product by methods to avoid bending or over -stressing. Lift large and heavy components only at designated lift points. END OF SECTION PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS VLK Architects, 2008 01 6500 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas VSECTION 016600 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Requirements Included 1. Storage, General. 2. Enclosed Storage. 3. Exterior Storage. 4. Maintenance of Storage. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 01 1100 -Summary of Work. 2. Section015000-Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Storage facilities. Protection ofinstalled work. 3. Section 016500 - Product Delivery Requirements. 4. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE, GENERAL A. Store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels JW intact. Protect until installed. B. Arrange storage in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection. 3.02 ENCLOSED STORAGE A. Store products, subject to damage by the elements, in substantial weathertight enclosures. B. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges stated in manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide humidity control and ventilation for sensitive products as required by manufacturer's instructions. D. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items. 3.03 EXTERIOR STORAGE A. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, orskids, to support fabricated products above ground; slope to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling and staining. B. For products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, coverwith impervious sheet material. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. C. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid surfaces such as pavement, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. D. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. E. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. 3.04 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. Periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis. B. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements. C. Verify that manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually. PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS VLK Architects, 2008 01 6600 -1 2737.04 ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected; that any weathering of finishes is acceptable under requirements of contract documents. 3.05 MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT STORAGE accompany each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of A. For mechanical and electrical equipment in long-term storage, provide manufacturer's service instructions to package. B. Service equipment on a regularly scheduled basis, maintaining a log of services; submit as a record document. END OF SECTION VLK Architects, 2008 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 01 6600 - 2 2737.04 ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of work. B. Related Sections 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Work by Owner or by separate contractors. 2. Section 016200 - Product Options. 3. Individual Specifications Sections a. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the section. b. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those sections. C. Limitations on cutting structural members. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects 1. Structural integrity of any element of the Project. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. B. Include in request 1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed work and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed. 1.03 PAYMENT FOR COSTS A. Costs resulting from ill-timed or defective work, or work not conforming to contract documents, including costs for additional services of Architect, or other consultants shall be borne by the party responsible for ill-timed, rejected or non -conforming work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Products: Those required for original installation. B. For any change in materials, submit request for substitution under provisions of SECTION 016200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Execute cutting, fitting and patching including excavation and fig, to complete work, and to 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other work. 2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work. 4. Remove samples of installed work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. CUTTING AND PATCHING VLK Architects, 2008 01 7329 -1 2737.04 Ilk A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work; maintain excavations free of water. C. Maintain excavations free of water. 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting, fitting and patching (including excavation and fill) to complete work. B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work. C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. D. Remove and replace defective or non -conforming work. E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. 3.05 PERFORMANCE A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. B. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather -exposed and moisture -resistant elements, and sight -exposed surfaces. C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of contract documents. E. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. F. At penetrations of fire -rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire -rated packing material, full thickness of the construction element. G Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION a CUTTING AND PATCHING VLK Architects, 2008 01 7329 - 2 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 017413 PROGRESS CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Throughout the construction period, maintain the building and site in a standard of cleanliness as described in this section. B. Related Work: In addition to standards described in this section, comply with requirements for cleaning as described in other pertinent sections of these specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conduct a daily inspection, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements for cleanliness are being met. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to maintain the specified standard of cleanliness. 2.02 COMPATIBILITY A. Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surface being cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material. IV PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: 1. Retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding traffic or drainage, and providing required protection of materials. 2. Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris waste material, and other items not required for construction of the work. 3. At least twice each month, and more often if necessary, completely remove all scrap, debris, and waste material from the project site. 4. Provide adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from the project site, observing requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology. B. Site: 1. Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material. Remove such items to the place designated for their storage. 2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all arrangements of materials stored on the site. Restack, tidy, or otherwise service arrangements to meet the requirements of this section. 3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition at all times. C. Structure: 1. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect the structure and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material. Remove such items to the place designated for their storage. 2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, sweep interior spaces clean. a. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other material capable of being removed by use of reasonable effort and a hand-held broom. 3. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, clean the structure or pertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material, using equipment and materials required to achieve the necessary cleanliness. 4. Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean the finish floor daily (and more often if necessary) at all times while work is being performed in the space in which finish materials are installed. a. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph shall be interpreted as meaning free from foreign material which, in the opinion of the Architect, may be injurious to the finish floor material. PROGRESS CLEANING VLK Architects, 2008 01 7413 -1 2737.04 . A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 FINAL CLEANING A. "Clean", forthe purpose ofthis Article, and exceptas may be specifically provided otherwise, shall be interpreted as meaning the level of cleanliness generally provide by skilled cleaners using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials. B. Prior to completion of the work, remove from the project site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste. Conduct final progress cleaning as described in this section. C. Site: 1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by Architect, broom clean paved areas on the site and public paved areas adjacent to the site. 2. Completely remove resultant debris. D. Structure: 1. Exterior. a. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. b. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. c. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the structure. d. In event of stubborn stains not removable with water, Architect may require light sandblasting or other cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Interior. a. Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of sod, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. b. Remove all traces of splashed material from adjacent surfaces. c. Remove paint droppings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces. 3. Glass: Clean inside and outside. 4. Polished Surfaces: To surfaces requiring routine application of buffed polish, apply the polish recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished. This does not apply to resilient flooring surfaces. Reference SECTION 09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOORING for cleaning of resilient flooring. E. Schedule final cleaning, as approved by the Architect, to enable the Owner to accept a completely clean work. 3.03 CLEANING DURING OWNER'S OCCUPANCY A. Should the Owner occupy the work, or any portion thereof, prior to its completion by the Contractor and acceptance by the Owner, responsibilities for interim and final cleaning shall be as determined by the Architect in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. -4111OX6IAyX0101011 • • • PROGRESS CLEANING VLK Architects, 2008 01 7413 - 2 2737.04 • • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operating and maintenance data submittal, including training sessions for equipment and systems. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Submittal of spare parts and maintenance materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: record drawings. 2. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 3. Section 017413 - Progress Cleaning: final cleaning. 4. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: keys and keying schedule. 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. General: Substantial Completion is defined in Paragraph 9.8.1 of the General Conditions. B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of substantial completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100% completion for the portion of the work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. a. If 100% completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction and reasons the work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change -over requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the work and access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases. 5. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock and similar items. 7. Make final change -over of permanent locks and transmit keys and keying schedule to the Owner. Advise the Owners personnel of change -over in security provisions. 8. Complete start-up testing of systems, and training sessions for Owners operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups and similar elements. 9. Complete final clean-up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. C. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. Architect will repeat the inspection when requested and assured that the work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, submit the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Final payment requestwith releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2. Updated final statement; accounting for final additional changes to the contract sum. 3. Certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect. 4. Consent of surety to final payment. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2008 01 7700 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 5. Final Liquidated Damages settlement statement. 6. Evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 7. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities a. Certificate of Occupancy. b. Certificates of Inspection required for mechanical and electrical systems. 8. Operation and Maintenance Data: Under provisions of SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. 9. Warranties and Bonds: Under provisions of SECTION 017830 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS. 10. Project Record Documents: Under provisions of SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS. 11. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials: Under provisions of SECTION 01 7840 - SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS. 12. Keys and Keying Schedule: Under provisions of SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE. 13. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. B. Re -inspection Procedures: Architect will re -inspect the work upon receipt of notice that the work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been complete, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon completion of re -inspection, the Architect will advise the Contractor of work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, re -inspection will be repeated. C. Reinspection Fees: Should status of completion of work require reinspection by Architect due to failure of work to comply with Contractor's claims on initial inspection, Owner will deduct the amount of Architect and appropriate consultants compensation for reinspection services from final payment to Contractor. The reimbursement transaction shall be executed by change order to the contract. 1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in three individual heavy-duty 3Y2", 3-ring vinyl -covered binders, with identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended "turn around" cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop drawings. 8. Fixture Damping schedule. B. Shop Drawings: Keep and maintain a full set of submittals throughout the construction phase to be submitted to the Architect with other close-out documents for delivery to the Owner for his permanent record Set of submittals shall be delivered to the Architect in cardboard file boxes with string and button type closures. Organize submittals by CSI divisions, utilizing neatly labeled pressboard dividers to separate the sections. Neatly label short end of box with project name, contents and duration of construction. C. Operating and Maintenance Training Sessions: Prepare a written agenda of items to be covered at each training session. Attendance by Owner's operating and maintenance personnel is mandatory. Notify Owner not less than 48 hours prior to scheduled training sessions. 1. Arrange for each installer of equipment and systems that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owners personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items: a. Maintenance manuals. b. Record documents. c. Spare parts and materials. d. Tools. e. Lubricants. f. Fuels. g. Identification systems. h. Control sequences. I. Hazards. j. Cleaning. k. Warranties and bonds. I. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2008 01 7700 - 2 2737.04 • 1-1 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. Training sessions shall consist of not less than 5 days of not less than 4 hours each day. A copy of maintenance manuals for equipment or system being demonstrated shall be on hand during training session. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: a. Start-up. b. Shutdown. c. Emergency operations. d. Noise and vibration adjustments. e. Safety procedures. f. Economy and efficiency adjustments. g. Effective energy utilization. 3. Training sessions shall be conducted for. a. Irrigation system. b. Food service equipment. c. HVAC systems. d. Energy management controls. e. Public address system. f. Fire alarm and smoke detection systems. g. Security System. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2008 01 7700 - 3 2737.04 ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 0 SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Format and content of manuals. 2. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 3. Schedule of submittals. B. Related Sections 1. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2. Section 014500 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. 3. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. 4. Section 017830 - Warranties and Bonds. 5. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. 6. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 1.03 FORMAT A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. B. Binders: Bind in three individual heavy-duty 8'/2" x 11" black, three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; 3" maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. C. Cover. Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of project identify subject matter of contents. D. Arrange content by systems, under section numbers and sequence of table of contents of this project manual. E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 1.04 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME A. Table of Contents: Provide title of project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information. D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use project record documents as maintenance drawings. E.� Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL. ® F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA VLK Architects, 2008 01 7823 -1 2737.04 ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re -ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture -protection and Weather -exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional Requirements: As Specified in individual Specifications sections. E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications. C. Include as -installed color coded wiring diagrams. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble -shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide as -installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. K. Provide Contractors coordination drawings, with asanstalled color coded piping diagrams. L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. M. Provide list of original manufacturers spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. N. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications sections. O. Provide a listing in table of contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Before final inspection, instruct Owners designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within six months. B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA VLK Architects, 2008 01 7823 - 2 2737.04 so A&M Consolidated High School acility Renovations and Addition Agricultural F College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas additional data in Operafi on and Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes C • Prepare and insert ct on apparent during 1.08 SUBMITTALS daft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of work• copies of preliminary wdh comments. operated by Owner, A. Submit two cop' ArchitecUEn9�neer Will review draft and return one � into service during construction and op ui ment, or component parts of equipment p s after acceptance. will be returned after B. For eq P s riorto final inspection. COPY prior to final submit documents within 10 daY 15 day P of completed volumes in final form Revise content of documents as required C. Submit one copy with ArchitectlEngineer comments• final inspection, action - revised volumes of data in final form within 10 days alter final insp subrn►ftal. p• Submit two Copies of PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION • RATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA OPE 3 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas VSECTION 017830 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Preparation and submittal of warranties and bonds. 2. Schedule of submittals. B. Related Documents/Sections: 1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bonds, Warranty, and Correction of Work. 2. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 3. Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 4. Individual Specifications Sections: Warranties and bonds required for speck products or work. 1.02 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Bind in three individual heavy-duty 8%" x 11" black, three-ring binders, with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers. B. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor, and name of responsible principal. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the table of contents of the project manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. D. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the table of contents listing. Provide full . information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. 1.03 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the date of substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. 1.04 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owners permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. B. Make other submittals within 10 days after date of substantial completion, prior to final application for payment. C. For items of work when acceptance is delayed beyond date of substantial completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION WARRANTIES AND BONDS VLK Architects, 2008 01 7830 -1 2737.04 • • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS I;7t4i1felo21:1:7q 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Maintenance and submittal of record documents and samples. B. Related Sections/Documents 1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Documents at the site. 2. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 3. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. 4. Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 5. Individual Specifications Sections: Manufacturer's certificates and certificates of inspection. 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Owner one record copy of: 1. Contract drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change orders and other modifications to the contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Field test records. 7. Inspection certificates. 8. Manufacturer's certificates. B. Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for record documents and samples. C. Label and file record documents and samples in accordance with section number listings in table of contents of this project manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. D. Maintain record documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. E. Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Architect. 1.03 RECORDING A. Record information on a set of blueline opaque drawings, and in a copy of a project manual. All changes made in these drawings in connection with the final construction and installation shall be neatly made in red ink on the prints. B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information. C. Contractor shall include with the record documents, all changes and modifications made by addenda, change orders, supplementary instructions, or other forms of documentation, written or verbal, which alter the documents. D. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. E. Contract drawings and shop drawings: Legibly mark each item on the drawings to record actual construction, including: 1. Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by addenda and modifications. 6. Details not on original contract drawings. 7. References to related shop drawings and modifications. VLK Architects, 2008 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas F. Specifications: Legibly mark each item in the specifications to record actual construction, including: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, and catalog number of each product actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items. 2. Changes made by addenda and modifications. G. Other Documents: Maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field test records, and other documents required by individual specifications sections. H. Maintain these documents to reflect the current conditions of the work. Changes shall be reviewed on a monthly basis with the Architect's representative. The Contractor's updating of the "installed condition drawings" shall be a prerequisite to the monthly review of the Contractor's payment request by the Architect's representative. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. At contract closeout, deliver record documents and samples under provisions of SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. B. Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. 4. Number and title of each record document. 5. Signature of Contractor or authorized representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION . a PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS VLK Architects, 2008 01 7839 - 2 2737.04 ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas ® SECTION 017840 SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Requirements Included 1. Products required. 2. Storage and delivery of products. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 016600 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 2. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 3. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 4. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific spare parts and materials required. 1.02 PRODUCTS REQUIRED A. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials specified in individual sections to be provided to Owner, in addition to that required for completion of work. B. Products: Identical to those installed in the work. Include quantities in original purchase from manufacturer to avoid variations in manufacture. 1.03 STORAGE, MAINTENANCE A. Store products with products to be installed in the work, under provisions of SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. . B. When adequate, secure storage facilities are available at site, capable of maintaining conditions required for storage and not required for contract work or storage, or for Owners needs, spare products may be stored in available space. C. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until delivery to Owner. 1.04 DELIVERY A. Coordinate with Owner: Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment. B. For portions of project accepted and occupied by Owner prior to substantial completion, deliver a proportional . part of spare products to Owner, obtain receipt. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS VLK Architects, 2008. 01 7840 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 0 SECTION 02 4119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Taking down, cutting away, breaking out and removing portions of the existing building to accommodate new construction. 2. Disconnecting, capping and removing identified utilities. 3. Offsite disposal and/or salvaging for reinstallation, indicated components. B. Related Section: 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Instructions concerning hazardous materials. 2. Section 013500 -Alteration Project Procedures: Re -installation of removed materials. 3. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Barricades; Dust control. 4. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Occupancy: Owner will be continuously occupying portions of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's operations. B. Existing Conditions: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. Contractor shall visit the building and verify the nature and extent of demolition required. Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations within structures may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of C. selective demolition. Property Protection: Contractor be shall responsible for the protection of adjoining property, including all parts of the building outside the limits of demolition and site improvements outside the limits of the new construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. B. Submit record documents under provisions of SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions. 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent portion of structures to remain. B. Conduct operations with minimum interference with Owner's usage of building. Maintain protected egress and access at all times and maintain protected egress at fire exits as required by the Fire Marshall. 1.05 PROTECTION A. It is essential that there be minimal interruptions of existing mechanical and electrical systems in addition to the normal operation of Owner's facilities. B. Take care to ensure that there will be no damage to elements or portions thereof which are not required to be removed. Erect and maintain temporary shoring, bracing, and other means to safeguard the structural integrity of the existing portions of building and its parts to remain. C. Erect and maintain temporary bracing, shoring, lights, barricades, signs and other means to protect workers and other persons, and finishes and improvements to remain from damage; all in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements. D. Erect and maintain temporary barriers to confine dust and debris. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION VLK Architects, 2008 02 4119 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials designated for demolition shall become the Contractors property; remove and dispose of such materials unless otherwise indicated or specified. Sales of salvage materials are not allowed on site. B. Furnishings and equipment items to remain the Owners property will be removed by him prior to the start of demolition (or will be designated on the drawings herein or to be removed and stored by Contractor). items not so designated shall be considered debris and shall be removed and disposed of accordingly. C. Carefully disconnect, remove and protect items directed by the Owner to be salvaged. D. Transport salvaged items to on -site storage areas designated by the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS A. Prior to starting demolition, make inspection and report observable defects and structural weaknesses of construction designated for demolition, of adjacent structures, and of improvements to remain. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence demolition until appropriate determinations have been made. B. Following demolition, make inspection and report defects and structural weaknesses of items partially demolished, cut, or removed, of adjacent structures; and of improvements remaining. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cover and protect furniture, equipment and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage when demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed. B. Preventmovement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing, shoring and underpinning as required. C. Protect existing appurtenances, structures and landscaping which are not to be demolished. D. Locate, disconnect, remove and cap designated utility lines within demolition areas. E. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify utilities and indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents. F. Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Demolition: Cant' out the work carefully and in an orderly manner to minimize interference with the daily operations in the building and to avoid damage to permanent parts of the building and the equipment therein. Hold noise, dust and vibration to a minimum. Remove all items and parts so shown and noted on the drawings and as otherwise may be required to be removed to carry out the work. B. Shoring: Provide temporary shoring forwalls and framing wherever present supports are removed orweakened. Any settling or cracking of the existing construction due to the removal of supports and faulty or insufficient shoring shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall be repaired at no additional expense to the Owner. C. Material and Equipment Disposal: 1. The materials and items of equipment which are noted and shown to be salvaged and re -used in new locations or re -used for patching shall be carefully removed and safely stored until ready for reinstallation. 2. Other items and all debris shall become the property of the Contractor and shag be removed from the premises entirely. Under no circumstances shall debris be allowed to accumulate. D. Damage: Any existing construction to be left in place which is damaged by the demolition operations shall be refinished or replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. The repair of such damage shall leave the parts in a condition at least equal to that found at the start of the work. to E. Perform demolition in accordance with ANSI 10.6 and applicable regulatory requirements. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION VLK Architects, 2008 02 4119 - 2 2737.04 W A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas F. Remove items designated for demolition within the limits of work indicated and as required to perform the work. Do not remove anything beyond the limits of demolition indicated without the prior written approval of Architect. If in doubt whether to remove an item, obtain written approval prior to proceeding. G. If in the event hazardous materials (asbestos, PCB's etc.) are encountered during the course of the demolition work, or if it is even suspected that such materials will or have been encountered cease work immediately in the affected area and promptly notify the Owner and Architect. 3.04 CUTTING A. Make new openings neat, as close as possible to profiles indicated and only to extent necessary for new work. B. Do not cut or alter structural members unless specifically indicated or approved, and do not damage reinforcing or structural steel to remain. C. At concrete, masonry, paving and other materials where edges of cuts and holes will remain exposed in the completed work, make cuts using power -sawing and -coring equipment. Do not over -cut at comers of cut openings. D. Upon completion of cutting and coring, clean remaining surfaces of loose particles and dust. 3.05 PIPES, DUCTS AND CONDUITS A. Remove deactivated mechanical, plumbing and sprinkler piping, ducts and electrical conduit, including fastenings, connections and other related appurtenances and accessories which would otherwise be exposed in the completed work or interfere with construction operations. B. These facilities above ceilings may remain in place if their presence does not result in interference with new work, in which case they shall be removed to extent necessary. C. Cap deactivated piping systems at points of cutoff. 3.06 RECONDITIONING EXISTING SUBSTRATES A. Clean surfaces on which new materials will be applied, removing adhesives, bitumen and other adhering materials, as necessary to furnish acceptable substrates for new materials. B. Perform sandblasting, chipping, grinding, acid washing, etching and other work as required by conditions encountered and new materials involved. C. Use of acids or other cleaning agents shall include neutralizing, washing, rinsing and drying, as applicable. D. Determine substrate requirements for reconditioned surfaces in cooperation with the manufacturer's representative and installer of each new material involved. 3.07 CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. END OF SECTION SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION VLK Architects, 2008 02 4119 - 3 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 03 1100 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Formwork with accessories for the cast -in -place concrete. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 2300 - Excavation and Fill: temporary sheeting for excavations. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Formwork shall meet the requirements of ACI 347. B. Surface Tolerances: Allowable tolerances for formed concrete surfaces shall be %" maximum in 20 feet for vertical surfaces out of.plumb and Y4" maximum in 20 feet for horizontal surfaces out of plane. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Lumber: S2S&CM or S2S&SL No. 3 Boards or better Southern Pine not less than a nominal 1" thick. B. Plywood: EXT APA grade -trademarked B-B Plyform, Class I, or High Density Overlaid Plyform, Class I. B-B Plyform shall be sanded but not mill oiled. Plywood shall be new. C. Fiberboard: Corrugated fiberboard laminated with waterproof adhesive and coated with water resistant compound. 1. Forms in a completely dry condition shall be capable of supporting not less than the following loading without deflection: a. 1,000 psf for walls/beams 5' or less in height. b. 1,600 psf for walls exceeding 5' but less than 8' in height. c. Greater than 1,600 psf for custom designed walls exceeding 8' in height. D. Soil Retainer Boards: 1. Foam Board Panels: Styrofoam Brand Square Edge Rigid Insulation as manufactured by Dow Chemical Co. and distributed locally by Cain's Builders Supply (phone 817.581.1344). Retainer boards shall have a flexural strength of 50 psi (ASTM C 203), shear strength of 35 psi (ASTM D 393), compressive strength of 25 psi (ASTM D 1621) and a tensile strength of 50 psi (ASTM D 1623), supplied in 8" forms, thickness. 2. Plastic Boards: Retainer boards shall be a cambered, ribbed and made of high density polyethylene. Retainer boards shall have superior strength to resist lateral loads applied by compacted soil, be impact resistantand capable of being exposed to moisture without deterioration. Product/manufacturer; Motzblock, M&M Construction Specialties (phone 800.937.9493). E. Expansion Joint Filler. 1. Concealed: ASTM D 1751, asphalt saturated cane fiberboard. 2. Exposed: ASTM D 1752, Type I, premolded, non -bituminous, closed cell sponge rubber. Color to be stone gray. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Form ties for exposed concrete surfaces shall be manufactured to allow a positive breakback of at least 1" inside the concrete surface. Ties shall be equipped with a plastic cone or washer not less than 1" in diameter and 1" long which will cover the hole and prevent leakage of mortar. Form ties for unexposed surfaces shall be bolt rods or patented devices having a minimum tensile strength of 3000 pounds when fully assembled. Ties shall be adjustable in length and free of lugs, cones, washers or other features which would leave a hole larger than TA" in diameter, or depressions back of the exposed surface of the concrete. Ties shall be of such construction that, when the forms are removed, there will be no metal remaining within 1" of the finished surface of the concrete. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture or affect bond of subsequent surface finish manufactured by Nox-Crete, Symons, or approved equivalent. CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES VLK Architects, 2008 031100 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Dovetail Anchor Slots: 24 gage galvanized steel anchor slots with 5/e" throat, 1" deep, furnished with foam or felt fillers to exclude grout seepage. Plastic Waterstops: Multiple rib extruded strips of PVC resin 3/a" thick and 6" wide. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Type 5; Grace Construction Products No. 705; Greenstreak Plastic Products RB6-38; Vinylex Corp. E. Chamfer Strips: Extruded plastic triangular chamfer with 3/4" face; Burke "CSF %4", Greenstreak Cat. No. 612. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK A. General: Construct forms in compliance with referenced standard. All forms, shores, falsework, bracing and other temporary supports shall be engineered by the Contractor to support all loads imposed during construction, including weight of construction equipment, allowance for live loads and lateral forces due towind and temporary imbalance of discontinuity of building components. B. Construction: Construct forms to the dimensions and shapes of the concrete members as detailed and scheduled; and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Set, assemble and brace forms to withstand wet concrete construction loads without deflection, movement, or leakage. Provide access for placing and adjusting reinforcement and cleaning forms. 1. Exposed Surfaces: Form with plywood the non -wearing concrete surfaces exposed to view. On these surfaces locate the form ties in uniform pattems. The joints shall be tight and flush. Plywood may not be re -used. Chamfer exposed outside comers. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Form with wood or metal forms the concealed vertical surfaces of grade beams and walls below grade. 3. Metal Anchors: Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete for anchoring masonry facing and partitions to concrete. On concrete wall and beam surfaces which are faced more than 12" high with masonry, place slots vertically and on 24" centers. On concrete columns faced with masonry and where a masonry partition abuts such a column, place a continuous vertical slot in each face of the column as required to secure the masonry. 4. Recesses and Chases: Form for and provide in their proper locations all slots, chases and recesses indicated or implied by the drawings and not formed by sleeves, frames, and other equipment furnished under other sections. The trades requiring such recesses and openings in concrete shall furnish the necessary information for their correct location and placement. 5. Joint Waterstops: Provide continuous waterstops for joints in the concrete walls below grade and in other concrete joints where detailed. Install waterstops with one-half the width encased in the concrete on the first pour and the other half in the second pour. Make end points watertight by fusing with a hot iron. Prefabrication of comers and whole frames is recommended where this is practical. C. Inserts and Fasteners: Provide for the installation of inserts, conduits, sleeves, drains, hangers, nosings, metal reglets, nailing strips, and like items required for the attachment of other work and furnished by other trades. Properly locate in cooperation with other trades and secure in position before concrete is placed. D. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Strengthen formwork liable to be overstressed by construction loads. E. Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. Close ports with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. F. Installing Shoring: Before backfilling, install permanent shoring along the bottom of concrete grade beams around areas of suspended floor construction to prevent caving of backf ll material into the under floor areas. Provide shoring where the under floor grade at a beam is below the beam soffit 1. Dig the shoring at least 5" into the soil at the bottom and lap it approximately 3" up over the outside face of the beam or wall. 2. Cut the panels to fit snugly at piers, footings, comers, and other irregularities. • .7 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES VLK Architects, 2008 03 1100 - 2 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 0 3.02 EARTH FORMS • A. Earth forms are permitted for all interior grade beam faces. 3.03 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Remove forms with sufficient care to avoid scarring exposed surfaces. Prying against face of concrete will not be permitted. Remove forms completely so that no wood form material is left in contact with concrete. Only fiberboard soffit forms may be left in place. 1. General: Formwork for walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting the weight of the concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, but in no event before concrete is 24 hours old. Formwork for beam soffits and other parts that support the weight of concrete shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength unless otherwise permitted. When shores and other vertical supports are so arranged that the form facing material maybe removed without loosening or disturbing the shores and supports, the facing material only may be removed at an age of 24 hours. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, the exposed concrete shall be cured. 2. Re -shoring: When re -shoring is permitted orrequired, the operations shall be planned in advance and shall be subject to review. Re -shoring for the purpose of early form removal shall be performed so that at no time will large areas of new construction be required to support their own weight. While re -shoring is under way, no live loads shall be permitted on the new construction. Re -shores shall be tightened to carry their required loads, but they shall not be over -tightened so that the new construction is over -stressed. Re -shores shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength and while weights or loads in excess of design live loads are imposed. 3. Permanent shoring shall not be removed. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. B. Do not reuse wood formwork for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. 3.05 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. END OF SECTION CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES VLK Architects, 2008 03 1100 - 3 2737.04 • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 03 2000 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL `l 11E"01iv, IIV, I_\:TI A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcement with accessories for the cast -in -place concrete. 2. Reinforcing steel bars and welded steel wire fabric for cast -in -place concrete. 3. Support chairs, bolsters, and spacers, for supporting reinforcement B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 1100 -Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Drawings shall show the size, length, form and position of bar reinforcing and accessories. B. Certification: Submit a letter certifying that reinforcing bars comply with specified standard for grade. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Reinforcement shall meet the requirements of ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Stack reinforcing steel in tiers and mark so that each length, size, shape and location can be readily determined. 0 Exercise care to maintain reinforcement free of dirt, mud, paint or rust. r� L B. Store materials and accessories on dunnage and under protective sheeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 deformed billet steel. B. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric in flat sheets. C. Tie Wire: 16 gage annealed steel wire. D. Accessories: Anchors, dowels, spacers, chairs, bolsters and other devices for supporting and fastening reinforcementand normally considered as accessories to the concrete work. Chairs and bolsters resting on void forms shall be plastic tipped and set on continuous plates. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with the CRSI Manual. B. In case of fabricating errors, do not straighten or re -bend reinforcement in a manner that will weaken or injure the material. CONCRETE REINFORCING VLK Architects, 2008 03 2000 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Placing Steel: 1. Place reinforcement in accordance with CRSI "Placing Reinforcing Bars" and ACI 318, with provisions of ACI 318 governing. 2. Assemble reinforcing steel in the forms, wired and fastened securely. Bending shall be done cold. Bars with kinks or bends not detailed shall be rejected. 3. Clean reinforcing steel of loose rust, mill scale, grease, dirt and othercoatings which will reduce or destroy bond with the concrete. A thin film of tight rust will not be objectionable. 4. Position, support, and secure reinforcement to resist displacement by formwork, construction, and concrete placing operations. 5. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers. 6. Place reinforcement to obtain minimum coverages for concrete protection. 7. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with the specified be wire. 8. Set wire ties so twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces. 9. Support reinforcement and fasten together to prevent displacement by construction loads of placing concrete. Use No. 16 gauge black annealed wire at all joints and crosses to accurately position reinforcement in place. 10. Over formwork, use metal or plastic bar chairs and spacers to support reinforcement. 11. Where concrete surface will be exposed to weather in finished structure, use non -corrosive or corrosion protected accessories within %" of concrete surface. 12. Where successive mats of reinforcing fabric are continuous, overlap welded wire fabric so that overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet is not less than spacing of cross wires plus 2". 13. Bars having splices not shown on shop drawings will be subject to rejections. 14. Do not bend reinforcement after being embedded in hardened concrete. 15. Do not allow bars to be in contact with dissimilar materials. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Evaluation: The testing and inspection laboratory shall inspect placement of all reinforcing steel to confirm compliance with the contract documents. B. Concrete shall not be poured without inspection approval as noted above. END OF SECTION 11 C� a CONCRETE REINFORCING VLK Architects, 2008 03 2000 - 2 2737.04 El A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 03 3000 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cast -in -place concrete, including mixing, placing, and finishing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 03 1000 -Concrete Forming and Accessories. 3. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01340-SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES B. Product Data: 1. Submit product data for admixture, bonding compound, curing compound, and grout. C. Design Mixes: 1. At the beginning of the work, Contractor shall submit proposed concrete mix designs for review by the Architect, structural engineering consultant, and testing laboratory per SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. a. Include the sieve analysis of fine and course aggregate ASTM C 136, dry rodded weight of coarse aggregate - ASTM C 29, and the specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry), of fine and coarse aggregates ASTM C 127 and C 128. b. State admixture used and project conditions required for specific admixtures. c. Proposed concrete mix design shall also include the results of compressive tests. 2. Contractor shall not mix concrete for placing in the work until confirmation laboratory reports are supplied to reflect that each proposed mix will develop the strength and slump required. Successful past history in accordance with ACI 318 will be satisfactory. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 94. B. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301, 304, 305, 306, and 309. C. Obtain materials from same source throughout the work. D. Batch plant shall be able to show a minimum of five -years experience in batching concrete. If required, they shall furnish a list of similar sized jobs or special condition jobs performed during the last two -years. E. Surface Tolerances: For all finished concrete wearing surfaces, the variation from level or from elevations indicated shall not exceed %" in 16'. If variations exceed those as set forth then the wearing surface shall be filled or ground down as required to meet the stated tolerances. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS • A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placing: Do not place concrete when the temperature is below 40°F. or is expected to fall below 40°F. within 24 hours after placing concrete; unless eitherfavorable weather is forecast or adequate arrangements for protection and heating have been made in accordance with ACI 306. 2. Hot Weather Placing: Do not place concrete when hot weather conditions exist thatwould impair the quality and strength of concrete, i.e. any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind velocity, unless adequate arrangements for protection have been made in accordance with ACI 305. B. Coordination: Notify other trades and contractors well in advance of placing concrete to allow them sufficient time in which to install work which is to be built-in or cast into the concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2008 03 3000 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cements: ASTM C 150, Type I, domestic manufacture. B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, washed sand with a fineness modulus of between 2.50 and 3.00. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, clean crushed stone orwashed gravel. The nominal maximum particle size shall not exceed 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between forms or % of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. D. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures, equal to Master Builders "Micro Air". F. Fly Ash - ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F, limit use of fly ash to not -to -exceed 20% of cement content by weight. G Water: Clean and potable. 2.02 CONCRETE TREATMENT PRODUCTS A. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements. Product/ manufacturer; one of the following: Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod; Sika Chemical Sealtight Rezi-Weld 1000; W.R. Meadows, Inc. EpoxealTM GS Structural; Sonnebom Div. of ChemRex Building Products B. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,18 to 25 percent solids, clear, acrylic copolymer based liquid for curing and sealing concrete. Product/manufacturer, one of the following: Safe -Cure Clear, ChemMasters Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid Chemical Co. Cure & Seal 18 Percent E; Symons Corp., a Dayton Superior Co. Vocomp-20; W.R. Meadows, Inc. C. Non-metallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, non-metallic aggregate grout, non- corrosive, non -staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and 30-minute working time. Product(manufacturer, one of the following: NS Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. Sealtight 588 Precision Grout; W.R. Meadows, Inc. Sonogrout®1 OK; Sonnebom Div. of ChemRex D. Re -surfacing and/or Self -Leveling Underlayment Material: Provide Ardex K-15 as distributed by Ardex, Inc. (phone 214.867.5616) or Flo -Top as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Co. 2.03 SELECTING PROPORTIONS FOR CONCRETE A. Strength: Select proportions for a mix designed to produce concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless noted otherwise. B. Admixture: 1. Use admixture in all concrete. Select the type (normal, retarder, or high early) best suited for the temperature conditions at the time the concrete is placed and finished. 2. Use water reducing admixture only with the permission of the Engineer. Do not use water reducing admixture and air entrainment together with any slabs to receive a hard trowelled finish. Use air entrainment in all concrete to be pumped (5%). CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2008 03 3000 - 2 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Use air -entraining admixture in all exterior concrete, including pavement and flatwork. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content by volume with a tolerance of plus or minus 1% percent within the following limits: 1. 3 to 6 percent, 1%" max. aggregate. 2. 3.5 to 6.5 percent, 1" max. aggregate. 3. 4 to 8 percent, 3/4" max. aggregate. 4. 5 to 9 percent, W max. aggregate. D. Calcium chloride shall not be used. E. Slump: Select proportions to produce concrete with the following maximum allowable slumps. The slump limits given shall apply after inclusion of the admixture. Reinforced piers, footings 5"-7" Reinforced walls, beams, slabs 4"-5" Pavement, flatwork 4" 2.04 MIXING AND DELIVERY A. Measurement of concrete materials, mixing, and delivery of fresh concrete to the project shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 94. Transit -mixed concrete supplier shall have a plant with sufficient capacity and transportation facilities to assure continuous delivery at the rate required. B. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94, Alternative No. 2, or ACI 304. C. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94. D. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1. Mix not less than one minute after materials are in mixer. E. Do not transport or use concrete after 90 minutes has expired from time of initial mixing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Before any concrete is placed, the forms and reinforcement shall be inspected by the Contractor and the Owner's testing laboratory. Notify the Owner's testing laboratory not less than one working day before concrete is scheduled to be placed. Bucks, sleeves, anchors and other fixtures to be embedded in concrete shall be properly positioned and anchored. Wash down form surfaces to remove foreign substances. Provide elevated runways clearing steel and other embedded work. B. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. At locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill over -sized holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels, and pack solid with non -shrink grout. 3.02 CONVEYING CONCRETE A. Convey concrete to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent the separation or loss of the ingredients. Equipmentforchuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be such as to assure a continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end without separation. The use of aluminum chutes or pipes for transporting concrete will not be permitted. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Notify Architect and testing laboratorya minimum of 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. B. General: Place concrete in continuous horizontal lifts no deeper than 24". Avoid inclined lifts and inclined construction joints and do not cause or allow concrete to flow horizontally in the forms. Keep conveying equipment clean and free of hardened concrete. Use tremies or suitable chutes for placing concrete in high narrow walls so that concrete will not have a free vertical fall in excess of 3'. C. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and as specified below: 1. Unless protection is provided, do not place concrete in rain, sleet, or snow. 2. Regulate rate of placement so concrete remains plastic and flows into position. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2008 03 3000 - 3 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. Deposit concrete continuously until panel or section is completed. Place as near as possible to its final location; do not rehandle. 4. Do not place concrete, under any circumstances, except in presence of testing laboratory. 5. When placing concrete in masonry, exercise extreme care to prevent concrete from staining face of masonry. 6. Consolidation a. Comply with requirements of ACI 309. b. Use mechanical vibrating equipment for consolidation. c. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete in forms. d. Use vibrators with sufficient speed and amplitude to consolidate effectively. e. Keep a spare vibrator on site during all concrete pours. f. Thoroughly consolidate concrete and work around reinforcement, embedded items and into comers of forms. Thoroughly consolidate layers of concrete with previous layers. 7. Expansion Joint Fillers: Place pre -molded expansion joint fillers at locations as detailed and whenever required to separate site paving from building slabs. Refer to Drawings for required joint dimensions. Reference SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES for joint filler products. 8. Bonding: Before depositing any new concrete on or against previously deposited concrete which has partially or entirely set, thoroughly roughen and clean the surfaces of the latter of all foreign matter, scum, and laitance. Retighten forms and re -coat the surface of the previously deposited concrete with specified bonding agent per manufacturer's directions. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. F. Saw cut control joints at an optimum time after finishing. Use 3/16" thick blade, cutting 1/3 into depth of slab thickness. G. Separate exterior slabs on fill from vertical'surfaces with joint filler. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within'/4" of finished slab surface. H. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery. I. Maintain record of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken. J. Beams and Walls: Place beams and walls continuously where possible. Start placing at ends of section and progress toward the center. Do not place concrete in beams and walls supported on piers until the concrete in the piers is no longer plastic. K. Slabs: Place each slab in one continuous operation without joints within the area established for a continuous pour. Start placing at the far end of the area and place each load of concrete against previously placed concrete, not away from it. L. Drains: Check the setting of floor drains so that they will finish flush with floor surfaces without varying the intended elevations and slopes. Slope surfaces down to drains at least 1W per foot or as shown. M. Compaction: Compact concrete with ramming and spading tools during placing to work the coarse aggregate away from the forms and to produce a dense mass without air pockets. Work concrete through and around reinforcing steel. Do not disturb any embedded work. N. Consolidation: Use high frequency mechanical vibrators to consolidate concrete and eliminate lift lines in walls exposedtoview. Vibrators shall be operated by skilled mechanics underclosesupervision. insert and withdraw the vibrator heads at points from 1W to 30" apart for short periods. Do not allow heads to touch the forms. O. Leveling: Level and grade the top surface of slabs with straight edges over gauge strips. Level the top of foundations for the reception of subsequent work. Level and line steps in like manner over strips or forms. - Remove wood spreaders, block, and screeds as the concrete is placed and before it sets. P. Construction Joints: Generally, locate construction joints in beams and suspended slabs in the middle third of the span. Form each construction joint with a vertical bulkhead. Remove the bulkhead as soon as the concrete has attained its initial set and leave the surface rough. Before placing fresh concrete against the surface, coat the surface with bonding compound applied in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2008 03 3000 - 4 2737.04 Cl • • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Q. Loading: Do not shake or move the forms and reinforcement nor place any strain on projecting metal after the concrete has taken its initial set. Do not permit loading or traffic of any kind on the construction until the concrete has fully hardened. R. Hot Weather Placement: Take special care to prevent high temperatures in the fresh concrete during hot weather. Use a set -retarding type admixture to assure that concrete remains workable and lift lines will not be visible. Forflatwork use a spray -on evaporation retardant as needed during finishing operations. S. Mechanical equipment pads required in mechanical yard shall be 6" thick with #4 @12" o.c. each way in mid - slab. Pour pad 6" larger than equipment all around. Additionally provide a continuous poured -down edge beam around the pad 18" deep by 10" wide reinforced with 245 continuous in bottom of beam with #3 ties @ 24" o.c. Add intermediate beams, same size and reinforcing, if pad exceeds 12'-0" in either direction and every 12'-0" thereafter. Provide 4" thick sand bed under slab. Top of slab elevation shall be 3" above finish grade around pad. 3.04 CORRECTING DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Examine concrete for defects as the forms are removed. Concrete out of alignment or with defective surfaces shall be considered as not conforming to the intent of these specifications. Such concrete shall be removed from the project site unless the Architect grants permission to patch the defective area. B. Concrete that does not attain the specified 28-day strength shall be removed from the project site at the contractor's expense. C. Formed surfaces exposed to view shall not have fins, offsets, voids, and bulges. Minor grain marks will not be objectionable, but the texture shall be uniform. Leave comers and other details sharply defined and surfaces straight and true. D. Repair honeycomb, pour joints, stone pockets, and like imperfections by wetting and pointing with mortar to match adjacent concrete. Where unacceptable surface blemishes occur on concrete exposed to view, rub the entire surface to produce a uniform appearance throughout. 3.05 FILLING TIE ROD AND BOLT HOLES A. Fill solidly with stiff cement grout the holes in concrete resulting from the removal of bolts and rods. Strike off flush any excess mortar at the faces of the holes. In concrete exposed to view, holes shall be patched with mortar to match adjacent concrete. 3.06 CONCRETE TOPPING A. Over entrances and other areas as shown on drawings, provide 3000 psi concrete topping as detailed. Before the topping is placed, remove loose dirt and sand particles with a stiff broom. Brush in a bonding coat of neat cement just ahead of the topping. Screed, tamp, and float the topping to the lines and slopes indicated. Finish as specified below. 3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Rubbed Concrete Finish 1. Exposed non -wearing concrete surfaces noted to be "Rubbed Concrete" shall be given a rubbed finish. a. Remove the fors as soon as possible and while the concrete is still "green". Level offsets and fins, and repair surfaces. b. Wet surfaces and rub with a carborundum brick orother suitable abrasive to obtain a uniformly textured and colored finish. Flush the surfaces with clean water to remove slung and loose particles. c. After the rough work on the building has been completed, again rub the surfaces with a carborundum brick. For this rubbing use a slung made from a patching and repairing compound equal to "Pave -Crete." Apply the slurry and rub it thoroughly into the concrete to provide the desired finish. Remove surplus slurry with burlap before it hardens. d. The finished work shall be free of holes and other unsightly defects and shall be uniform in texture and color. Leave comers sharply defined and surfaces straight and true. VLK Architects, 2008 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 5 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.08 CONCRETE FLOOR, SLAB, AND TOPPING FINISHES A. Steel Trowel: For concrete floor surfaces to be left exposed, to receive resilient tile, or carpet, provide a standard integral trowel finish. This finish is required on all concrete wearing surfaces for which other specific finishes are not indicated or scheduled. 1. Strike the surface at the finish floor elevation, and roll and tamp the concrete to force aggregate away from the surface. Screed to a true, level surface except where slopes are specifically indicated, and float when hard enough to support knee boards. 2. Bring the surface to a true grade by cutting down high spots and filling low spots with fresh concrete. Test with a 16 ft. straight edge, or shorter in restricted areas, and limit surface variations to not more than '/." in 16' and not more than 1/8" in 16' in the Cafetorium. 3. Finish the floor with a steel trowel to a smooth dense surface. When hard enough to ring under the trowel, burnish the surface to the final polished finish. B. Smooth: Concrete slab surfaces to be covered with thinset ceramic the shall receive steel trowel finish, except that the second burnish troweling shall be omitted. Leave surfaces with some "tooth" for a bond. C. Rough: Concrete slab surfaces to be covered with quarry and ceramic the shall be roughened for bond by scrubbing with stiff brooms to exposed the aggregate before laitance has hardened. Sweep the surfaces to remove loose material D. Brush: Provide a texture finish for exterior concrete except where scheduled otherwise. After floating and an initial troweling, go over the surfaces with a soft bristle brush or broom to produce a fine textured non -slip finish. Exposed vertical surfaces and comers shall be tooled and troweled smooth. E. Float: Concrete slab surfaces to be covered with membrane waterproofing and with insulation board, or slabs with sloped surfaces, shall be screeded and floated to a true, relatively smooth finish without sharp projections, offsets and other irregularities. 3.09 CURING A. Cure all concrete at least days. All curing procedures shall prevent evaporation of moisture from the concrete for the full curing period. Protect surfaces from traffic damage until the curing is complete. Go B. Keep exposed vertical surfaces and the tops of beams and walls moist by spraying with water or covering with saturated burlap, starting as soon as the surfaces will resist erosion. C. Concrete surfaces to be covered with thinset flooring materials (ceramic tile, vinyl composition tile, etc.), shall be cured by covering with reinforced 2-ply paper or 4 mil thick polyethylene sheeting laid with joints lapped 3" and sealed with tape. Do not use curing compound on these surfaces. D. Coat other concrete wearing surfaces with the curing and sealing compound, using at least 1 gallon per 300 sq. ft. Areas damaged by traffic or subsequent construction operations shall be re -coated. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Tests: 1. Samples for strength tests of concrete shall be taken from each 75 cu. yds., or fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any one day. 2. Sampling procedures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 172. If concrete is being pumped, take concrete samples for testing at the point of placement and not at the mixer discharge. 3. Make and record a slump test on each sample. The method of test shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 143. 4. Make 4 cylinders from each sample for strength tests,1 for 7-day, 2 for 28-day test, and 1 in reserve. The cylinders shall be made on the project site by an Independent Testing Laboratory and shall be cured and tested in conformance with the requirements of ASTM C 31 and C 39. 5. Samples for 3-day strength tests may be taken at the Contractor's discretion and at the Contractor's expense. 6. Samples for temperature and slump tests of concrete shall be taken from each truck, of each mix design of concrete placed in any one day. 7. Testing lab representative shall be on site at all times during concrete pours. 8. No water shall be added to concrete mix on project site without approval from Owner's representative. 9. Concrete delivery tickets for all trucks shall be given to General Contractor for later submission to Owner. Delivery tickets shall record time truck left plant, time truck arrived at site and mix design number being delivered. A maximum of 90 minutes will be allowed from mixing of concrete to delivery. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2008 03 3000 - 6 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Evaluation of Test Results: 1. Each strength test result shall be the average of 2 cylinders from the same sample tested at 28 days. 2. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if the average of any 3 consecutive compressive - strength tests equals or exceeds the specified compressive strength and no individual strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 3. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that compressive strengths or other requirements have not been met. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work. C. The cost of testing service shall be per SECTION 01455 - MATERIALS TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES. 3.11 GROUTING A. Grout base plates and other structural members. Pea gravel may be added to the grout if the space to be grouted is 1" thick or more. Do not add sand to the grout. 3.12 BASE PLATE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Set the anchor bolts for steel base plates. Use templates. 3.13 PATCHING A. Patch and repair existing concrete to restore smooth, uniform surfaces. B. Prepare the surfaces by removing loose and faulty material down to firm concrete. Edges of concrete exposed to view shall be saw -cut straight and square. Brush the surfaces free of dirt and debris and flush down with clean water. After the surfaces are dry, coat them with bonding compound used in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions. • C. Major patching and deep fills shall be done with a mixture 1 Portland 1 of part cement, % parts sand, and 1'/2 parts pea gravel. Work and tamp the fill into place, screed the surface and float and trowel to a smooth finish. Cure as specified above. D. Minor patching and re -surfacing of concrete to be covered with file and carpet shall be done using a suitable re -surfacing material such as Ardex K-15 or Flo -Top, which can be carried to a feather edge. Mix and apply in conformance with the manufacturers instructions and finish to a smooth surface. 3.14 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP A. Floor Protection: All concrete floors which will be exposed to view in the completed building shall be covered with reinforced paper with joints lapped and sealed. Maintain the protective covering untl all wet work in the building (masonrIA plaster, and tile) is completed. B. Clean Up: Excess concrete and wash water from concrete truck drums shall not be dumped anywhere on the site or on adjoining streets, but shall be disposed of away from the premises. • END OF SECTION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2008 03 3000 - 7 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College. Station, Texas SECTION 03 3519 COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Chemical staining of accessible curb ramps includes furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for, and pertinent to, the work to be done. Work will be accomplished in a thorough and workmanlike manner. The specified products will be prepared and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit current specifications and product literature, including color charts, as printed by the manufacturer of the products specified herein. All proposed materials and methods of application are subject to review by the Architect/Engineer and Owner. The Contractor shall include his qualifications, as required below, in this submittal. 1.03 LIMITS OF THE WORK A. The extent of concrete surfaces to be stained shall be as indicated on the drawings and/or as described in the specifications and/or bid proposal. 1.04 OBSERVATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS A. It is essential that prior to submitting a bid, the contractor shall observe existing improvements adjacent to the places of work and places of access to perform the work. 1.05 ACCESS A. Access to the work shall be as indicated on the plans. 1.06 TEST PANEL A. A test panel as shown on the plan sheet details shall be stained to the Owner's and Architect/Engineer's satisfaction before work may begin. 1.07 STANDARDS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Chemical stain and preparation materials shall perform, be manufactured, and be applied as described in LITHOCHROME CHEMICALSTAIN: Application Instructions A-403 03(1985)byL. M. Scofield Company, 6533 Bandini Boulevard, Los Angeles, California 90040. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. The chemical staining contractor shall submit a list of completed projects in which chemical staining of concrete surfaces was done. The list shall include the name of client, location, completion date, and telephone number of the Owner or of the General Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Chemical stain for coloring concrete shall be LITHOCHROME, a penetrating, acid stain manufactured by L.M. Scofield Company, or an approved equal. ® 1. Color: One color shall be selected by the Architect/Engineer. COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING VLK Architects, 2008 03 3519 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.02 MATERIAL LABELS AND CONTAINERS A. Materials specified for application shall be delivered to the site in sealed containers, properly labeled with the manufacturer's labels, and stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. 2.03 APPROVED EQUAL SUBSTITUTIONS A. If a Bidder wishes to submit an item for consideration as an "approved equal," the Bidder and each item must meet all of the requirements of SECTION 016200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ADVERSE CONDITIONS A. Neither preparation materials nor chemical staining materials will be applied when adverse conditions exist. Adverse conditions include air pollutants, blowing sand and other airborne materials, excessive humidity, present or imminent precipitation of all kinds, high and low temperatures, adverse concrete surface conditions, and other conditions and limitations as specified by the product manufacturer(s) that are detrimental to the products' performance and the desired results as specified herein: 1. Protection of Materials: All materials and containers stored on the site will be protected from extremes of heat, solar radiation and cold which adversely affect their performance. 3.02 PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS A. The contractor shall be responsibleto protect existing improvements (such as lawn areas, landscape materials, curbing, pavements, fences, walks, etc.) from damage, coloration, or applications of staining materials. Such areas shall be masked or otherwise protected. Any existing improvements that are damaged or detrimentally affected will be cleaned, repaired, or restored to their original condition by the contractor at his expense. 3.03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. Since the chemical stain has corrosive and toxic properties, the contractor shall exercise care in its application to avoid contaminating people, animals, plants, or trees. The contractor will take necessary measures to keep people away from the area where the stain is being applied. Refer to Note 9 of the referenced "Application Instructions A-403.03." 3.04 PREPARATION OF THE SURFACE A. Concrete surfaces to be stained will be prepared per the stain manufacturer's recommendations. In general, the concrete shall have cured for at least 30 days, and it shall be dry, clean and free of curing compound, excess dust, paint, mortar, oils, waxes, and other foreign materials that would adversely affect the penetration and subsequent reaction of the stain solution with the concrete surface to be colored. The Owner's representative or Architect/Engineer shall approve the surface before staining may begin. 3.05 APPLICATION A. Stain will be applied per the manufacturer's instructions using either a broom -type medium -stiff bristle brush or spray equipment, as appropriate. Scofield's instructions shall be followed for application on vertical and sloping surfaces. 1. Coverage: One gallon of stain will cover approximately 125-200 square feet with two coats depending on surface texture and porosity of the concrete. 2. Coats: One or two coats will be applied, as selected by the Owner. 3. Drying Time: A minimum of eight hours will elapse between coats. 4. Sealants and Waxes: None are required. 3.06 COLOR RESULTS A. Color variations shall not be extreme and shall not vary significantly from the color(s) on the test panel that are judged satisfactory by the Architect/Engineer. 1. Coats: The Architect will select the number of coats to be applied. If the color variation after application is judged unacceptable by the Architect/Engineer, the contractor shall apply more stain as necessary to correct the problem. 0 ob COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING VLK Architects, 2008 03 3519 - 2 2737.04 0 0 100 3.07 CLEANUP A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas A. The contractor is responsible for removing and disposing of all containers, surplus material, rubbish, debris or other foreign material resulting from his work. In general, the site shall be left in a clean and orderly condition acceptable to the Owner. trash, 3.08 CURING COMPOUND A. Concrete surfaces designated to receive chemical stain must be free of curing compound. Accordingly, finished concrete shall be "water -cured" or shall be completely sandblasted if cured with a curing compound membrane. END OF SECTION VLK Architects, 2008 COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING 033519-3 2737.04 SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas A. Section Includes: Framing with dimension lumber, wood blocking and nailers, wood furring and grounds, plywood sheathing, subflooring and plywood backing panels. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: 1. Include all data for rough carpentry products required for installation. 2. Fire -retardant -treated wood product data, including certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength, stiffness, and fastener -holding capacities of treated materials. C. Warranty: Provide warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grading: Lumber Grading Rules and Wood Species in accordance with Voluntary Product Standards. Grading rules of following associations apply to materials furnished. 1. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 2. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIBB). 0 3. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). B. Grade Marks: Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark. 1. Lumber: Include symbol of grading agency, mill name, grade, species, grading rules and condition of seasoning at time of manufacturer. 2. Plywood: Include type, span rating or group number, exposure durability classification, and agency mark of APA. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Design structural site fabricated items underdirect supervision of a professional structural engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS and 016600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. B. Store products above ground, on platforms or skids, and covered with waterproof coverings. Provide for adequate air circulation. C. Do not store seasoned materials in damp or wet locations. D. Support products in such a way as to prevent warping and distortion. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide a 20-year warranty for each type of chemical treatment. • ROUGH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2006 06 1000 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wood: Lumber for framing and general carpentry work shall be sound, well manufactured, surfaced S4S material with a moisture content limit of 19%. 1. Dimension: SPIB grade marked No.2 Dimension Southern Pine or WCLB grade marked No. 2 Dimension Douglas Fir. 2. Boards: SPIB grade marked No. 2 Boards Southern Pine. 3. Redwood: RIS grade marked Construction Heart California Redwood. B. Plywood: Plywood for general carpentry work shall be APA trademarked, 23/32" minimum thickness, Tongue & Groove. 1. Interior. APA Rated Sturd-I-Floor, 24 oc, Exposure 1, fire -retardant treated. 2. Exterior. APA Rated Sturd-I-Floor, 24 oc, Exterior, fire -retardant treated. C. Rough Hardware: 1. Anchors, bolts, screws, and spikes shall be of proper types and sizes to support the work, to draw the members into place, and to hold them securely. Bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood shall have standard washers. 2. Metal fasteners to secure wood grounds and blocking to masonry and concrete shall be of the type best suited to the conditions and spaced no more than 16" o.c. Wood plugs and nailing blocks are not acceptable. 3. Nails shall be of the sizes and types intended for the particular use. 4. Rough hardware exposed to the weather orembedded in exterior masonry and concrete walls or slabs shall be galvanized. 5. Nails and bolts used with preservative treated lumber shall be galvanized. 2.02 WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire -Retardant Treatment: 1. Provide fire treated wood and plywood complying with AWPA standards for pressure impregnation with fire - retardant chemicals. 2. Kiln -dry treated items to maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber and 15% for plywood. 3. Treat all wood framing members, cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members. 4. At Interior and Substrate Locations: Wood shall be fire -retardant chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing maximum flame spread of 25, fuel contribution of 14, and smoke developed of 0 per ASTM E 84. Treat in accordance with AWPA C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood and particleboard. 5. At Exposed Exterior Locations: Wood and plywood shall be treated with Exterior Fire-X Blue as manufactured by Hoover Treated Wood Products (phone 404.595.5058). Provide UL label on each piece of fire -retardant lumber or plywood. B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber and C9 (Plywood). 2. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements. 3. Above -ground items: a. Pressure treat with waterbome preservatives complying with AWPB LP-2; after treatment, kiln -dry to maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber and 150/6 for plywood. b. Treat all wood framing members, cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members. 4. Ground contact: a. Pressure treat with waterbome preservatives for ground contact use complying with AWPA LP-22. C. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying; discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. 2. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. Scribe and cope as required. ROUGH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2008 061000 - 2 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as required by recognized standards and as required to draw members into place and securely hold same unless otherwise indicated. Use washers under all bolt heads. 4. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. 5. Make tight connections between members to develop full strength of members. 6. Install fasteners without splitting of wood. 7. Pre -drill as necessary. 8. Comply with APA E30 requirements for plywood. 9. Install fasteners at spacings recommended by AFPA National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastening -1973 for lumber and APA Guide E30 for Plywood, unless more restrictive code requirements dictate tighter spacing or heavier fasteners. 10. Locate members as indicated on the drawings. Size, spacing or spans shall not be changed without specific approval of Architect. Take care to place proper grades and species of members where indicated in accordance with the lumber schedule herein. 11. Temporary brace framing at the end of each days' work until all framing is completed and securely anchored. Leave temporary bracing in place as long as required for safety. As work progresses, securely connect work to compensate for dead load, wind and erection stresses. B. Framing: Frame members properly; fit closely, set accuratelyand secure rigidly in place. Do not splice between bearing points. Do not use shims for leveling on wood and metal bearings. Slate or file shims may be used for leveling on masonry and concrete. 1. Stud walls and partitions shall have single bottom plates bolted to the concrete not more than 4 ft. o.c. and double top plates with staggered joints. Space studs on 16" centers. Double the studs at all openings. At masonry walls, bolt the end studs to the masonry. 2. Spike beams and joists to wood bearings and at lapped ends. Frame headers and trimmers around openings, making allowance for passage of pipes and ducts to avoid injurious cutting of structural members. 3. Framing shall be closely fitted, accurately set to the required lines and levels, and securely spiked and bolted in place. Provide all bracing required to obtain rigid structures. C. Shoring: Construct shoring for masonry where required. Brace and maintain it until the mortar has set 0 sufficiently to permit removal. • D. Blocking: Install 2x6 wood blocking between studs to stiffen the structure and for the support of other work. Provide 2x6 blocking for installation of wall hung objects. E. Nailers: Install nailers of adequate size where detailed. Nailers shall be bolted in place. Where bolt sizes and spacing are not specifically noted, use not less than 3/a" bolts at 32" o.c., staggered. F. Roof Curbs: Construct wood curbs as detailed to frame openings and support lashings in roof decks. G. Bucks: Install wood bucks for frames as required. Members shall be at least 2 x 4 material. Spike securely together. In masonry, provide 16 ga. corrugated metal jamb anchors screwed to the back and spaced to work masonry bed joints, not more than 32" apart. H. Floor Underlayment for Platforms/Masonite Flooring: Install underlayment with face grain perpendicular to supports and spanning minimum two spans. Locate ends and sides over supports and stagger the shortjoints. Leave 1/8" spacing between all panel ends and edges. Use screw -type nails on 6" centers at ends and 12" centers at intermediate supports. Set screw heads 1/16". Start nails 3/8" from panel edges. Nail and glue using adhesives meeting APA specification AFG-01 or ASTM D 3498, with installation per APA's Form E30. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect products from moisture absorption and subsequent warping or deterioration until subsequent construction can proceed. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2008 061000 - 3 2737.04 • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 5150 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING REPAIR PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: Built-up Bituminous Roof repair work as a result of penetrations made or damage occurring to the roof membrane and flashings as part of the work of this contract. 1. In order to maintain the existing warranty where new roofing will be tied into existing roofing, the Contractor shall obtain written approval from the existing roof manufacturer. a. Contractor to confirm existing warranties for existing built-up bituminous roofs. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 2. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Flash, seal, counterflash and otherwise make watertight all roof membrane penetrations and repair all damages leaving membrane and flashings in a watertight condition. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE. A. Installer. Company specializing in roofing flashing and repair work with minimum 3 years experience. Use recommended detailing as indicated in NRCA Roofing Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, details, dimensions and interface with adjoining work. C. Product Data: 1. Submit all data concerning each roof to be repaired. 2. Submit written approval from the existing roof manufacturer that warranty shall be maintained. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials during inclement weather or when temperatures are below 40°F. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of curbs for roof mounted equipment with new openings cut into roof structure. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Maintain existing warranties. B. Provide a 2-year watertightness warranty from date of substantial completion for work of this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Utilize identical sheet, fluid -applied and bituminous materials, flashings, roof surfacing, fasteners, adhesives and accessories as original installation. On pipe penetrations, use flashing materials and techniques as recommended by NRCA utilizing portals mounted to curbs. 2.02 ASPHALT FUME CONTROL A. It is essential that the fumes resulting from the execution of this work be prohibited from entering any of the existing buildings on campus and minimized in the atmosphere around the campus in the exterior. BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING REPAIR VLK Architects, 2008 07 5150 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Contractor may elect any means of his choice to reduce the presence of asphaltic fumes, but the following are the minimum requirements: 1. Conventional kettle application with approved fume recovery system. 2. Enclosed tanker application with internal heating element and recycle fume recovery system. 3. Extension of all existing air intake devices in effected areas to an upwind position. 4. Providing emergency ventilation of any areas which become areas of complaints by the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. Protect existing building surfaces against damage from roofing installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare roof surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of original installation. 3.03 FLASHING AND REPAIR WORK A. General: Perform work in strict accordance with instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer of original installation materials. B. Cut holes for penetrations. C. Lay base flashing and seal down to membrane and penetration. D. Strip in flashing with multiple layers of felt and bitumen on built-up systems. E. Counterflash as required to make watertight. F. On built-up systems, re -install surfacing into flood coat of bitumen. END OF SECTION • CA a BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING REPAIR VLK Architects, 2008 07 5150 - 2 2737.04 • • is A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sheet metal flashing and trim. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 5150 - Built-up Bituminous Roofing Repair. 2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants. 3. Section 09 9100 -Painting. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit for approval samples of parapet coping cover expansion joint and soldered joint. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products under provisions of SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS and SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. B. Stack pre -formed material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasions, and to provide ventilation. C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Comply with the requirements of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA. B. InstallerQualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with three years minimum experience in similar sized installations. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Furnish to the Owner a written warranty providing the following without cost to the Owner. 1. Sheet metal roof flashings shall be maintained in normal repair and free of leaks for a period of 2 years from the date of acceptance of the roof. 2. At end of 2-year period, Owner and Contractor shall make final inspection of flashing work. Holes, breaks and other defects shall be promptly repaired at the Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal: ASTM A 653, Coating Designation G90 Paint Grip, zinc coated (galvanized) copper -bearing steel sheet, mill-phosphatized ready to receive field finishing in accordance with SECTION 09 9100 - PAINTING. Fluorocarbon coating containing 70% Kynar 500. Color shall be selected from Fluropon Standard colors as manufactured by Desoto, Inc. B. Reglet: Surface mounted Fry Type SM reglet of 24 gauge galvanized steel with slots punched 12" o.c. and furnished with drive pins of stainless steel with neoprene facing. C. Reglet: Two piece snaplock receiver, Per Figure 4-3C, SMACNA Manual, 5th Edition, of 24 gauge galvanized steel. D. Underlayment ASTM D962, 30 Ib/100 s.f. weight felt containing no additives corrosive to sheet metals. E. Solder: ASTM B 32, made from block tin and pig lead (50/50) with no antimony. F. Sealant Two component polyurethane, non -sagging, sealant as specified in SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM VLK Architects, 2008 07 6200 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas G Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. H. Miscellaneous items such as nails and mastic shall be furnished as required by the conditions of use and must be of the best grade available. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, free from distortion and defects, to profiles indicated in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. B. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet C. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. D. Hem exposed flashings on underside 11P; miter and seam comers. E. Solder and seal metal joints except those indicated or required to be expansive type joints. After soldering, remove flux Wipe and wash solder joints clean. F. Fabricate comers from one place with minimum 18" long legs; solder for rigidity; seal with sealant. G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward %" and hemmed to form drip. H. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend minimum 2" over wall surfaces. I. Fabricate as much as possible in shop with machinery to eliminate as much hand tooling on the job as possible. Shop fabricate to allow for adjustments in the field for proper anchoring and joining. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. C. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. S. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. C. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant D. Install one layer of underiayment prior to installing copings. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Fabricate, assemble, and install sheet metal work in conformance with referenced standard. 1. Make adequate provision for metal expansion and contraction without buckling or splitting. Use cleats and watertight sip and expansion joints. 2. Nails and screws shall be of the same metal as the member on which used. Nails through exposed wash surfaces will not be permitted. 3. When soldering, use flux and wash off surplus flux after soldering has been completed. 4. Set sheet metal with horizontal lines straight and level. Surfaces shall be flat without wrinkles and waves. Profiles shall align at joints with no offsets. 5. Conform to drawing details included in manuals published by SMACNA and NRCA. 6. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. so 7. Seal metal joints watertight 8. Provide electrolytic separation between dissimilar metals with protective back paint. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM VLK Architects, 2008 07 6200 - 2 2737.04 • • • B Aw Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I S.D. College Station, Texas lets on walls - all Inslall surface mount ran rticles. grease and loose � �d on lap• ins spaced 12" 0-c- j. Clean surface of oil, 9 alignment m wall with power driven p 2 Place sealant bead on backing let in 3• Secure reglet in precise alig. metal to fit the re9 4 Lap Joints 3" and bed in sealant. Miter and Se'et shad be formed of 24 gage bend for reg lower edge with a spring Counterflashing 4" and form C. Reglet Counterflashing: strip approximately conformance with the manufactuoree flash flashing instructions. u into reglet so that it is held Lap counterflashing down snap counter -flashing P against the base flashing- have been installed, 2. After roofing and flastung strip or clips. in lace without screws shall be provided as required for securely in Pis a and bed in sealant. Wider and seal corne 3. lap end of sheet metal roof work Miscellaneous flashings and other items D. ht•ob. weathertl9 I END OF SECTION CJ ETAL LASVJING AND TRIM SHEET M V37 • • • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sealing and caulking of joints. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 3. Section 32 1373 -Concrete Paving Joint Sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, color availability and application instructions. C. Submit two samples V diameter x 4" in size illustrating color selections available. D. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. B. Applicator. Company specializing in applying the work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience and approved by sealant manufacturer. C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation. 1.04 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide samples under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Construct one field sample joint, 5 feet long, illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface. C. Locate where directed. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the work. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: No caulking shall be done at temperatures below 40°F. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Fumish to the Owner a written warranty that the sealants shall remain watertight for a period of 2 years from the date of acceptance of the building. Joints which prove defective by leaking, cracking, melting or shrinking of the sealant shall be re -sealed without additional expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Modified Polyurethane (type 1 SealantX 1. Two or three-part conforming to ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. Color. Custom colors as selected by Architect. VLK Architects, 2008 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. Product/manufacturer. Sonnebom Sonolastic NP2, Degussa Building Systems Dymeric, Tremco. NO SUBSTITUTIONS B. Pourable Urethane Sealant (Type 2 Sealant): 1. Single -component conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P (pourable), Class 25, Use T (traffic). 2. Color. Gray or limestone as selected by Architect. 3. Product/manufacturer, one of the following: Sikaflex -1CSL; Sika Corporation, Inc. Sonnebom SL 1; Degussa Building Systems Vulkem Nova 300 SSL; Tremco C. Silicone, Paintable (Type 3 Sealant): 1. One -part silicone rubber sealant for interior use. 2. Acceptable product: Silicone Rubber Sealant, Paintable Dow Coming. D. Acrylic Latex (Type 4 Sealant) 1. One -part, non -sag acrylic latex, conforming to ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. 2. Acceptable products: AC-20+, Pecora Corp. Sonolac; Sonnebom, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. Tremflex 834; Tremco. NO SUBSTITUTIONS E. Silicone Sealant (Type 5 Sealantk 1. Single -component, low -modulus, neutral -curing, non -sag silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type NS. 2. Color. Gray. 3. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: RoadSaver Silicone; Crafco, Inc. 888; Dow Coming Corporation 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner. Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ASTM D 1056 and D 1565 round. In vertical joints use closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. In horizontal joints, use solid neoprene or butyl rubber, Shore A hardness of 70. D. Bond Breaker. Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Joint surfaces shall be clean and dry. Remove loose mortar and other material completely with compressed air or by brushing. 1. Joints to be caulked shall be at least'/4" wide unless specifically specified smaller. At any point where the width of the joint is appreciably less, cut or grind out the joint to that width to assure an adequate volume of sealant along the length of the joint, except at concrete paving joints, those shall remain 'A" wide as indicated. 40 2. Pack with backing material the voids and recesses around metal frames which are deeper than the depth required for caulking. Leave the proper depth for the sealant. JOINT SEALANTS VLK Architects, 2008 07 9200 - 2 2737.04 • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. In open joints and where detailed, install rod stock as backing material. Roll the material into the joints to avoid stretching. The natural thickness of the rod stock shall be approximately twice the thickness of the joint in which it is installed. 4. Where sealant is to be applied against smooth metal surfaces, wipe these surfaces clean with a suitable ketone solvent immediately prior to caulking. 5. Particular attention shall be paid to the preparation of horizontal joints in wear surfaces to be filled with sealant. Adjust joint depth to comply with sealant manufacturer's recommendations by malleting down the joint filler or filling in with rod stock as may be required. Joints in concrete paving shall be primed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C 1193 for solvent release sealants, C 1193 for latex base sealants, C 919 for acoustical applications, and C 1193 for elastomeric sealants. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Priming: Prime porous joint surfaces, particularly masonry and concrete. Test the primer to make sure it causes no staining of the material on which it is applied. B. Depth of sealant: Seal joints to a depth of approximately Y2 the joint width, but never less than %" deep. Follow the sealant manufacturer's recommendations where possible. C. Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Force the sealant into joints with enough pressure to expel all air and provide a solid filling. Correct any flowing or sagging before final inspection is made. 2. Where adjacent surfaces permit, use masking tape to obtain straight, even lines. Remove tape immediately after the joints have been sealed. 3. Fill joints flush with adjacent surfaces except where a recessed joint is specifically detailed. Tool beads with a sled runner or similar tool to insure full contact with joint faces. 4. For caulking horizontal joints in wear surfaces, use a gun with a narrow nozzle. Apply the flow type sealant with the nozzle riding along the bottom so that the sealant is forced up to completely fill the slot without cavities. Provide and use a portable vacuum cleaner to remove loose dirt from the joints just ahead of the caulking gun. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. E. Tool joints concave. Sealant shall achieve a firm skin before surface coating is applied. 3.04 CLEANING/REPAIRING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of soiling due to caulking operations. This applicator shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost of replacing any material damaged or discolored due to caulking operations. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section. 3.05 SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Locations specified below for sealants and caulking required under this section are general and shall not be considered as affecting the required use of sealing compounds specified under other sections of the specifications. SEALANT TYPE APPLICATION 1 a. Vertical control and expansion joints in exterior and interiormasonry surfaces. b. Vertical joints at perimeter of window, door, and storefront elements where adjacent to stone, masonry, or concrete surfaces. C. Reglets: The top groove along the surface -mounted flashing reglets. d. Sealing joints in sheet metal fabrications. e. Unless noted otherwise, any other exterior vertical joints. a. Exterior horizontal control and expansion joints in concrete paving. b. Filling of roof penetration pockets (pitch pans). JOINT SEALANTS VLK Architects, 2008 07 9200 - 3 . 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3 a. General caulking as part of interior painting in joints subject to movement. 40 4 a. General caulking as part of interior painting. 5 a. Exterior horizontal control and expansion joints in concrete paving. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS VLK Architects, 2008 07 9200 - 4 2737.04 0 • SECTION 09 9100 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas A. Section Includes: On-the-job painting and finishing of exterior and interior surfaces. 1. Included: Paint and finish the following materials, fittings, and equipment items which are exposed -to -view. a. Iron, steel, and galvanized metal. b. Wood. c. Gypsum board. d. Interior caulked joints. e. Bare and insulation covered piping and ductwork, conduit, hangers, grilles and registers, and primed metal surfaces and factory -finished surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment 2. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels, including the following: a. Factory -finished metal lockers and finished light fixtures. b. Architectural aluminum and stainless steel. c. Interior concrete floors and steps and all exterior concrete. d. Acoustic panel ceilings, unless noted on drawings. e. Pre -finished cabinets. f. Operating parts: Moving parts of operating mechanical and electrical equipment, such as: valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts g. Labels: UL, FM, or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 3. Contractor shall examine the drawings for mechanical and electrical work, and all materials installed throughout the building which require painting shall be painted under this section of the specifications. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. For purposes of this painting specification, the following areas and spaces are not considered finished, occupied areas and there will be no painting therein except for doors and frames and as may be specifically scheduled in article paint schedule. 1. Mechanical chases. 2. Spaces above suspended ceilings. 3. Underfloor crawl spaces. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit two 8'/2" x 11" samples of each paint color scheduled on the color schedule prepared by the Architect. Samples shall be on heavy cardboard and shall be made with the actual mixed paints to be used on the project. B. Paint Schedule: If painting materials other than those specified are proposed for use, submit a complete schedule of the materials to be substituted. This schedule, in triplicate, shall be in the same form as the paint schedule included in this section, and shall list materials by manufacturer, brand name, and type for each surface to be finished. C. Close-out Schedule: Upon completion of work, furnish a full schedule of paint types and colors actually used and formulas for each to the Owner. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer. Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with 3 years experience. B. Applicator. Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 2 years experience. C. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of containers. D. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as final coats.- Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. PAINTING VLK Architects, 2008 09 9100 -1 2737.04 ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas E. V.O.C. (Volatile Organic Compound) Compliance: Products listed in the schedules and/or substitutes proposed for use by Contractor must be formulated to meet all applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum V.O.C. content Utilize products which have been specially formulated to meet such requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Storage: Contractor shall designate a specific space at the project site forstoring and mixing materials. Protect this space and repair all damage resulting from use. Do not store kerosene nor gasoline in this space. Remove oily rags at the end of each days work. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain the temperature inside the building at not less than 60°F. during painting and finishing. B. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilitiesto maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 65°F. for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints: 45°F. for interiors; 50°F. for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum application temperature for varnish and finishes: 65°F. for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft.-candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within 09 the temperature limits specified during application and drying periods of24 hours between coats and 72 hours after final coat. G. Protection: Provide sufficient drop cloths to fully protect adjacent finished work. 1.07 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not store paints, oils, thinners and other flammable items inside the building. They shall be stored in approved containers when not in actual use during the painting job. The fire hazard shall be kept at a minimum. B. Take precautions to protect the public and construction workers during the progress of the work. C. Furnish a temporary fire extinguisher of suitable chemicals and capacity, located near flammable materials. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of the work, deliver to project site 2 gallons of each type and color of paint applied to interior and exterior surfaces. Provide formula for custom match colors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paint as manufactured by one of the following: ICI Dulux Paints (Formerly The Glidden Company)(httpJ/www.iciduluxpaints.com) Kelly -Moore Paint Co. (httpJ/www.kellymoore.com) Pittsburgh Paints(httpJ/www.pittsburghpaints.com) The Sherwin-Williams Co.(hftp://www.sherwin.com/default.asp) B. Materials described are based on the specifications of the above listed manufacturers, and are given to designate the quality of materials required. Materials of best quality grade are representative of the standard of quality required. Materials not displaying manufacturers identification as a first line, best -grade product will not be acceptable. PAINTING VLK Architects, 2008 09 9100 - 2 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Colors: As selected by Architect to match adjacent surfaces. Regardless of which brand of paint is selected for use the Contractor shall intermix and blend as required to obtain an exact match to each color on the color schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report to Architect any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Interior located wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442. D. Test shop -applied primers for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Perform the following Test procedure prior to painting. This will determine if Passivators exist on galvanized metal. This procedure is not necessary on galvanized metal with G 90 Paint Grip. 1. Prepare a solution by dissolving 20 grams of copper sulfate in one liter (1000 grams) of water. Copper sulfate crystals may be purchased at most drug stores. 2. Solvent wash a small area per the procedure of SSPC-SP1. 3. Sand a small washed area using emery cloth. 4. Using a cotton swab saturated with the copper sulfate solution, apply a swipe to both sanded and unsanded washed areas. 5. If the sanded and unsanded surfaces turn black at the same time and that time is less than 10 seconds, there is no passivation on the surface other than light oil, and a normal degreasing/cleaning operation is sufficient preparation prior to the coating application. If the unsanded surface turns slowerthan the sanded surface, or not at all, a passivator of some type is present on the surface. If neither surface turns, the surface is probably an alloy of zinc or some other metal. 6. If the galvanized steel has been treated or passivated, the treatment or passivator must be removed by brush blasting. If this method is prohibited by environmental regulations, then chemical etching with Amchem's GALVAPREP SG-3 will be acceptable, if previously approved by the Architect. The chemical. etching manufacturer's procedures should be followed carefully. 7. If the surface is determined to be an alloy by this test procedure, notify Architect and adhesion tests of the proposed coating applied over the proposed surface preparation must be conducted. 8. If no passivators are present, wash galvanized metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove residual grease and oil. F. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions for each substrate condition. B. Fill open joints, cracks and crevices on steel buck frames with metal putty and sand smooth before painting. C. Remove hardware and accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items which are not to be finish -painted or provide adequate surface -applied protection for these items in place. D. Uncoated steel and iron surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. E. Shop primed steel surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch- up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. PAINTING VIJt Architects, 2008 09 9100 - 3 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.03 APPLICATION A. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality. Mix and use paint materials in accord with the manufacturer's directions. Spread materials evenly, flow smoothly, and brush out without sags or runs. B. Provide finish coats which are compatible with primer paints used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers where required. C. When undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final paint coat, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform color and sheen. D. Between coats, sand enamel and lacquer finish on wood and metal surfaces to produce a smooth, even finish. Use #220 grit sandpaper or finer. E. Tint priming coats and undercoats to approximate shade of final coat to assure uniformity of color in the finish. Touch up suction spots and "hot spots" before applying the last coat to produce an even result in the finish coat. F. Exposed ductwork, piping and conduit in finished, occupied areas shall be painted the same color as the wall or ceiling against which it is installed, unless otherwise noted. G. Apply the finish coat on gypsum board, and concrete surfaces with rollers. 3.04 TOUCH UP AND CLEAN A. Touching Up: On completion, carefully touch up all holidays, marred and damaged spots, and work over all surfaces that have been repaired by other trades. B. Cleaning: Remove spilled, splashed, and splattered paint from all surfaces. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned. C. Reinstall the items removed under the provisions of paragraph above. 3.05 RE -PAINTING M A. Locations and Extent: The re -painting of existing surfaces shall be as follows: 1. Painted wall, ceiling, door and frame surfaces which have been reworked, cut into or patched, whether specifically designated on the drawings or not. Re -painting shall include all openings in existing walls. 2. Entire rooms/areas, as designated on the drawings. 3. Ceiling grid systems in rooms/areas where indicated on the drawings. B. Colors: Match existing colors of corresponding surfaces except where new colors are scheduled. Final colors to be approved by Architect. C. Preparation: 1. Clean surfaces to remove dust and dirt. Remove oil, grease, wax, loose paint, mill scale dirt, foreign matter, rust, mold, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers and other contaminants which would inhibit paint bonding to the old paint. 2. Remove rust and loose and flaking paint by scraping and sanding. 3. Glossy surfaces of old paint films and ceiling grid must be clean and dull before repainting. Thorough washing with an abrasive cleanser will clean and dull in one operation, or wash thoroughly and dull by sanding. 4. Spot prime any bare areas with an appropriate primer in conformance with the following paint schedule for new work. 5. Check for compatibility by applying a test patch of the recommended coating system, covering at least 2 to 3 Sq.Ft. Allow to dry one week before testing adhesion per ASTM D 3359. If the coating system is Incompatible, complete removal of existing finish is required. D. Painting: Generally, apply one coat of finish paint over old surfaces, using the same materials scheduled in the paint schedule for Ike new surfaces. E. Ceiling Grid Re -Painting: 1. Remove grease or oil from ceiling grid with paint thinner. 2. Sand hard, glossy surface until dull or treat with surface conditioner to promote adhesion of new coat of paint. 3. Use small pure china bristle brush for smooth finish. 4. Use trim roller for large areas. PAINTING VLK Architects, 2008 09 9100 - 4 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas. F. Verification: Verify the extent of re -painting work at the building and make due allowance for cutting and patching required for installation of mechanical and electrical work. 3.06 PAINT SCHEDULE A. The products listed below represent top of the line products of each manufacturer. These products are not presented as being equivalent, as there are too many variables to match each product across the board. Manufacturer's designations are: ICI ICI Dulux Paints (Formerly The Glidden Company) KM Kelly -Moore Paint Co. PPG Pittsburgh Paints SWThe Sherwin-Williams Co. B. Interior Metal 1. Ceiling grid suspension system. 2 finish coats ICI 1280-1200 Spraymaster Pro Aquacrylic Dryfall Flat Primer & Finish PPG Speedhide 6-90 SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eggshell 2. Grilles, diffusers and registers in walls and ceilings. 1 finish coat ICI 1512 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Egshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel KM 1620- Kel-Cote Alkyd Eggshell Enamel PPG Speedhide Alkyd Lo-Sheen, 6-90 SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel, Series B33 W 200 3. Other exposed iron and steel. 1 primer coat ICI 4160 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. KM 1711—Kel-Guard White Rust -Inhibitive Primer PPG Speedhide Inhibitive Steel Primer, 6-208 SW Kem Kromik Metal Primer, B50 W 1 1 finish coat ICI 1512 Alkyd Egshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel KM 1620—Kel-Cote Alkyd Eggshell Enamel PPG Speedhide Alkyd Lo-Sheen, 6-90 SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel, Series B33 W 200 4. Metal ductwork, hangers, supports and brackets. 1 primer coat ICI 4120 Devguard All Purpose Metal & Galvanized Primer KM 1722—Kel-Guard Galvanized Iron Primer PPG Speedhide White Galvanized Steel Primer, 6-209 SW Galvite Paint, B50 WZ30 1 finish coat ICI 1512 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Egshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel KM 1620—Kel-Cote Alkyd Eggshell Enamel PPG Speedhide Alkyd Lo-Sheen, 6-90 SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shell Enamel, Series B33 W 200 5. Items of mechanical and electrical machinery and equipment. 1 finish coat ICI 4308 Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel KM 1700—Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd, 7-282 Series SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 C. Gypsum Wallboard 1. Gypsum board ceilings and furr downs. 1 texture coat USG Multi -Purpose Texture - Sprayed Splatter - Light Finish Texture . PPG Speedhide Acrylic Texture Coating 4-50 3 finish coats ICI 1210 Ultra -Hide Latex Flat Interior Wall Paint KM 550-Super Latex Flat Wall Paint PPG Speedhide Interior Flat Latex 6-70 Series SW ProMar 200 Latex Flat Wall Paint, Series B30 W 200 PAINTING VLK Architects, 2008 09 9100 - 5 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. Gypsum board walls scheduled to have Epoxy Paint. 1 primer coat - fine sanded texture ICI 1000 Vinyl/Acrylic Wall Primer Sealer KM 970--Acry-Plex Hi -Hide Vinyl Wall Sealer SW ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer, B28 W 200 2 finish coats ICI Devoe 4408 Tru-Glaze-WB Waterbome Epoxy Gloss Coating KM 1790 Kel-Guard Acrylic Epoxy PPG Aquapon WB Waterbome Gloss Epoxy Coating 98-1 Series SW'Water-Based Catalyzed Epoxy, Series B70, Gloss Hardener 3. All other gypsum board walls. 1 texture coat USG Multi -Purpose Texture - sprayed splatter medium -light finish texture PPG Speedhide Acrylic Texture Coating 4-50 1 primer coat ICI 1000-1200 Prep & Prime Hi -Hide Interior Water -based Primer Sealer SW ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 or approved equivalent 2 finish coats ICI 1416 - Ultra -Hide Latex Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel KM 1650-Acry-Plex Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel PPG Speedhide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel 6510 Series SW Pro -Mar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W 200 D. Interior Fiberglass Reinforced Gypsum 1 primer coat SW ProMar 200 Latex wall primer, B28W200 or approved equivalent. PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Acrylic Alkali Resistant Primer 6-603 2 finish coats SW ProMar 200 Latex Semi -gloss, B31 W200 or approved equivalent. PPG Speedhide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel 6-600 Series E. Interior Caulked Joints 1. Caulking 2 finish coats ICI 1416 - Ultra -Hide Latex Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel KM 1650-Acry-Plex Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel PPG Speedhide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel 6510 Series SW Pro -Mar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W 200 F. Interior Acoustical Ceiling Tiles 2 finish coats PPG Speedcraft Interior Wall & Ceiling Flat Latex 5-70 Series SW ProMar 400 Flat Latex G. Exterior Metal 1. Steel pipe, conduit, hangers supports and brackets. 1 primer coat ICI 4120 Devguard All Purpose Metal & Galvanized Primer KM 1722-Kel-Guard Galvanized Iron Primer PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Galvanized Steel Primer 6-209 SW Galvite Paint, B50 WZ30 1 finish coat ICI 4308 Devoe Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel KM 1700-Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 2. Galvanized steel pipe handrails, railings, lintels, gates, metal fencing, ladders, ductwork, fiashings, copings, roof hatches, tubular steel downspouts, galvanized gutters and downspouts, scuppers, ventilators, and louvers. (Reference test procedure for Passivators) 1 primer coat ICI 4120 Devguard All Purpose Metal & Galvanized Primer KM 1722-Kel-Guard Galvanized Iron Primer PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Galvanized Steel Primer 6-209 SW Galvite Paint, B50 WZ30 PAINTING VLK Architects, 2008 09 9100 - 6 2737.04 • • ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2 finish coats ICI 4308 Devoe Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel KM 1700—Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 3. Items of mechanical and electrical machinery and equipment, including mechanical and electrical equipment on the roof which are 12" above roof line and are not concealed by a screen. 1 finish coat ICI 4308 Devoe Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel KM 1700—Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 4. Cast iron downspout boots. 1 primer coat ICI 4160 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. KM 1711—Kel-Guard White Rust -Inhibitive Primer PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer 6-208 Series SW Kern Kromik Metal Primer, B50 W 1 1 finish coat ICI 4308 Devoe Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel KM 1700- Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 END OF SECTION PAINTING VLK Architects, 2008 09 9100 - 7 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 113423 SPRAY PAINTING BOOTH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Exterior paint spray booth and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 15 - Mechanical: exhaust fans and ductwork. 2. Division 16 - Electrical: electrical rough4n. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Paint Spray Booth: Product of manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years experience specializing in the engineering, design and manufacturing of spray booth systems who issues complete catalog data on such product. B. Wind Loading: Fabricate and install prefabricated paint spray booth and other components of system to comply with code requirements for resisting wind effects based on current local codes. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed installation of paint spray booths similar in material, design and extent required for this project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings and catalog data on entire spray booth assembly, including filters and accessories. B. Show mechanical and electrical requirements. C. Show anchorage details and requirements. D. Certification: Submit design calculations sealed and signed by an engineer registered with the State of Texas. Design calculations shall state that the protective cover system design complies with the wind requirements of all governing jurisdictions, the stability criteria of applicable building code, and all other governing criteria. Drawings and design calculations shall comply with the City of College Station permitting requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINT SPRAY BOOTH A. Arrestor (Dry Filter) Spray Booth, self-supporting, standard model as manufactured by Spray Systems, Inc. (phone 909.623.6944) or approved equivalent. B. Dimensions: 1. Inside working height: 12'-0" 2. Inside working width: 16'-0" 3. Inside working length: 45'-6" 4. Outside overall height: 13'-6" 5. Outside overall width: 17'-4" 6. Outside overall length: 45'-8". C. Construction: 1. 18 gage, G90 grade, electro-galvanized prime sheet steel over heavy -gauge steel beam construction. 2. Precision pre -punched holes on panels. 3. Panel seams sealed with caulk. 4. Weatherproof construction for exterior installation. D. Doors: 1. End Doors: a. Single leaf front solid steel door. b. Opening Size: 11'-8 V W x 11'-10 V H SPRAY PAINTING BOOTH VLK Architects, 2008 11 3423 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas c. Structural tube frame for strength. d. Continuous welded construction. e. Leak proof wiper type seals at base. f. Heavy duty safety latches. 2. Side Access Doors: a. Opening size: 36" W x 84" H. b. Observation window with 1/4" tempered glass: 18"W x 36" H. c. Heavy duty safety latch. E. Exhaust airflow system: Exhaust Fan and Motor: a. 42-inch diameter spray systems high efficienty tubeaxial fan. b. Non sparking blade, enclosed belts and bearings. c. Rated for 19,600 cfm @ .5" S.F. d. 100 FPM average face verlocity through the booth. e. 5 HF, 208-230/460 volt,60Hz,3phase. f. REFC with 5-year manufactuer's warranty. g. Exhaust fan package shall meet all NFPA standards for spray booth applications. 2. Exhaust Filters: a. (28) American Air Filters, AG28 (or approved equivalent). b. 20" x 25" with holding hardware. c. UL Approved d. Locate filters in corners of booth with wire retaining grids. 3. Intake Filters: a. (24)(24) Viledon, R-1. b. 20" x 25" with holding hardware. c. 95% efficiency rating. d. Locate filters in booth's rear air supply plenum. 4. Draft Gauge: a. Provide Dwyer Mark II (or approved equivalent) manometer to indicate replacement of filters. 5. Stackwork: a. 42" ducts. b. Total length of exhaust stack shall be as required to accommodate actual roof height with appropriate extra length above roof for venting. 1) Provide approximately six straight 48" long exhaust stacks. 2) Provide one 12" x 16" clean out door. 3) Provide one 42" diameter weather canopy. c. Roof flange to accommodate 1 /4" per foot slope. F. Safety Devices: 1. W 2-way air solenoid Valve. 2. (2) Explosion proof door limit switches. 2.02 SPRAY BOOTH ACCESSORIES A. Light Fixtures: Class 1, Division 2 Fluorescent Fixture with safety glass, mounting brackets, and hardware. Lighting fixtures shall be UL listed. Lighting fixture package shall conform to NFPA regulations and be installed in accordance with NFPA, National Electrical Codes, and with local codes and ordinances. Lighting package shall include inside access, high efficiency, 48" 4-tube, Universal Ballast fixtures. Provide universal sockets and rear hinged access panel. Provide lights set in framed opening with 3/16" tempered glass. Light covers over side both lights. B. Safety -Valve: Electrically -operated solenoid air valve which prevents use of spray equipment until booth exhaust fan is on. C. Spray booth accessories shall be furnished by spray booth manufacturer and installed by contractor in accordance with spray booth manufacturer's instructions. SPRAY PAINTING BOOTH VLK Architects, 2008 11 3423 - 2 2737.04 so ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 0 2.03 SPRAY BOOTH ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT (BID ALTERNATE) r� A. Gas Fired Air Make Up 1. V 2 unit arrangement (vertical unit). 2. 100% Replacement Air 3_ 20,000 SCFM / 0.5 Duct SP/ .97 Total ESP / BHP: 18.07. 4. Electric Current: 440480/60/3 3-wire. 5. ETL Label. 6. Outdoor Safety switch (disconnect) and motor starter. 7. Outdoor installation. 8. 20 HP Motor - open drip proof, high efficiency EPACT. 9. 1,944 BTUH (in 1000,$) / 90 temperature rise (deg. F). 10. Gas pressure: 7 too 14" (natural gas). 11. Gas controls: ANSI. 12. Temperature control system : 401M Maxitrol. 13. External discharge damper with 2 position motor and interlock. 14. V bank with 2-inch cleanable filters. 15. Intake screen. 16. Vertical mounting stand. 17. G90 galvanized casing. 18. Flame failure light and high temperature limit. 19. Burner on/off air intake ductstat. 20. Remote control panel with operating lights. 21. Clogged filter switch with light. 22. Adjustable drive. 23. Supply duct from discharge of AMU to booth's plenum. B. Deluxe VFD Auto -Balance Panel 1. NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Voltage: As Indicated on the Drawings. b. IEC 22mm pilot devices. c. Main disconnect d. Branch circuit fusing. e. 120 VAC Control panel transformer. f. One AC variable speed drive for spray booth exhaust fan. 2. Control panel: a. Keypad for drive programming b. Indicating light for Run/On c. Magnehelic Gauge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install paint spray booth and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and and recommendations in such a manner as to comply with all applicable codes. This includes the furnishing of all labor and material required to accomplish this, even though not all required items are specifically mentioned or indicated in the drawings. END OF SECTION SPRAY PAINTING BOOTH VLK Architects, 2008 11 3423 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS SECTION 22 0500 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of the contract documents apply to work of Division 22 Mechanical. B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 22, Mechanical. 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS, AND FEES A. Perform work in accordance with applicable statutes, ordinances, codes and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mechanical work shall comply with applicable inspection services: 1. Underwriters Laboratories 2. National Fire Protection Association 3. State Health Department 4. Local Municipal Building Inspection Department 5. Texas Department of Licensing & Regulations (ADA) 6. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS Based on ADA) C. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. D. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations. E. Obtain all permits required. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be: 1. A licensed specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and organization to provide a practical working system 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years 1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. Materials which are specified by reference to Federal Specifications; ASTM, ASME, ANSI, or AW WA Specifications; Federal Standards; or other standard specifications must comply with latest editions, revisions, amendments or supplements in effect on date bids are received. Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for all equipment, material, and work. In instances where specified capacities, size, or other features of equipment, devices, or materials exceed these minimums, meet specified capacities. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS •A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of a various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements. PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 22 0500 -1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS • A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual construction is at variance with the contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various lines, valves, ductwork, traps, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Include flow -line elevation of sewer lines. Record existing and new underground and under slab piping with dimensioned locations and elevations of such piping. B. At the conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, erasable mylars of the original drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Prior to transmittal of corrected drawings, obtain 3 sets of blue -line prints of each drawing, regardless of whether corrections were necessary and include in the transmittal (2 sets are for the Owner's use and one set is for the Architect/Engineer's records). Delivery of these as -built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. Provide record drawings on one set each (reproducible Dayrex mylar film positives) and AutoCad 2000 files on disk (CD Rom). C. As -Built drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum: 1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents. 2. Remove Engineer's seal, name, address and logo from drawings. 3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. 4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY 5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of all piping, ductwork, etc. that were deviated from construction drawings. 6. Indicate exact location of all underground plumbing and flow line elevation. 7. ' Indicate exact location of all underground mechanical piping and elevation. 8. Indicate exact location of all underground electrical raceways and elevations. 9. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer. 10. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of drawings and specifications upon which all locations of equipment, ductwork, piping, devices, and all deviations and changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded. 11. Location and size of all ductwork and mechanical piping above ceiling including exact location of isolation of domestic and mechanical valves. 12. Exact location of all electrical equipment in and outside of the building. 13. Fire Protection System documents revised to indicate exact location of all sprinkler heads and zone valves. 14. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations. 15. Cloud all changes. 1.07 SPACE REQUIREMENTS A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this respect. 1.08 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents. PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 22 0500 - 2 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them. D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in sufficient time to prevent delay in the work. E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to equipment furnished under that Division. Determine from the Contractor for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect/Engineer, the exact location of all items. 1.09 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK A. When the word "concealed" is used in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts and the like, the work is understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings. "Exposed" is understood to mean open to view. 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee work for 1 year from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be provided. •� 1.11 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer. 1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of work, rectify such conditions at no additional cost. If the item of equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart. 1.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 22 are used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by named manufacturer will be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before bid due date. Submit complete design and performance data to the Engineer. 1.14 OPERATING TESTS A. After all mechanical systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each • system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 22 0500 - 3 2737.04, A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS Architect/Engineer. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all • systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. 1.15 WARRANTIES A. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 1.16 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. It shall be the responsibility of each sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and Engineering drawings, details, and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself with the project and all job related requirements. Each sub -contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor to verify that all piping and other items are placed in the walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so there will be no delays in the job. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 OPENINGS A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for ductwork, equipment or piping are specified under other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are included under this division. • 3.02 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide equipment housekeeping pads under all floor. mounted and ground mounted plumbing equipment, and as shown on the drawings. B. Concrete work as specified. C. Concrete pads: 1. 4" thick unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms. 3. Smooth steel trowel finish. 3.03 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES A. Provide a handle for each loose keyed operated valve and hose bibb on the project B. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner 2 suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used. C. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 3.04 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection, conduct an on -site training program to instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the mechanical systems. 1. Provide the training during the Owner's regular working day. PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 22 0500 - 4 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS 2. The Instructors shall each be experienced in their phase of operation and • maintenance of building mechanical systems and with the project. B. Time to be allocated for instructions. 1. Minimum of 8 hours dedicated instructor time. 2. 4 hours on each of 2 days. C. Before proceeding with the on -site training program, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; and other pertinent information for review and approval. 1. One copy to the Owner. 2. One copy to the Architect/Engineer. D. The Owner will provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and will coordinate their attendance at the agreed upon times. E. Use the operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment. G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system). H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions. •� I. Submit a report within one week after completion of the training program that instructions have been satisfactorily completed. Give time and date of each demonstration and hours devoted to the demonstration, with a list of people present. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the Owner sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system, that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are satisfactory. K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each Operating and Maintenance Manual. 3.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide a laminated engraved plastic nameplate on each piece of equipment and starter. 1. Designation approved by Architect/Engineer. 2. Equipment includes, but is not limited to, water heaters, pumps, boilers and utility controllers. 3. Submit schedule of equipment to be included and designations. B. Provide nameplates with 1/2" high letters and fastened with epoxy or screws. 3.06 OBSTRUCTIONS A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information. 01. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 22 0500 - 5 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all • available information has been provided. 02. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction, whether or not such existing facilities are shown. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and in original manufacturer's condition. END OF SECTION PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 22 0500 - 6 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS SECTION 22 0510 - PLUMBING CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and demonstrations. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract documents. 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be suspended from structural bridging. D. Provide finishes to match approved samples. All exposed finishes shall be approved by the Architect. Submit color samples as required. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect / Engineer before proceeding. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide qualified personnel to observe: 1. Field conditions. 2. Condition of installation. 3. Quality of workmanship. 4. Start-up of equipment. 5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment. B. Representative shall make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect / Engineer. PLUMBING CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2008 22 0510 -1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT A. Do not deliver equipment to the project site until progress of construction has reached the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather will be rejected, and the Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Adequately protect equipment from damage after delivery to the project. Cover with heavy tarpaulins, drop cloths or other protective coverings as required to protect from plaster, paint, mortar and/or dirt. Do not cover with plastic materials and trap condensate and cause corrosion. END OF SECTION PLUMBING CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2008 22 0510 - 2 2737.04 • ABM CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS 03 SECTION 22 2000 - PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS - GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install pipe and pipe fittings for piping systems specified in Division 22 - Mechanical. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. The particular type of pipe and fittings for each system is specified in the individual sections. 2.02 JOINTS A. Dissimilar Metals. Make joints between copper and steel pipe and equipment using insulating unions or couplings such as Crane Company #1259; EPCO as manufactured by EPCO Sales, Inc.; or an approved equal. B. Make welded joints 'as recommended by the standards of the American Welding Society. Ensure complete penetration of deposited metal with base metal. Provide filler metal suitable for use with base metal. Keep inside of fittings free from globules of weld metal. The use of mitered joints is not approved. 2.03 UNIONS ejA. Use 150 lb. standard (300 lb. WOG) malleable iron, ground joint unions with bronze seat. Provide flanged joints on piping 2-1/2 and larger. 1. Where pipe material of different types join, use a dielectric union. Union shall be threaded, solder or as required for its intended use. 2.04 BRANCH CONNECTIONS A. Pipe 2" and Smaller. For threaded piping, use straight size reducing tee. When branch is smaller than header, a nipple and reducing coupling or swagged nipple may be used. B. 2-1/2" through 36". For welding piping, when branch size is the same as header size, use welding tee. Use Weld-o-let when branch is smaller than header. For threaded branch connections, use 3000 lb. full coupling or Thread-o-let welded to header. 2.05 DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE A. All piping material, pipe and pipe fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of America. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Make piping layout and installation in the most advantageous manner possible with respect to • headroom, valve access, opening and equipment clearance, and clearance for other work. Give particular attention to piping in the vicinity of equipment. Preserve the required minimum PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2008 22 2000 -1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS access clearances to various equipment parts, as recommended by the equipment • manufactured, for maintenance. B. Cut all pipes to measurement determined at the site. After cutting pipe, remove burrs by reaming. Bevel plain ends of ferrous pipe. C. Install piping neatly, free from unnecessary traps and pockets. Work into place without springing or forcing. Use fittings to make changes in direction. Field bending and mitering is prohibited. Make connections to equipment using flanged joints, unions or couplings. Make reducing connections with reducing fittings only. D. Install piping without tapping out of the bottom of pipe. 3.02 WELD A. Weld and fabricate piping in accordance with ANSI Standard B31.1, latest edition, Code for Pressure Piping. B. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/16". Set fittings and joints square and true, and preserve alignment during welding operation. Use of alignment rods inside pipe is prohibited. C. Do not permit any weld to project within the pipe so as to restrict flows. Tack welds, if used, must be of the same material and made by the same procedure as the completed weld. Otherwise, remove tack welds during welding operation. D. Do not split, bend, flatten or otherwise damage piping before, during or after installation. E. Remove dirt, scale and other foreign matter from inside piping before tying into existing piping sections, fittings, valves or equipment. F. Bevel ends of ferrous pipe. 3.03 OFFSETS AND FITTINGS A. Due to the small scale of drawings, the indication of offsets and fittings is not possible. Investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and take steps required to meet these conditions. B. Install pipe close to walls, ceilings and columns so pipe will occupy minimum space. Provide proper spacing for insulation coverings, removal of pipe, special clearances, and offsets and fittings. 3.04 SECURING AND SUPPORTING A. Support piping to maintain line and grade, with provision for expansion and contraction. Use approved clevis-type or trapeze -type hangers connected to structural members of the building. Single pipe runs to be supported by approved clevis type hangers. Multiple pipe runs to be supported by approved trapeze type hangers. Do not support piping from other piping or structural joist bridging. B. Provide supports both sides of elbows for pipe 6" and larger. C. Support vertical risers with steel strap pipe clamps of approved design and size, supported at each floor. Support piping assemblies in chases so they are rigid and self -supported before ' the chase is closed. Provide structural support for piping penetrating chase walls to fixtures. PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2008 22 2000 -2 - 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS On chilled water pipe supports shall be outside the insulation. D. Where insulation occurs, design hangers to protect insulation from damage. Pipe saddles and insulation shields, where required, are specified in the appropriate insulation section and are sized in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. E. Install trapeze hangers, properly sized, to support the intended load without distortion. F. Use electro-galvanized or zinc plated threaded rods, nuts, washers and hangers. G. At outdoor locations, all supports, brackets and structural members shall be hot -dipped galvanized. H. Provide hangers within 3' of pipe length from all coil connections. I. Support spacing: As recommended by the project structural engineer and support manufacturer, but not more than listed below. Not to exceed spacing requirements of smallest pipe. Copper & Steel Cast Iron Minimum Rod Pipe Size Max. Support Max. Support Diameter, Inches Spacing, Feet Spacing, Feet 1" & smaller 6 3/8 1-1/4" & 1-1/2" 8 5 3/8 2" 10 5 3/8 3" 10 5 1/2 4" & 5" 10 5 5/8 6" and above 10 5 3/4 3.05 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Provide P1001 or P 5000 Unistrut metal framing members and appurtenances for pipe support. Hot -dip galvanize members and appurtenances when located outside. Sagging of pipes or supports is not acceptable. 3.06 ANCHORS A. Provide anchors as required. Use pipe anchors consisting of heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping to pipe and attaching anchor braces. Install anchor braces in the most effective manner to secure desired results. Do not install supports, anchors or similar devices where they will damage construction during installation or because of the weight or the expansion of the pipe. When possible, install sleeves in structural concrete prior to pouring of concrete. 3.07 PIPE SLEEVES A. Sleeves through masonry and concrete construction: 1. Fabricate sleeves of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 2. Size sleeve large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide continuous insulation. B. Sleeves through gypsum wall construction. 1. Fabricate sleeves of 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal. C. Sleeves through elevated slab construction. 1. Fabricate sleeves of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with welded center flange in floor. PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2008 22 2000 -3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS D. Extend each sleeve through the floor or wall. Cut the sleeve flush with each wall surface. Sleeves through floors shall extend 2" above floor lines for waterproofing purposes. Slab on grade floors shall not be sleeved except where penetrating waterproofing membrane or insect control is required. C. Caulk sleeves water and airtight. Seal annular space between pipes and sleeves with mastic compound to make the space water and airtight. D. For sleeves below grades in outside walls, provide Thunderline Link -Seal or Advance Product and System Interlynx, with 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts, with cast iron pressure plate. E. Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates on pipes passing through walls, floors or ceilings exposed to view. At exterior walls, stainless steel sheet metal is to be used. F. For sleeves through fire and smoke rated walls, seal with a UL through -penetration firestop, rated to maintain the integrity of the time rated construction. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with UL and NFPA standards for the installation of firestops. Refer to Architectural drawings for all fire and smoke rated partitions, walls, floors, etc. 3.08 ISOLATION VALVES A. Provide piping systems with line size shutoff valves located at the risers, at main branch connections to mains for equipment, to isolate central plant, and at other locations. 3.09 DRAIN VALVES A. Install drain valves at low points of water piping systems so that these systems can be entirely drained. Install a line size drain valve for pipes smaller than 2" unless indicated otherwise. For pipes 2-1/2" and larger, provide 2" drain valves unless indicated otherwise. Drain valves shall be plugged when not in use and at completion. 3.10 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. General cleaning of piping systems. Purge pipe of construction debris and contamination before placing the systems in service. Provide and install temporary connections as required to clean, purge and circulate. B. Install temporary strainers at the inlet of pumps and other equipment as necessary where permanent strainers are not indicated. Keep strainers in service until the equipment has been tested, then remove either entire strainer or straining element only. Fit strainers with a line size blow down ball valve and pipe to nearest drain. Blow down strainers, remove and clean as frequently as necessary., C. Phase One: Initial flushing of system. Remove loose dirt, mill scale, weld beads, rust and other deleterious substances without damage to system components. Open valves, drains, vents and strainers at'all system levels during flushing procedures. Flush until "potable water clear" and particles larger than 5 microns are removed. D. Connect dead-end supply and return headers, even if not shown on the drawings, and provide terminal drains in bottom of pipe end caps or blind flanges. E. Dispose of water in approved manner. PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2008 22 2000 -4 2737.04 C P� ft •J A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS F. Phase Two: Cleaning of Piping Systems. Remove, without chemical or mechanical damage to any system component, adherent dirt (organic soil), oil, grease, (hydrocarbons), soldering flux, mill varnish, piping compounds, rust (iron oxide) and other deleterious substances not removed by initial flushing. Flush system and replace with clean water. G. Phase Three: Final flushing and rinsing: Flush and rinse until "potable water clear" and particles larger than 5 microns are removed. Operate valves to dislodge any debris in valve body. Dispose of water in approved manner. H. Submit status reports upon completion of each phase of work on each system. 3.11 PIPE MARKERS A. Identify interior exposed piping and piping in accessible chases or plenums with Opti-Code Brady Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Pipe Markers, consisting of pipe marker and direction of flow arrow tape. Clean pipe prior to installation. Background colors of markers, arrows and tape for each type of system shall be the same. Meet ANSI/OSHA standards and clearly identify each system. Minimum 2-1/4-inch letters through 4-inch pipe and 4-inch letters for 5- inch pipe and larger. B. Identify exterior and mechanical room piping with Snap Around pipe markers through 4-inch pipe and Strap Around markers 5-inch pipe and larger. Pipe markers consisting of pipe marker and direction of flow arrow tape; background colors of markers, arrows and type for each type of system shall be the same. Meet ANSI / OSHA standards and clearly identify each system. Minimum 2-1/4-inch letters through 4-inch pipe and 4-inch letters for 5-inch pipe and larger. C. Install identification in the following locations: 1. both sides of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings. 2. Close to valves or flanges. 3. Intervals on straight pipe runs not to exceed 50 feet 4. Apply marker where view is obstructed. D. Pipe markers shall meet or exceed the specifications of the ASME A13.1 "Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems". END OF SECTION PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2008 22 2000 -5 2737.04 0) A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0100 - HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Compilation product data and' related information appropriate for Owner's operation and maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems. C. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Thirty (30) days after the Contractor has received the final scheduled identified submittals bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance (including resubmittals), submit for review one copy of the first draft of the Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall contain as a minimum: 1. Table of Contents for each element. 2. Contractor information. 3. All submittals, coordination drawings and product data, reviewed by the Architect/Engineer; bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance. (When submittals are returned from Engineer "Correct as Noted", corrected inserts shall be included.) 4. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment. 5. Warranties (without starting dates) 6. Certifications that have been completed. Submit forms and outlines of certifications that have not been completed. 7. Operating and maintenance procedures. 8. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates). 9. Control operations/equipment wiring diagrams. 10. Schedule of filters for each item of equipment. 11. Schedule of belts for each item of equipment. 12. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete. B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections. C. Submit three (3) completed manuals in final form to the Architect/Engineer one day after substantial completion, and prior to Owner's instructions. Include all specified data, test and balance reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates, reports, along with other materials and information. D. The Architect/Engineer will review the manuals for completeness within fifteen (15) days. E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall be reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The manuals will not be retransmitted. F. Two (2) complete Manuals will be delivered to the Owner. HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2008 23 0100 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS is 2.01 BINDERS A. Commercial quality black three-ring binders with clear overlay plastic covers. B. Minimum ring size: 1 ". Maximum ring size: 3". C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings. D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Form for Manuals: 1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. 2. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11 ". b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten. 3. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text. b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 4. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance ' Instructions". List: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structures as applicable. C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 6. Binder as specified. B. Content of Manual: 1. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic order as outlined in the specifications. a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. C. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of: 1) Subcontractor or installer. 2) Maintenance contractor as appropriate. 3) Identify area of responsibility of each. 4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement. d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product. b.. Annotate each sheet to: 1) Identify specific product or part installed. 2) Identify data applicable to installation. 3) Delete references to inapplicable information. (All options not supplied with equipment shall be marked out indicated in some manner. ' HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2008 23 0100 - 2 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3. Drawings: a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate: 1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 2) Control and flow diagrams. b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. C. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. 4. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving: 1) Proper procedures in event of failure. 2) Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 6. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified. C. Sections for Equipment and Systems. 1. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate: a. Description of unit and component parts. 1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b. Operating procedures: 1) Start up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. 2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency instructions. 3) Summer and winter operating instructions. 4) Special operating instructions. C. Maintenance procedures: 1) Routine operations 2) Guide to trouble -shooting. 3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly. 4) Alignment, adjusting and checking. 5) Routine service based on operating hours. d. Servicing and lubrication schedule. List of lubricants required. e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. g. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. 1) Predicted life of part subject to wear. 2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. h. As installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. i. Complete equipment internal wiring diagrams. j. Schedule of filters for each air handling system. k. Schedule of belts for each item of equipment. 1. Each Contractor's coordination drawings. m. As installed color coded piping diagrams. n. Charts of valve tag number, with location and function of each valve. o. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. P. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications. 2. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2008 23 0100 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX 3. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in respective Is of specifications. 4. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 23. 5. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section. 6. Provide start up reports as specified in each related section. 7. Provide signed receipts for spare parts and material. 8. Provide training report and certificates. END OF SECTION HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2008 23 0100 - 4 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0500 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of the contract documents apply to work of Division 23 Mechanical. B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 23, Mechanical. 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS, AND FEES A. Perform work in accordance with applicable statutes, ordinances, codes and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mechanical work shall comply with applicable inspection services: 1. Underwriters Laboratories 2. National Fire Protection Association 3. State Health Department 4. - Local Municipal Building Inspection Department 5. Texas Department of Licensing & Regulations (ADA) C. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. D. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations. E. Obtain all permits required. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. An approved. contractor for the work under this division shall be: 1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and organization to provide a practical working system 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years 1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. Materials which are specked by reference to Federal Specifications; ASTM, ASME, ANSI, or AWWA Specifications; Federal Standards; or other standard specifications must comply with latest editions, revisions, amendments or supplements in effect on date bids are received. Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for all equipment, material, and work. In instances where specified capacities, size, or other features of equipment, devices, or materials exceed these minimums, meet specified capacities. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 23 0500 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS • A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual construction is at variance with the contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various lines, valves, ductwork, traps, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Include flow -line elevation of sewer lines. Record existing and new underground and under slab piping with dimensioned locations and elevations of such piping. B. At the conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, erasable mylars of the original drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Prior to transmittal of corrected drawings, obtain 3 sets of blue -line prints of each drawing, regardless of whether corrections were necessary and include in the transmittal (2 sets are for the Owner's use and one set is for the Architect/Engineer's records). Delivery of these as -built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. Provide record drawings on one set each (reproducible Dayrex mylar film positives) and AutoCad 2000 files on disk (CD Rom). C. As -Built drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum: 1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents. 2. Remove Engineer's seal, name, address and logo from drawings. 3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. 4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY 5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of all piping, ductwork, etc. that were deviated from construction drawings. 6. Indicate exact location of all underground mechanical piping and elevation. 7. Indicate exact location of all underground electrical raceways and elevations. 8. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer. 9. Location and size of all ductwork and mechanical piping above ceiling including exact location of isolation of domestic and mechanical valves. 10. Exact location of all electrical equipment in and outside of the building. 11. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations. 12. Cloud all changes. 1.07 SPACE REQUIREMENTS A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this respect. 1.08 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in anywork. Review other Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents. C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them. D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in sufficient time to prevent delay in the work. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 23 0500 - 2 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to equipment furnished under that Division. Determine from the Contractor for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect/Engineer, the exact location of all items. 1.09 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK A. When the word "concealed" is used in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts and the like, the work is understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings. "Exposed" is understood to mean open to view. 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee work for 1 year from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be provided. 1.11 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer. 1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION isA. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of work, rectify such conditions at no additional cost. If the item of equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart. 1.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 23 are used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by a named manufacturer will be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before bid due date. Submit complete design and performance data to the Engineer. 1.14 OPERATING TESTS A. After all mechanical systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect/Engineer. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. • 1.15 WARRANTIES -� A. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 23 0500 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. • 1.16 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. It shall be the responsibility of each sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and Engineering drawings, details, and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself with the project and all job related requirements. Each sub -contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor to verify that all piping and other items are placed in the walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so there will be no delays in the job. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01. OPENINGS A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for ductwork, equipment or piping are specified under other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are included under this division. 3.02 AIR FILTERS AND PIPE STRAINERS A. Immediately prior to substantial completion of the project, inspect, clean and service air filters and strainers. Replace air filters. 3.03 LUBRICATION, REFRIGERANT AND OIL A. Provide a complete charge of correct lubricant for each item of equipment requiring lubrication. B. Provide a complete and working charge of proper refrigerant, free of contaminants, into each refrigerant system. After each system has been in operation long enough to ensure completely balanced conditions, check the charge and modify for proper operation as required. C. Provide a complete charge of special oil for refrigeration use, suitable for operation with refrigerant, in each system. 3.04 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide equipment housekeeping pads under all floor mounted and ground mounted HVAC and plumbing equipment, and as shown on the drawings. B. Concrete work as specified C. Concrete pads: 1. 4" thick unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms. 3. Smooth steel trowel finish. 3.05 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection, conduct an on -site training program to instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the mechanical systems. 1. Provide the training during the Owner's regular working day. 0 2. The Instructors shall each be experienced in their phase of operation and MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 23 0500 - 4 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 0) maintenance of building mechanical systems and with the project. B. Time to be allocated for instructions. 1. Minimum of 24 hours dedicated instructor time. 2. 8 hours on each of 3 days. C. Before proceeding with the on -site training program, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; and other pertinent information for review and approval. 1. One copy to the Owner. 2. One copy to the Architect/Engineer. D. The Owner will provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and will coordinate their attendance at the agreed upon times. E. Use the operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment. G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system). H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions. soI. Submit a report within one week after completion of the training program that instructions have been satisfactorily completed. Give time and date of each demonstration and hours devoted to the demonstration, with a list of people present. J. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the Owner sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system, that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are satisfactory. K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each Operating and Maintenance Manual. 3.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide a laminated engraved plastic nameplate on each piece of equipment and starter. 1. Designation approved by Architect/Engineer. 2. Equipment includes, but is not limited to, air handling units, fan coil units, variable volume boxes, fans, pumps, boilers and chillers. 3. Submit schedule of equipment to be included and designations. B. Provide nameplates with 1/2" high letters and fastened with epoxy or screws. 3.07 OBSTRUCTIONS A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information. 0) 1. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 23 0500 - 5 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all • available information has been provided. 2. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction, whether or not such existing facilities are shown. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and in original manufacturer's condition. 3.09 INDOOR AIR QUALITY A. All equipment and ductwork shall be installed to allow sufficient space for testing, maintenance, and commissioning functions. Access doors or panels shall be installed in ventilation equipment, ductwork, and plenum enclosures for inspection and cleaning of outdoor air intakes, mixing plenums, up and downstream of coils, filters, drain pans and fans. B. Practice source control and eliminate potential contaminants in material selection, installation, and maintenance. C. Provide installation and disposal instructions for all materials and chemicals that are potential contaminants. D. Obtain and conform to the requirements of the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) in the use of materials. E. Utilize manufacturer's recommendations and provide installation instructions for all chemicals, compounds, and potential contaminants including pre -installation degassing if required. F. Ventilate completed building prior to final completion using no less than design outside air for at least 48 hours before occupancy. G. Make provisions for controls to prevent the entry of air contaminants into the HVAC air distribution system. H. Steps shall be taken to ensure that the HVAC system continues to function effectively and are not damaged or contaminated during construction activities. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 23 0500 - 6 2737.04 COLLEGE HILLS ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, T ABM CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0510 - HVAC CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and demonstrations. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract documents. 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be suspended from structural bridging. ® D. Provide finishes to match approved samples. All exposed finishes shall be approved by the Architect. Submit color samples as required. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect / Engineer before proceeding. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide qualified personnel to observe: 1. Field conditions. 2. Condition of installation. 3. Quality of workmanship. 4. Start-up of equipment. 5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment. B. Representative shall make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect / Engineer. HVAC CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2008 23 0510 -1 2737.04 COLLEGE HILLS ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, T A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX • PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT A. Do not deliver equipment to the project site until progress of construction has reached the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather will be rejected, and the Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Adequately protect equipment from damage after delivery to the project. Cover with heavy tarpaulins, drop cloths or other protective coverings as required to protect from plaster, paint, mortar and/or dirt. Do not cover with plastic materials and trap condensate and cause corrosion. END OF SECTION is 0 HVAC CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2008 23 0510 - 2 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0512 - SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare submittals as required by these specifications as outlined below. B. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Coordination Drawings 3. Product data C. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for: 1. Distribution as specified 2. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related section 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings. B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do not submit a series of drawings of components. C. Identify field dimensions; show relationship to adjacent features, critical features, work, or products. D. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing equipment in mechanical equipment areas. 1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract documents. Minimum drawing scale: '/" = V-0". B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation, and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in other sections and other divisions of the specifications. C. For each mechanical room and for each outside equipment pad where equipment is located, submit plan and elevation drawings. Show: 1. Actual mechanical equipment and components to be furnished 2. Service clearance 3. Relationship to other equipment and components 4. Roof drains and leader piping 5. Fire protection piping and equipment D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products. E. Related requirements: 1. Ductwork shop drawings 2. Coordination drawing specified in Division 26 SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2008 23 0512 -1 2736.00 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing equipment in mechanical equipment areas. • G. Gas piping sketch indicating proposed location of piping prior to proceeding with the installation. 1.04 PRODUCT DATA AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION A. Submit only pages which are pertinent to the project. All options which are indicated on the product data shall become part of the contract and shall be required whether specked are not. B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to specification section and article number. C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances. D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information not applicable. E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product. Indicate in the margin of each paragraph the following: "Comply, "Do Not Comply', or "Not Applicable". Explain all "Do Not Comply" statements. F. Provide a separate transmittal for each submittal item. Transmittals shall indicate product by specification section name and number. Separate all submittals into appropriate specification • section number. Do not combine specification sections. 1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, calibrating, balancing and finishing. 1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals prior to transmittal. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers 4. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. D. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with Architect/Engineer's acceptance. • SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2008 23 0512 - 2 2736.00 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not. G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless Architect/engineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed documents. H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract Documents: 1. Proper sizes and capacities 2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service 3. Construction methods, materials and finishes Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed. 1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor. B. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit one reproducible transparency and three opaque reproductions. 2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies which the contractor requires, plus those which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer. •� C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted 5. Other pertinent data D. Submittals shall include: 1. The date of submission 2. The project title and number 3. Contract Identification 4. The names of: a. Contractor b. Subcontractor C. Supplier d. Manufacturer 5. Identification of the product 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers 9. Identification of deviations from contract documents 10. Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps 11. Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items: 1. Finishes which involve Architect/Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns 2. Associated items which require correlation for efficient function or for installation SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2008 23 0512 - 3 2736.00 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 0 1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual: 1. The related specification section number 2. The exact specification section title B. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without the specified information will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. 1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make re -submittals under procedures specked for initial submittals. 1. Indicate that the document or sample is a re -submittal 2. Identify changes made since previous submittals B. Indicate any changes which have been made, other than those requested • by the Architect/Engineer. 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents. B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner • and Architect/Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents. C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect/Engineer that do not bear the Contractor's stamp of approval and signature. D. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without Contractor's stamp of approval and signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. 1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS A. The Architect/Engineer will: 1. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with schedule 2. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for re -submittal or approval of submittal 3. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission B. Review and approval of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals which is peculiarly within the special expertise of the Contractor or any party dealing directly with the Contractor. C. Architect/Engineer's review and approval is only for conformance with the design concept of the project and for compliance with the information given in the contract. SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2008 23 0512 - 4 2736.00 • L2 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 2. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades. D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section. B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in Div. 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2008 23 0512 - 5 2736.00 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0513 - ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK soPART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Electrical provisions to be provided as mechanical work are indicated in other Division 23 sections, on drawings, and as specified. B. Types of work, normally recognized as electrical but provided as mechanical, specified or partially specified in this Section, include but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Motors for mechanical equipment. 2. Starters for motors of mechanical equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 3. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of mechanical equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 4. Wiring of field -mounted float control switches, flow control switches, and similar mechanical -electrical devices provided for mechanical systems, to equipment control panels. 5. Wiring of smoke detectors for shutdown of air handling equipment when a fire alarm system is not included in the project. 6. Pipe heat tracing. C. Refer to Division 23 Controls Sections for related control system wiring. D. Refer to Division 23 sections for specific individual mechanical equipment electrical requirements. E. Refer to Division 26 sections for motor starters and controls not furnished integrally with mechanical equipment. F. Refer to Division 26 sections for junction boxes and disconnect switches required for motors and other electrical units of mechanical equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wherever possible, match elements of electrical provisions of mechanical work with similar elements of electrical work specified in Division 26 sections for electrical work not otherwise specified. B. For electrical equipment and products, comply with applicable NEMA standards, and refer to NEMA standards for definitions of terminology. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) for workmanship and installation requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Include in listing of motors, voltage, notation of whether motor starter is furnished or installed integrally with motor or equipment containing motors. ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK VLK Architects, 2008 23 0513 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. Provide motors for mechanical equipment manufactured by one of the following: 1. Baldor Electric Company. -2. Century Electric Div., Inc. 3. General Electric Co. 4. Louis Allis Div.; Litton Industrial Products, Inc. 5. Lincoln Electric 6. Marathon Electric Mfg. Corp. 7. Reliance Electric Co. 8. Westinghouse Electric Corp. B. Motor Characteristics. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, and except where required items of mechanical equipment cannot be obtained with fully complying motors, comply with the following requirements for motors of mechanical work: C. Temperature Rating. Rated for 40 Degrees C environment with maximum 50 Degrees C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation). D. Provide each motor capable of making starts as frequently as indicated by automatic control system, and not less than 5 starts per hour for manually controlled motors. E. Phases and Current Characteristics. Provide squirrel -cage induction polyphase motors for 3/4hp and larger, and provide capacitor -start single-phase motors for 1/2hp and smaller, except 1/6hp and smaller may, at equipment manufacturer's option, be split - phase type. Coordinate current characteristics with power specified in Division 26 sections, and with individual equipment requirements specified in other Division 23 requirements. For 2-speed motors provide 2 separate windings on polyphase motors. Do not purchase motors until power characteristics available at locations of motors have been confirmed, and until rotation directions have been confirmed. F. Service Factor. 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors. G. Motor Construction. Provide general purpose, continuous duty motors, Design "B" except "C" where required for high starting torque. 1. Frames. NEMA #56. 2. Bearings are to be ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals, regreasable except permanently sealed where motor is inaccessible for regular maintenance. Where belt drives and other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor, provide bearings designed to resist thrust loading. Refer to individual section of Division 23 for fractional -hp light -duty motors where sleeve -type bearings are permitted. 3. Except as indicated, provide open drip -proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and provide guarded drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants. Provide weather -protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. Refer to individual sections of Division 23 for other enclosure requirements. 4. Provide built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, provide internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter. 5. Noise Rating: Provide "Quiet" rating on motors. H. All motors shall be premium efficiency. ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK VLK Architects, 2008 23 0513 - 2 2737.04 • is •0 2.02 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION 0) 0) A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX A. Fabricate mechanical equipment for secure mounting of motors and other electrical items included in work. Provide either permanent alignment of motors with equipment, or adjustable mountings as applicable for belt drives, gear drives, special couplings and similar indirect coupling of equipment. Provide safe, secure, durable, and removable guards for motor drives. Arrange for lubrication and similar running -maintenance without removal of guards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's instructions, anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces inherent in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts. B. Verify voltage with Electrical Plans. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK VLK Architects, 2008 23 0513 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0517 - HVAC ACCESS DOORS •� PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install access doors in wall or ceiling locations as required or shown for access to valves, controls, fire dampers, air distribution devices and other equipment requiring maintenance, adjustment or operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NON -FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS A. 16-Gauge frames B. 14-gauge steel panels C. Continuous fully concealed hinges D. Flush screwdriver cam lock & cylinder lock for Owner selection E. Automatic closing and latching mechanism F. Prime coat finish G. Brushed satin stainless steel finish for restroom, kitchen or cafeteria installation H. Material suitable for wall and/or ceiling mounting 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Milcor B. MIFAB C. Acudor D. Elmdor PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Access doors specified in Division 23 will be installed by other crafts. Not all required access doors are shown. Coordinate with the Contractor to locate access doors for ease of operation and maintenance of concealed equipment. B. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Minimum size required: 01. 36" x 24" for Mechanical HVAC equipment related items END OF SECTION �j HVAC ACCESS DOORS VLK Architects, 2008 23 0517 -1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 3113 - DUCTWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct construction, support and accessories. Dimensions shown on the drawings are free area dimensions. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical 1. Air Devices 2. Insulation 3. Fan Coil Units 4. Fans 5. Testing, Balancing And Adjusting (TAB) of Environmental Systems B. Finishes, Painting and Color Coding 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The intent of ductwork specifications is to obtain superior quality workmanship resulting in an installation that is absolutely satisfactory in both function and appearance. Provide ductwork in accordance with the specifications for each type of service. B. An approved contractor for this work under this division shall be: 1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and the organization to provide a practical working system. 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 5 systems of comparable size and type that have served their owners satisfactorily for not less than 5 years. 1.04 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee ductwork for 1 year from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee covers workmanship, noise, chatter, whistling, or vibration. Ductwork shall be free from pulsation under conditions of operation. 1.05 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION A. Erect ducts in the general locations shown, but conform to structural and finish conditions of the building. Before fabricating any ductwork, check the physical conditions at the job site and make necessary changes in cross sections, offsets, and similar items, whether they are specifically indicated or not. B. Coordinate location of ductwork with structural members and Architectural drawings and requirements. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. Submit shop drawings of all ductwork layouts, including enlarged plans and elevations of all air handling equipment, and summit details of duct fittings, including particulars such as gauge sizes, welds, and configurations prior to starting work. DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2008 23 3113 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Submit product data and sealing materials to be used. C. Submit sound attenuation data. D. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, and three-dimensional view showing equipment in mechanical equipment areas. PART 2 - DUCTS 2.01 STANDARDS AND CODES A. Except as otherwise indicated, sheet metal ductwork material and installation shall comply with the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Air distribution devices (such as dampers) included in this specification shall comply with the latest applicable SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems and NFPA 90A. 2.02 DUCT MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION A. Except for the special ducts specified below use lock forming quality prime galvanized steel sheets or coils up to 60" wide. Stencil each sheet with gauge and manufacturer's name. Stencil coils of sheet steel throughout on 10' centers with gauge and manufacturer's name. Provide certification of duct gauge and manufacturer for each size duct. • B. Rectangular low and medium pressure duct constructed of sheet metal in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. C. Low pressure round ducts shall be shop fabricated with snap lock longitudinal seams. S Ducts shall be constructed for a minimum of 2" w.g. static pressure. 2.03 DUCT SEALING OF SEAMS AND JOINTS A. Follow seal classification as indicated in Table 1-2 of SMACNA "HVAC AIR DUCT LEAKAGE TEST MANUAL". Use seal class A for 4" w.g. static. All longitudinal and transverse joints and seams shall be sealed by use of a fireproof, non -hardening, and non -migrating elastomeric sealant. With the exception of continuously welded joints and machine made spiral lock seams, joints and seams made air tight with duct sealer. Duct sealer shall be Benjamin Foster 32-14. 1. Indoor applications — Benjamin Foster 32-14 2. Outdoor applications — Benjamin Foster 32-17 2.04 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Manual balancing dampers that meet or exceed the following minimum construction standards: 1. Frame 16-gauge 2. Blades 16-gauge 3. Bearings corrosion resistant 4. Concealed linkage 5. Opposed blade dampers • DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2008 23 3113 - 2 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Acceptable manufacturer: 1. Ruskin Model MD-35 or approved equal, by 2. Arrow 3. American Warming and Ventilating 4. Nailor Industries 5. Pottoroff 2.05 ACCESS DOORS A. Round spin -in door of galvanized steel. 1. Fire proof sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices 2. Insulated door 3. Conform to the requirements of the NFPA 4. Identification and use of each access door 5. UL label to match the construction in which it is installed 6. Cable attached to door and outer frame 7. Low leakage Access Door B. Acceptable Manufacturer 1. Flex master, Inspector Series 2. Approved Equal 2.06 DIFFUSER FITTINGS LOW PRESSURE TAPS A. Fitting shall meet or exceed the following minimum construction standards: 1. Conical with abase diameter two inches larger than the tap diameter. w 2. 0) 3 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. VLK Architects, 2008 Construct fitting and damper of galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 527, G90 finish. a. Fitting with a 3/16-inch high stop bead approximately 2-1/2-inches from the discharge end of the fitting b. Provide the fitting with a butterfly damper, damper rod, end bearings and heavy duty locking quadrant. C. Size the length of the straight section of the fitting to match the damper blade diameter. Center the damper blade in the straight section. Match the fitting body gauge to the SMACNA duct gauge, but not less than: a. Through 8 inches: 26 gauge; Damper blade 22 gauge b. 10 inches and 12 inches: 24 gauge; Damper blade 22 gauge C. 14 inches and 16 inches: 22 gauge; Damper blade 22 gauge d. 18 inches and 20 inches: 20 gauge; Damper blade 20 gauge Fasten damper blade to a 3/8 X 3/8 continuous square rod with minimum (2) galvanized U-bolts. Support the damper rod to the fitting with airtight nylon end bushings / bearings. Provide the damper with a self-locking regulator and handle. Provide a 2" sheet metal stand-off to extend the regulator. Flex duct grip area — 2 inches behind retaining bead Flex duct retaining bead —1 inch from end Conical length of at least 3 inches Barrel length of at least 9 inches DUCTWORK 23 3113 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 3 - EXECUTION • 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Use construction methods and requirements as outlined in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards as well as SMACNA Balancing and Adjusting publications, unless indicated otherwise in the specifications. Refer to details on the drawings for additional information. B. Reinforce ducts in accordance with recommended construction practice of SMACNA. Provide additional reinforcement of large plenums as required to prevent excessive flexing and or vibration. C. Cross break or bead sheet metal for rigidity, except ducts that are 12" or less in the longest dimension. D. Where ducts pass through walls in exposed areas, install suitable escutcheons made of sheet metal angles as closers. At locations where ductwork passes through floors, provide watertight sleeves projecting 3" above finished floor and flush with bottom of floor slab. Fabricate sleeves of 1/8" thick steel, galvanized after fabrication. Anchor into adjacent floor slab as required. Sleeves are required inside as well as outside chases. Support ducts where passing through floors with steel structural angles of adequate bearing surface. Structural angles shall be galvanized after fabrication. Do not rest structural angles on top of the sleeve. E. Metal or lined ductwork exposed to view through.grilles, registers, and other openings shall be painted flat black. Do not install grilles, registers, or similar items until painting is complete. is F. Install end bearing at all location where damper shaft penetrates duct wall. G. Clean duct to remove accumulated dust. Ducts shall be closed on ends between phases of fabrication to assure that no foreign material enters the ducts. 3.02 DUCTWORK A. Construct rectangular ducts and round ducts in accordance with the latest SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Use the static pressure specified on the air handling unit schedule or fan schedules as a minimum for duct construction. All ductwork between the variable volume air handling units and the terminal units shall be constructed to the medium pressure ductwork specification. B. Provide adjustable, galvanized splitter-dampers, pivoted at the downstream end with appropriate control device at each supply duct split. C. For branch ducts wider than 18", and when shown on drawings provide extractors with an appropriate control device at each rectangular zone or branch supply duct connection. Provide controllers for extractors. Branch ducts shall have a 450 angle in the direction of flow. Do not provide extractor at branch ducts to sidewall registers where the registers are within 10 feet of the main duct. D. Shop manufactured curved blade scoops may be used for branch duct takeoffs up to 18" wide. Taper scoop blade to the end, to prevent any sagging that may cut into, or damage duct liner if specified during operation. 1. Construct shop manufactured scoops and splitter blades of galvanized sheet • DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2008 23 3113 - 4 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX metal 2 full gauges heavier than equivalent sheet metal gauge of branch duct (up to 16 gauge). 2. Check extractors, scoops and splitter blades thoroughly for freedom of operation. Oil bearing points before installing. E. Use pushrod operator with locking nut and butt hinges assembly. F. Provide opposed -blade volume dampers with an appropriate control device in each of the following locations: 1. Return air ductwork 2. Outside air branch duct 3. Exhaust branch duct 4. Exhaust connections to hoods except kitchen grease hoods or equipment 5. In each zone at multi -zone unit discharge installed downstream of duct mounted re -heat coils 6. At each outside air and return air duct connection to plenum of constant volume units G. Elbows 1. Rectangular: Where square elbows are shown, or are required for good airflow, provide and install single -wall or airfoil turning vanes. Job -fabricated turning vanes, if used, shall be single -thickness vanes of galvanized steel sheets of the same gauge metal as the duct in which they are installed. Furnish vanes fabricated for the same angle as the duct offset. The use of radius elbows with a centerline radius of not less than 1-1/2 times the duct width may be provided in lieu of vaned elbows where space and air flow requirements permit. 2. Round Oval Duct. Provide elbows with a centerline radius of 1-1/2 times the duct diameter or duct width. For round ducts, furnish smooth elbows or 5 piece, 900 elbows and 3 piece, 450 elbows. H. For control devices concealed by ceilings, furring; or in other inaccessible locations, furnish extension rods and appropriate recessed -type Young regulators, mounted on the surface of the ceiling or the furring, unless specified, or shown otherwise. Provide with chrome plated cover plates. Use only one mitered gear set for each control device. I. Install streamline deflectors at any point where dividing a sheet metal duct around piping or where other such obstruction is permitted. Where such obstructions occur in insulated ducts, fill space inside streamliner and around obstructions with glass fiber insulation. J. Duct Supports. 1. Horizontal ducts up to 40". Support horizontal ducts up to and including 40" in their greater dimension by means of #18 U.S. gauge galvanized iron strap hangers attached to the ducts by a minimum of two locations per side by means of screws, rivets or clamps, and fastened to inserts with toggle bolts, beam clamps or other approved means. Place supports on at least 8' centers. Use clamps to fasten hangers to reinforcing on sealed ducts. 2. Horizontal ducts larger than 40". Support horizontal ducts larger than 40" in their greatest dimension by means of hanger rods bolted to angle iron trapeze hangers. Place supports on at least 8' centers in accordance with SMACNA Standards. 3. Support vertical ducts where they pass through the floor lines with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/4" angles for ducts up to 60". Above 60", the angles shall be increased in strength and sized on an individual basis considering space requirements. 4. Supports shall be suspended from structural or by independent support. Do not support from structural bridging. Upper attachments should be selected with a DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2008 23 3113 - 5 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX safety factor of 4 or 5 times actual load conditions and subject to Engineers • approval. Double wrap straps over open web of joist. K. Branch connections for medium pressure ductwork shall be made with a conical lateral. Field installed conical branch ducts shall be minimum 20-gauge galvanized sheet metal, "Everdur" welded and coated with "Galvabar". 3.03 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Where ducts connect to fans or air handling units that are not internally isolated, make flexible airtight connections using "Ventglas" fabric. The fabric shall be fire-resistant, waterproof and mildew resistant with a weight of approximately 30 ounces per square yard. Provide a minimum of 1/2" slack in the connections, and a minimum of 2-1/2" distance between the edges of the ducts. Also, provide a minimum of 1" slack for each inch of static pressure on the fan system. Fasten fabric to apparatus and to adjacent ductwork by means of galvanized flats or draw bands. Where connections are made in outdoor locations, seal fabric to metal with mastic. 3.04 ACCESS DOORS A. Install ductwork access doors in structural angle frames and provide with sash locks and hinges arranged for convenient access. Construct doors that occur in insulated ducts with an insulation filler. Stencil each door for specific use. Install access doors in each of the following locations: 1. Outside Air Dampers 2. Duct Mounted Coils (up -stream) 3. Control Dampers B. Minimum size of access door 12" or 1" smaller than duct. • C. Construct access door air tight, and conform to recommendations of NFPA and SMACNA. D. Demonstrate suitability of access for the intended purpose. Install multiple access doors as required. 3.05 SEALING OF SEAMS AND JOINTS A. Seal supply, return, exhaust and outside air duct systems. 3.06 SCREENS A. Furnish and install screens on all duct, fan, etc., openings furnished by the Contractor that lead to, or are, outdoors; screens shall be No. 16 gauge, one-half inch (1/2") mesh in removable galvanized steel frame. Provide safety screens meeting OSHA requirements for protection of maintenance personnel on all fan inlets and fan outlets to which no ductwork is connected. END OF SECTION 0 DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2008 23 3113 - 6 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 0) SECTION 23 3416 - FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install fans, including centrifugal, axial and propeller types, with supplemental equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical: 1. Ductwork 2. Vibration Isolation 3. Air Balance 4. Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work 1.03 PERFORMANCE A. Provide fan type, arrangement, rotation, capacity, size, motor horsepower, and motor voltage as shown. Fan capacities and characteristics are scheduled on the drawings. Provide fans capable of accommodating static pressure variations of +10% of scheduled design at the design air flow. B. Rate fans according to appropriate Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. (AMCA), approved test codes and procedures. Supply fans with sound ratings below the maximums permitted by AMCA Standards. All fans provided must be licensed to bear the Certified Ratings Seal. C. Statically and dynamically balance all fans. D. Motors shall be sized so that they do not operate within the motor service factor. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit fan performance curves with system operating point plotted on curves. B. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cook B. Greenheck C. Penn Ventilator D. Acme E. Carnes 0) FANS VLK Architects, 2008 23 3416 -1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.02 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Manufacturer's Standard. Apply to fans, motors and accessories, the manufacturer's standard prime coat and finish, except on aluminum surfaces or where special coatings are required. B. Galvanizing. After fabrication of the parts, hot-dip,coat surfaces that require galvanizing. Where galvanizing is specified, a zinc coating may be used. After fabrication, apply the zinc coating and air-dry the coating to 95% pure zinc. Acceptable zinc coatings include Zincilate, Sealube, Amercoat, Diametcoat, or an approved equal. 2.03 SUPPLEMENTAL EQUIPMENT A. Motor Covers. Provide weatherproof motor covers for installations out of doors. Apply the same finish as used on the fan. B. Belt Drives: 1. Unless otherwise specified for belt -driven fans, equip the fan motors with variable pitch sheaves. Select the sheave size for the approximate midpoint of adjustment and to provide not less than 20% speed variation from full open to full closed. Size drives for 150% of rated horsepower. Key the fan sheave to the fan shaft. 2. Nonadjustable motor sheaves may be used for motor sizes over 15 horsepower, at the Contractor's option. However, if changing a nonadjustable sheave becomes necessary to produce the specified capacity, the change must be made at no additional cost. 3. Provide belt guards and apply the same finish as used on the fan. 4. Oil and heat resistant, nonstatic type belts. 5. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty, regreasable, ball type, in a pillow block, cast iron housing, selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum catalog operating speed. C. Safety Disconnect Switch: Provide a factory -wired to motor, safety disconnect switch on each unit. D. Relief Vents and Air Inlets: Provide vents and inlets with aluminum frames and 1/2" mesh, galvanized bird screens. Include dampers where shown. E. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: Furnish prefabricated roof curbs as detailed. The minimum height is 14". Include a resilient pad on each roof curb so the equipment can be mounted on the top flange for proper seal. Coordinate roof slope and curb to ensure equipment is installed in level position. Provide double shell to protect insulation from damage. F. Dampers. Where automatic backdraft damper is scheduled: 1. Multi -bladed. 2. Heavy duty. 3. Roll formed aluminum blades. 4. Nylon bearings. 5. Neoprene weather strip on blade edge. G. Where motorized damper is scheduled: 1. The motor and damper are specified in the Building Management and Control System Specification. FANS VLK Architects, 2008 23 3416 - 2 2737.04 A is Is 0) 0) L2 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX H. All fans are to be provided with a durable, deep etched, .025" thick, factory installed aluminum identification plate with the following information. Plates are to be furnished with four mounting holes. 1. Fan mark as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Serial number 3. Model number 4. Capacity (CFM) and static pressure. 5. Motor HP 6. Motor Amps 7. Manufacturer 8. Motor phase 9. Number of Belts/Make/Size 10. Motor volts 2.04 VENTILATION AND EXHAUST FANS A. Provide the ventilation and exhaust fans shown on the drawings. B. Provide each motor with internal overload protection. C. Provide each belt driven fan with approved, totally enclosed belt guard. D. Provide approved safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. E. Provide duct flanges where required for connections. F. Furnish kitchen hood exhaust fans with vented curb extension that meets NFPA 96, cleanout port, grease tap, curb seal, drain connection and hinge kit. G. Furnish supply fans with 1" aluminum, washable filter section. 2.05 ROOFTOP VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS A. Provide the rooftop ventilation and exhaust systems shown on the drawings. B. Provide each motor with internal overload protection. C. Components: 1. Aluminum, stainless steel or plastic coated bird guard. 2. Screws and fasteners of stainless steel or nonferrous material. 3. All aluminum construction unless indicated otherwise on fan schedule. D. Welded construction, corrosion resistant fasteners, minimum 16 gauge marine allow aluminum. E. Aluminum base shall be continuously welded curb cap corners. VLK Architects, 2008 FANS 233416-3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 3 - EXECUTION • 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fans according to the manufacturer's instructions and in the locations shown on the drawings. B. Do not operate fans or fan powered devices for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated and the fan has been run under observation. C. Roof mounted fans shall be secured to the curb with stainless steel lag screws at a minimum of 6-inches on center. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions if they are more stringent. Install roof mounted equipment in a level position. Units shall be seated on properly sized curb. Gap between base of the fan and top of the curb shall be sealed with neoprene 1" x'14" gasket. Gasket shall be glued or attached with pressure sensitive adhesive. D. Install curbs and equipment in level position. E. Ceiling mounted in -line centrifugal blowers 1. Shall be suspended from structure with 1/2-inch zinc plated all -thread rods secured to structure. 2. Provide sub -structure where required. 3. Mount bottom of fan no more than 18-inches above the finished ceiling height. 3.02 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide two sets of belts for each fan, not including the set installed on the fans. Tag set • to identify fan. END OF SECTION • FANS VLK Architects, 2008 23 3416 - 4 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX •� SECTION 23 3713 - AIR DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install air distribution devices, including grilles, diffusers, registers, dampers, and extractors. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical. 1. Ductwork. 2. Air Balance. 3. Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Work. 1.03 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Coordinate this work with work under Division 26 Electrical, to ensure that intended functions of lighting and air systems are achieved. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for outlets, grilles, registers, control devices, and similar equipment for review prior to placement of purchase order. B. Submittal shall include performance sheet for each air device type. Performance sheet shall include NC levels, throw, and total pressure loss at various air flows. 1.05 FINISHES A. Paint exposed devices with factory standard prime coat, or factory finish coat, as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS - Refer to Drawing Schedule. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Tuttle and Bailey. B. Titus. C. Krueger. D. Metal -Aire. E. Nailor Industries. F. Price AIR DEVICES VLK Architects, 2008 23 3713 -1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Supply Grille Extractors. Provide supply grilles with an air control device capable of positively regulating the volume of air extracted from the supply duct. Select extractors similar to Titus Model AG25, tight -closing in the minimum position. Include a key -operated or worm -gear adjusting mechanism to facilitate positioning from the grille opening. Where adjustment is not accessible at the grille opening, provide a square control rod equipped with a locking quadrant. B. Mounting Frames. Provide each grille or register not equipped with a removable core with a companion, all-purpose mounting frame constructed like grille frame to facilitate installation and removal of the grille or register without marring adjacent mounting surfaces. 01. Furnish frames with 1/2" thick sponge rubber gasket to prevent air leakage. 02. Provide a frame that neatly fits the grille. Mounting frames will not be required for grilles or registers mounted directly on exposed ductwork. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Do not install ceilings adjacent to fixtures until installation of fixtures, air supply assemblies, return -air blank -off strips and flexible duct have been approved. Remove and reinstall any part of the installation found incorrect. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Louvered diffuser outlets mount tight against the ceiling. Fasten outlets to ductwork with sheet metal screws. For perforated diffusers, attach the frame assembly by a concealed hinge assembly to an outer frame compatible with the type of ceiling on which the diffuser is installed. END OF SECTION AIR DEVICES VLK Architects, 2008 23 3713 -2 2737.04 �J • • A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX •� SECTION 23 4100 - AIR FILTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install air filters. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data sheets and capacity information as specified. B. Submit recommended Dirty Filter pressure drop. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR FILTERS A. The filter cells: 1. Disposal media and frame. 2. Coated with high flash point adhesive. B. Resistance to air flow of a clean filter not to exceed 0.12" WG at 300 fpm. 4bC. UL listed Class 11 rated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the filters in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Ll AIR FILTRATION VLK Architects, 2008 23 4100 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS. COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0100 - ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Compile electrical product data and related information appropriate for Owner's operation and maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare electrical operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other sections of specifications. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems. C. Submit 5 copies of complete manual in final form. 1.02 ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Thirty (30) days after receipt of reviewed submittals bearing the Architect / Engineer's stamp of acceptance (including resubmittals), submit for review 1 copy of the first draft of the Electrical Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall contain as a minimum: 1. Table of Contents for each element 2. Contractor information 3. All shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data, bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance. 4. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment 5. Warranties (without starting dates) 6. Certifications that have been completed; submit forms and outlines of certifications that have not been completed • 7. Operating and maintenance procedures. 8. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates) 9. Control operations / equipment wiring diagrams 10. Coordination Drawings 11. Schedule of Lamps 12. Schedule of Ballasts 13. Schedule of Fuses 14. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete. B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections. C. Submit the (5) completed manuals in final form to the Architect / Engineer. 1. Prior to substantial completion for Owner's use after the Owner accepts facility maintenance. 2. Include all specified data, test reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates, along with other materials and information. D. The Architect/Engineer shall review the manuals for completeness within 15 days. E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall be reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The manuals will not be retransmitted. F. Four complete manuals shall be delivered to the Owner. ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0100 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS. COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS is 2.01 BINDERS A. Commercial quality black, 3-ring binders with clear, durable, cleanable plastic covers. B. Minimum ring size: 1 ". Maximum ring size: 3". C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings. D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Form for Manuals: 1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. 2. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11" b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten. 3. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text. b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 4. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance Instructions". List: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structures as applicable C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 6. Binder as specified B. Content of Manual: 1. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic order as outlined in the specifications. a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. C. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of: 1) Subcontractor or installer 2) Maintenance contractor as appropriate 3) Identify area of responsibility of each. 4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement d. Identify each product -by-product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to: 1) Identify specific product or part installed. 2) Identify data applicable to installation. 3) Delete references to inapplicable information. • ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0100 - 2 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS. COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX • 3. Drawings: a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate: 1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems 2) Control and flow diagrams b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. C. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. 4. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving: 1) Proper procedures in event of failure 2) Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds 6. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified. C. Sections for Equipment and Systems 1. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate: a. Description of unit and component parts: 1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b. Operating procedures: 1) Start up, break-in, routine / normal operating instructions 2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency instructions 3) Summer and winter operating instructions 4) Special operating instructions C. Maintenance procedures: 1) Routine operations 2) Guide to trouble -shooting 3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly 4) Alignment, adjusting and checking 5) Routine service based on operating hours d. Servicing and lubrication schedule 1) List of lubricants required e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. Copies of typed circuit directories of panel board to reflect actual room graphics numbers and room names (not architectural room numbers from the drawings). 1) Electrical 2) Controls 3) Communications g. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. 1) Predicted life of part subject to wear 2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts h. Schedule of fuses i. Complete equipment field accessible internal wiring diagrams • j. Schedule of lamps k. Schedule of ballasts ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0100 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS. COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX I. Each Contractor's coordination drawings 1) As installed color coded piping diagrams. • M. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage n. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications 2. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. 3. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in respective sections of specifications 4. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 26. 5. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section. 6. Provide start up reports as specified in each related section. 7. Provide signed receipts for spare parts and material. 8. Provide training report and certificates. END OF SECTION U ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0100 - 4 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0500 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, applicable provisions of Division 1 General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 26 Electrical. B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 26, Electrical. 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS, AND FEES A. Perform work in accordance with applicable statutes, ordinances, codes and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. B. Electrical work shall comply with applicable inspection services: 1. Underwriters Laboratories. 2. National Fire Protection Association. 3. State Health Department. 4. Local Municipal Building Inspection Department adopted codes with amendments. 5. National Electrical Code with local amendments. 6. State Regulatory Agencies 7. Where the project is located outside a municipal jurisdiction, and has no municipal inspection services, the National Electrical Code with amendments of the municipality with extraterritorial jurisdiction shall govern. 8. Where the project is located outside any municipal jurisdiction, including extraterritorial jurisdictions, the National Electrical Code with local adopted amendments of the largest municipality located in the same county or parish shall govern. 9. International Energy Conservation Code C. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. D. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations. E. Obtain all permits required. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be: 1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, and skill, and the organization to provide a practical working system. 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years. 1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. Materials which are specified by reference to Federal Specifications; ASTM, ASME, ANSI, or AW WA Specifications; Federal Standards; or other standard specifications must comply with • latest editions, revisions, amendments or supplements in effect on date proposals are ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0500 -1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX received. Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for all • equipment, material and work. In instances where specified capacities, size or other features of equipment, devices or materials exceed these minimums, meet specified capacities. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements. B. Every effort has been made by the Engineer to indicate wiring of all receptacles, light fixtures, switches, telephone outlets, HVAC equipment, kitchen equipment, elevator equipment, and all other devices / appliances requiring electrical power. It is the intent of the Engineer that all light fixtures be powered and controlled unless specifically noted on the plans; that all wiring devices (receptacles and direct connected equipment) be circuited to a power source of the correct voltage, unless specifically noted on the drawings; and that all HVAC, kitchen and elevator equipment be properly wired to the correct voltage power source; that all communications and security systems devices and equipment and all fire alarm system devices and equipment are installed, wired and systems are fully operational. C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to review the architectural drawings (reflected ceiling plans) for light fixtures, casework elevation details for electrical devices which are not indicated on the electrical drawings; to review the mechanical and plumbing documents and kitchen equipment drawings to determine the electrical rough -ins for all equipment requiring power connections, and to include in their proposals the correct and complete electrical rough -ins for all of these items which were inadvertently not indicated on the electrical drawings, OR the Contractor shall specifically enumerate each item requiring electrical rough - in which is not specifically shown on the electrical drawings, and indicate the electrical provisions of these items as specifically excluded from his proposal. • D. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to compare the scale of all electrical drawings with the scale of the architectural drawings and make adjustments to all electrical drawings which have the incorrect drawing scale so that his material takeoffs are not in error due to an incorrectly labeled drawing scale and his proposal is complete. E. No proposal shall be accepted which specifically excludes any of the provisions of paragraphs B, C, or D above. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual construction is significantly at variance with the contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various major and minor feeders, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Record underground and underslab service and feeders installed, dimensioning exact location and elevation of such installations. B. At conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, electronic AutoCAD CAD files of the original drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Provide the following as -built documents including all contract drawings regardless of whether corrections were necessary and include in the transmittal: "2 sets of CDs and prints for Owner's use, one set of CDs, prints, and mylars for Architect / Engineers Records". Delivery of these as -built electronic, reproducible and prints is a condition of final acceptance. 1. 3 sets of electronic AutoCAD (2004 dwg) CAD drawing files, on CD-ROM media, of • each contract as -built drawing. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0500 - 2 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2. One reproducible Dayrex mylar film positive of each contract as -built drawing. • 3. Three sets of blue -line prints of each contract as -built drawing. C. As -Built Drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum: 1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents. 2. Remove Engineer's Seal, name, address, and logo from drawings. 3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. 4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY: 5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of all conduit, etc that were deviated from construction drawings. 6. Indicate exact location of all underground electrical raceways, and elevations. 7. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer. 8. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of Drawings and specifications upon which all locations of equipment, devices, and all deviations and changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded. 9. Exact location of all electrical equipment in building. Label panel schedules to indicate actual location. 10. Exact location of all electrical equipment in and outside of the building. 11. Exact location of all outdoor lighting poles and equipment. 12. Location, size and routing of all feeder conduits, equipment, etc. shall be accurately and neatly shown to dimension. 13. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations. 14. Cloud all changes. 15. Update all panel schedules with all additional circuits added or deleted through construction. Identify each circuit to include all information specified for directory cards for circuit identification in panelboards. 1.07 SPACE REQUIREMENTS A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this respect. 1.08 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. Extend electrical services and final connections to all items requiring same. B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents. C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them. D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in sufficient time to prevent delay in the work. E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to equipment furnished under other Division. Determine from the General Contractor / Construction Manager for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect / Engineer, the exact location of all items. The construction trades involved shall furnish all roughing -in drawings and wiring diagrams required for proper installation of the electrical • ) work. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0500 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. Make final electrical connections to all electrically operated equipment indicated on is drawings, except as noted. 2. The responsibility for alignment of motor and driven equipment is specified in the related division. F. Request all Shop Drawings required in ample time to permit proper installation of all electrical provisions. G. Extend services as indicated to the various items of equipment furnished by others. Rough -in for the various items and make final connections ready for operation upon placing of the equipment. 1.09 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK A. When the word "concealed" is defined as hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings. "Exposed" is defined as open to view, in plain sight. 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee work for 1 year from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be provided. 1.11 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type • or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer. 1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of work, and judged objectionable by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, rectify such conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. If the item of equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart. 1.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 26 are used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit competition. Equipment of similar design, materials, energy efficiency characteristics (where applicable) and lighting performance characteristics (where applicable) equal to that specified, manufactured by a named manufacturer shall be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before proposal due date. Submit a marked -up set of the relevant specification section indicating all variances, a comparison to the specified product, and of construction and performance criteria, complete design and performance data for the specified product and the proposed substitution for comparison to the Engineer. The Architect issues approvals of acceptable manufacturers as addenda to the Construction Proposal Documents. 1.14 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work: • ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0500 - 4 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. Obtained from utility maps and other substantially reliable sources. • 2. Are offered separate from the Contract Documents as a general guide only without guarantees to accuracy. B. Examine the site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities and of their relation to the work. Existing utilities indicated on the site plans are for reference only and shall be field verified by the Contractor with the respective public or private utility. 1.15 OPERATING TESTS •) A. After all electrical systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect / Engineer and Owner. Provide minimum 24-hour advance notice of scheduling of all tests. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. 1.16 WARRANTIES A. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 1.17 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. It shall be the responsibility of the sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and Engineering drawings, details and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself as to the construction and all job related requirements. All construction trades shall cooperate with the General Contractor / Construction Manager job site superintendent and lay out work so that all piping and other items are placed in the walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so that there shall be no delay in the job. 1.18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. General: Refer to Division 1 for general requirements on temporary facilities. B. Temporary Wiring: Temporary power and lighting for construction purposes shall be provided under this Division. Installation of temporary power shall be in accordance with NEC Article 527. C. Temporary facilities, wire, lights and devices are the property of this Contractor and shall be removed by this Contractor at the completion of the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Identification of Equipment: 1. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent data. Take care not to obliterate this nameplate. The legend on all nameplates or tags shall correspond to the identification shown on the Operating Instructions. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0500 - 5 2737.04 2. 4. 5. VLK Architects, 2008 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX A black -white -black (red -white -red for emergency circuits) 3 layer laminated plastic • engraved identifying nameplate shall be permanently secured to each switchboard, distribution panel, motor control center, transformer, panelboard, safety disconnect switch, enclosed circuit breaker, wireway, busduct plug, terminal cabinet, TVSS protection device, capacitor, individual motor controller, contactor, fire alarm panels (main and remote booster), and communications (voice, data, video) cabinet or rack with stainless steel screws. a. Identifying nameplates shall have 1/2-inch high, engraved letters for equipment designation and %-inch letters indicating source circuit designation, (ie: "PANEL HA —served from MDP-6 located in Mech. Rm. 100"). b. Each switchboard, distribution panel, and motor control center branch circuit device shall have a nameplate showing the load and location of load served in %-inch high, engraved letters. C. Each section of multiple section panelboards shall also indicate panelboard section number (ie: Panel "HA -Section 2 — served from MDP-6 located in Mech. Rm. 100") d. Enclosed switches, starters, circuit breakers and contactors: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter and contactor enclosure door identifying motor or load served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage / phase rating. Provide Phenolic nameplate on cover exterior to indicate motor or load served, location of load served, panel(s) and circuit(s) serving load(s), description and location of control controlling contactor (i.e.: contactor controlled by switch in Room A107.), and panel and circuit feeding line side of control transformer. Example of label for lighting / receptacle contactor: Lighting Contactor Panel HA 2,4,6 Control circuit — Panel HA 2,4 • Location — West parking Lot Pole Lights Switched - BMCS Cardholders and directory cards shall be furnished for circuit identification in panelboards. Cardholder shall be located on inside of panel door and shall be in a metal frame with clear plastic front. Circuit lists shall be typewritten. Circuit descriptions shall include explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker, including final graphics room number or name designation and name of each item served. If no building appointed room number or name is given, list locations per the following examples — A. Storage in Rm 100 — B. Office in Rm 100 — C. Storage west of Rm. 100. List corridors as "corridors". Identify circuits controlled by contactors using a separate notation for each contactor used. List notation at bottom of schedule stating the circuits are controlled by a contactor, list exact location of contactor, and how switched. Do not use architectural room number designation shown on plans. Obtain final graphics room number identification from Architect's final room number graphics plan. All locations served by breakers shall be_ listed on schedule. Panel schedule shall be large enough to contain all information required. Permanent, waterproof, black markers shall be used to identify each lighting and power grid junction box, gutter and wireway. Clearly indicate the panel and branch circuit numbers available at that junction box, gutter or wireway. Where low voltage relay panels are used for lighting control, identify the low voltage relay panel and number in addition to the branch circuit panel and number. Pull Boxes, Transformers, Disconnect Switches, etc.: Field work each with a name plate showing identity, voltage and phase and identifying equipment connected to it. The transformer rating shall be shown on the panels or enclosures. For an enclosure containing a motor starter, the nameplate shall include the Owner's motor number, motor voltage, number of motor phases, motor load being serviced, motor • ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0500 - 6 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX horsepower, and motor full load current. Nameplates shall also indicate where panel is fed from. B. Prohibited Markings: Markings intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source from whom the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation in public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also prohibited are materials or devices that bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters Laboratories), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement. C. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with access to or operation of electrical facilities. Provide text of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with industry standards for color and design. D. Wire and Cable Markers: Provide vinyl cloth markers with split sleeve or tubing type, except in manholes provide stainless steel with plastic ties. E. Wire and Cable Labeling: Provide wire markers on each conductor in all boxes, pull boxes, gutters, wireways, contactors, and motor controllers and load connection. Identify with panelboard / switchboard branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. F. Underground Warning Tape: Thomas and Betts or approved equal. Six-inch wide plastic tape, colored red or orange with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines; telephone lines and data lines. All underground electrical conduits shall be so identified. Tape shall be buried at a depth of 6-inches below grade and directly above conduits or ductbanks. Provide magnetic marking tape below all underground electrical conduits. 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as authorized by the Architect / Engineer, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted. 3.03 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to substantial completion, conduct an on -site training program to instruct Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the electrical systems. 1. Provide the training during regular working day. 2. The Instructors shall be experienced in their phase of operation and maintenance of the electrical systems and with the project. B. Time to be allocated for instructions. 1. Minimum of 20 hours dedicated instructor time 2. 4 hours on each of 5 days 3. Additional instruction time for specific systems as specified in other Sections. C. Before on -site training, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; for review and approval, minimum 48 hours prior to proposed training time and date. 1. One copy to the Owner 2. One copy to the Architect / Engineer •� D. The Owner shall provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and shall coordinate their attendance at the agreed upon times. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0500 - 7 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Use operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review manual with • personnel in detail. Explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment. G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system). H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions. I. Submit a report within one week after completion of training. List time and date of each demonstration, hours devoted to the demonstration, and a list of people present, with their respective signatures. J. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the Owner sign a certificate to certify that he / she has a proper understanding of the system, that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are satisfactory. K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each Operating and Maintenance Manual. 3.04 OPENINGS A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for boxes, equipment or conduits are specified under • other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are included under this division. 3.05 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide concrete equipment housekeeping pads under all floor and outdoor mounted electrical equipment. B. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Division 3, or as indicated or noted. C. Concrete pads: 1. 6-inches thick minimum indoors; 8-inches thick minimum outdoors, or as indicated on the drawings or in other sections of the specifications. 2. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms. 3. Smooth steel trowel finish. 4. Extend 3-inches minimum indoors beyond perimeter of equipment unless otherwise shown. 5. 6-inch x 6-inch #8 wire reinforcement mesh. 3.06 OBSTRUCTIONS A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions, which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information. 1. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all is information has been provided. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0500 - 8 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX • 2. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction, whether or not such existing facilities are shown. 3.07 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES A. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner 2 suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used, and 25 percent spare fasteners. B. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and . in original manufacturer's condition. B. Do not deliver equipment to this project site until progress of construction has reached the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather shall be rejected, and the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.09 COORDINATION OF BRANCH CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT AND PROTECTION DEVICES A. Review with equipment specified which requires electrical connections. Review equipment shop drawings and manufacturer's nameplate data and coordinate exact branch circuit overcurrent protective device and conductors with equipment provided. 1. Provide equipment manufacturer's recommended overcurrent protective device indicated on nameplate at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. If branch circuit conductors and / or conduit sizing is less than the minimum required by equipment manufacturer, notify the Architect / Engineer immediately, prior to rough -in. 3. If equipment manufacturer is a substitution to the specified equipment manufacturer, provide the greater of the conductors specified or those required for the installed equipment manufacturer's minimum circuit conductors, at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. If conductors indicated on plans are in excess of that permitted by equipment manufacturer, notify Architect / Engineer immediately, prior to rough -in. 5. If conductors indicated on plans are in excess of that permitted by the equipment manufacturer, provide the maximum conductors permitted by the equipment manufacturer based on NEC ampacity tables, either in a single set, or as a set of parallel conductors as permitted by the NEC. Conductor size and quantity entering the equipment enclosures shall not exceed the equipment manufacturer's maximum recommendations. 3.10 OVERCURRENT DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. Contractor shall provide a coordination study and fault current analysis report, conducted and prepared by the switchgear manufacturer. The coordination study and fault current analysis • shall include the manufacturer's recommendations for all adjustable overcurrent devices specified or provided. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0500 - 9 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Contractor shall adjust all overcurrent device settings based on manufacturer's isrecommendations, or as directed by Owner / Architect at no additional cost to Owner. C. Submittals: Submit four copies of certified coordination study results to the Architect for review. 3.11 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: % inch, fire retardant, exterior grade plywood, painted gray, both sides. 1. Provide minimum of two 4-ft. by 8-ft. sheets of plywood for each new telephone terminal location. 2. Provide minimum of two 4-ft. by 44 sheets of plywood for each new data / voice / video / communications equipment location / cable TV head end equipment, or security equipment location. 3.12 TESTING A. The contractors for the various sub -systems shall submit proposed testing procedures for their systems, subject to review and approval and Owner acceptance. The contract will not be declared to be substantially complete until the functional operation of the subsystems have been demonstrated and verified and reports have been provided, reviewed and accepted. B. The project will not be declared substantially complete until the following has taken place. 1. The "As -Built" drawings have been submitted, reviewed and accepted by the Architect / Owner / Owner's Construction Representative. • 2. The various systems have been commissioned and accepted to include the following: a. Building Emergency Lighting System 3.13 LOAD BALANCING A. Balance load on all phases in each panel to within 10% of respective phase loads. END OF SECTION • ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0500 -10 2737.04 10) 0 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION,TX SECTION 26 0510 - CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and demonstrations. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract documents. 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be suspended from structural bridging. D. Provide finishes to match approved samples; all exposed finishes shall be approved by the Architect / Engineer. Submit color samples as required. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect / Engineer before proceeding. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide manufacturer's qualified personnel to observe: 1. Field conditions 2. Condition of installation 3. Quality of workmanship 4. Start-up of equipment 5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment B. Manufacturer's qualified personnel shall make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect / Engineer. CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2008 26 0510 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION,TX 1.07 MOCK UPS A. Assemble and erect the specified equipment and products complete, with specified • anchorage and support devices, seals and finishes. B. Do not proceed with any work involving a mock-up, until the related mock up has been approved in writing. C. Acceptable mock-ups in place shall be retained in the completed work. D. Perform tests and submit results as specified. 1.08 SCHEDULING OF MOCK-UPS A. Schedule demonstration and observation of mock-ups, in phases, with Architect / Engineer. 1. Rough -in 2. Finish with all appurtenances in place 3. Demonstrations PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL A. Comply with recognized National rating and approval agencies as well as all codes and ordinances at the federal, state and city levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ADJUSTMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS A. Contractor shall provide all adjustments and modifications as requested by the manufacturer's qualified personnel at no additional cost to Owner. B. Coordination Drawings: 1. Electrical room size and location required and to scale 2. Equipment and accessories, switchgear and piping 3. Indicate clearances and service access. 3.02 CITY INSPECTIONS A. Contractor shall notify design prime consultant and associated Architect / Owner's Construction Manager when he requests an inspection by the City Inspector. 3.03 MOCK-UPS A. Mock up the light fixture fireproofing for each type of light fixture to be located in fire rated ceilings. Demonstrate that the fire proofing material does not interfere with the mechanical operation of light fixture doors, hinges, or latches. B. Mock up a typical classroom and computer lab with all wiring devices, cover plates, rough -in boxes, conduits, etc. Provide all conductors from all wiring devices to above ceiling space to demonstrate conduit routing and conductor fill. END OF SECTION • CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2008 26 0510 - 2 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX • SECTION 26 0519 - CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS — 600 VOLT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide electrical conductors, wire and connector work as shown, and specified. B. Types: The types of conductors and connectors required for the project include the following: 1. 600V building conductors 2. 600V building conductor connectors C. Application: The applications for conductors and connectors required on the project are as follows: 1. Power distribution circuitry 2. Lighting branch circuitry 3. Appliance, receptacle, and equipment branch circuitry 4. Motor branch circuitry 5. Control wiring 6. Line voltage D. Refer to other specific specification sections for voice, video, data, alarm and instrumentation cables. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Label: Conductors and connectors shall be UL labeled. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Refer to other specific specification sections regarding specialized wiring and connections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Essex B. General Cable C. Southwire D, American Wire and Cable E. Polywater 2.02 CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS: A. General: Except as indicated, provide conductors and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as instructed by the manufacturer, and as required for the installation. B. Conductors: Provide factory -fabricated conductors of the size, rating, material, and type as indicated for each use. Conductors shall be soft or annealed copper wires meeting, before stranding, the requirements of ASTM B 3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes, latest edition. CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0519 -1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. Conductors for control wiring sized #14 AWG through #10 AWG shall be stranded. 2. Conductors for power and lighting shall be stranded. Stranding shall be Class B meeting the requirements of ASTM B 8, Standard Specification for Concentric -Lay - Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, or Soft. C. Insulation: Insulation shall meet or exceed the requirements of UL 83, Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Wires. 1. Insulation for conductors shall be UL Type THHN/THWN, 75 degrees C. 2. All wiring inside lighting fixtures shall be temperature rated per NEC. D. Cable Lubricant: Fire resistant, nonflammable, water based, Polywater type J or 3M type WL/WLC/ WLX. 2.03 COLOR CODES FOR CONDUCTORS FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS A. Provide color coding for conductors as required by NEC 210.5. Color coding for phase and voltage shall be as required by local codes and standards. Where such standards do not exist, color coding shall be as follows: Color Code a e' ize (} , Simailer- Use2C�nbr'uo Color CQded''k=font}uiius lire Sues 6$anrdj, ma ier: Use b G crtor Coded Table ;insuiaiion,(Nttitet)2}�:" g 'A s'r. 13rk �u ' V_ A Y'Y ^Y YV :G- 120/208'Black Red Blue White Green Green/Yellow 3 Ph- Stripe 120/240 Black Orange Blue White Green Green/Yellow 3 Ph w/color Stripe stripe 120/240 Black N/A Blue 1 Ph (Note 03) 277/480 Brown Purple Yellow White Green Green/Yellow Note 05 Stripe v w.i av vv1V1 VVVC 1 du1C. 1. Phase and Neutral Wire size #8 and larger, black conductors with color marking tape at each termination and where accessible; colors as noted above. 2. Ground Wire sizes #4 and larger, black conductor with green marking tape at each termination and where accessible. 3. Neutral Conductor: Provide three continuous white stripe on other than green insulation when 120/208V system is not present at this installation. 4. Switched legs of phase conductors for lighting and appliance branch circuits shall be of the same color as described above throughout the entire circuit. 5. Neutral Conductor 277V: Provide gray conductor insulation to identify 277 volt system neutral from 120 volt system neutral where each system shares a conduit, raceway, junction box, pull box or cabinet. 6. The use of phasing tape is not allowed for conductor color identification for conductor size #10 and smaller. 7. Conductors shall be the same color from breaker to device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install electrical conductors and connectors as shown, in accordance with the CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0519 - 2 2737.04 • A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX • manufacturer's written instructions, the requirements of NEC, the NECA Standard of Installation, and industry practices. B. Coordination: Coordinate conductor installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for interface. C. Conductors: 1. Pull conductors together when more than one is being installed in a raceway. Whenever possible, pull conductors into their respective conduits by hand. Use pulling lubricant when necessary. 2. Before any conductor is pulled into any conduit, thoroughly swab the conduit to remove foreign material and to permit the wire to be pulled into a clean, dry conduit. 3. Run feeders their entire length in continuous section without joints or splices. 4. No wire smaller than #12 AWG shall be permitted for any lighting or power circuit. No wire smaller than #14 AWG shall be used for any control circuit, unless shown otherwise. 5. For 15 and 20 amp branch circuits operating at 150V or less, provide #10 AWG wire when the first outlet is over 75-feet from the panelboard. For branch circuits operating at 150 to 600 volts, provide #10 AWG wire when the first outlet is over 150-feet from the panelboard. 6. All neutrals installed in 120/208 volt circuits shall be size #10 AWG. Up to three 120- Volt circuits of different phases may share a common neutral unless noted otherwise. Up to three 277 Volt circuits of different phases may share a common neutral, unless noted otherwise. Neutral conductors for non -linear loads shall be considered a current carrying conductor as required by the NEC. 7. Branch circuit voltage drop shall not exceed 3% of rated voltage. 8. No tap or splice shall be made in any conductor except in outlet boxes, pull boxes, junction boxes, splice boxes, or other accessible locations. Make taps and splices using an approved compression connector. Insulate taps and splices equal to the adjoining conductor. Make splices or taps only on conductors that are a component part of a single circuit, protected by approved methods. Taps or splices in feed through branch circuits for connection to light switches or receptacles shall be made by pigtail connection to the device. 9. Support conductors in vertical raceways, as required by the NEC. 10. Do not permit conductors entering or leaving a junction or pull box to deflect to create pressure on the conductor insulation. 11. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide. These shall consist of one through circuit to which the branch from the circuit shall be spliced. 12. Make connections in conductors up to a maximum of one #6 AWG wire with two #8 AWG wires using twist -on pressure connectors of required size. 13. Make connections in conductors or combinations of conductors larger than specified using cable fittings of type and size required for specific duty. 14. After a splice is made, insulate entire assemblywith UL-approved insulating tape to a value equivalent to the adjacent insulation. 15. Make splices and connections in control circuit conductors using UL-approved solderless crimp connectors. 16. Make grounding connections using ground clamps, connectors, or exothermic welds of a suitable type UL-approved for the duty. 17. All conduits shall be installed with an insulated ground conductor. The ground conductor shall be identified with green colored insulation for wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller. Ground conductors size No. 8 AWG and larger shall be identified as required by the NEC. All 120V circuits shall have dedicated neutral, common neutral conductors for 120V phase conductors are prohibited. All 277V circuits may share a common neutral unless noted or required otherwise. Neutral conductors for non- linear loads shall be considered a current carrying conductor as required by NEC. 18. No more than six current carrying conductors shall be installed in a single raceway. CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0519 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX When four, five, or six current carrying conductors are installed in a single raceway, • their current carrying ampacities shall be derated as required by the NEC for non - diversified loads. Minimum wire size shall be #10 AWG. The installed wire size shall have a nominal ampacity rating of 125% of that required or specified when four or more current carrying conductors are installed in a single raceway. Neutral conductors shall be considered a current carrying conductor in all non -linear loaded circuits as required by the NEC. Maximum number of current carrying conductors in any conduit shall not exceed eight. 19. When more than three (3) phase conductors are size #10 AWG, they shall be installed in a one -inch conduit. 20. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. 21. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 22. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 23. Provide stranded conductors connected with mechanical type copper connecting dugs correctly sized to the diameter of the bare conductors. Run mains and feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without splices or joints. Provide the same size wire form the panelboard to last outlet on circuit. Color code conductors. 24. Do not install a pull string in conduits containing conductors. 25. Conductors shall be the same color from load side of overcurrent protection device to outlet or utilization equipment. 26. Spare conductors shall not be installed in any conduit, gutter, raceway, panel or enclosure unless noted otherwise. D. Identification: Label each phase conductor in each junction box with corresponding circuit number, using self-adhesive wire markers. 3.02 TESTING: • A. Pre-Energization Check: Before energizing, check cable and conductors for circuit continuity and short circuits. Correct malfunctions. B. Service Entrance and Feeder Insulation Resistance Test: Each main service entrance conductor and each feeder conductor shall have its insulation resistance tested after the installation is complete except for connection at its source and point of termination. 1. Make tests using a Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument at a voltage of not less than 1000 VDC. Measure resistance from conductor to conductor, conductor to neutral (if present) and from conductor to ground. Insulation resistance shall not be less than the following: Wire Size Insulation AWG Resistance (Ohms) #8 250 K #6 through #2 100 K #1 through #4/0 50 K Larger than #410 25 K 2. Conductors that do not meet or exceed the insulation resistance values listed above shall be removed, replaced, and retested. C. Submittals: Contractor shall furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit 4 copies of certified test results to Architect for review. Test reports shall include conductor tested, date and time of test, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions. D. Voltage and Current Values: The voltage and current in each conductor shall be measured and recorded after connections have been made and the conductor is under load. • CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0519 - 4 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX • DC HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE TEST REPORT (Specification Paragraph 3.2, C) Date 404) 04A Contract and Work Location: _ Contract (Project) No.: _ Circuit Identification: _ (Dwg., Title, Number and Ckt. Number) Test Equipment: (Make, Model, Serial No., Etc.) Applied Test Voltage Normal Oper. Voltage Cable Installation: New Used (Date) (No. Years) Cable Size AWG Cable Length Ft. Temperature Humidity_ TEST DATA - RESISTANCE IN KILO OHMS K-OHMS 0 0 z O U A-N B-N C-N A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C A-C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END OF SECTION CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0519 - 5 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS SECTION 26 0533 - CONDUIT SYSTEMS 01) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install a complete system of electrical conduits and fittings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Electrical Code. B. Local codes and ordinances. C. UL. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Raceways 1. Allied, Triangle, Carlon, Wheatland, Can -Tex, Perma-cote, Certain -Teed, Anamet, Inc., Electri-Flex Co. B. Fittings 1. Appleton, Crouse Hinds, Steel City, O.Z. Gedney, Carlon, Raco, Inc. 2.02 GENERAL A. The minimum conduit size shall be'/ -inch. B. The minimum conduit size for Technology/Voice/Data/Video shall be 1-1/4 inch. C. The minimum conduit size for flexible metallic conduit for tap connections to light fixtures shall be inch. D. Electrical nonmetallic tubing, flexible polyethylene or PVC tubing shall not be used on this project. E. BX and AC cable shall not be used on this project. F. PVC elbows and fittings, except for threaded/slip-on/glue or straight conduit slip-on / glue fittings, shall not be used on this project. G. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall not be used on this project. 2.03 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT A. UL labeled, Schedule 40. 1. Mild steel pipe. 2. Zinc coated inside and out. 3. Threaded ends 4. Insulated bushings I 0) VLK Architects, 2008 CONDUIT SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS B. Fittings shall meet the same requirements as rigid steel conduits. • 1. UL labeled. 2. Threaded fittings 2.04 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. UL labeled, standard weight. 1. Cold rolled steel tubing. 2. Zinc coated inside and out. B. Fittings shall meet the same requirements as EMT conduits. 1. UL labeled 2. Set Screw Fittings 3. Steel fittings with setscrews with lock nuts on threaded ends, no snap locks. 4. Cast metal fittings are not approved. 5. Uni-couple type connectors are not approved. 6. Split ring, anti -short bushings are not approved. 7. Insulated throat connectors 2.05 PVC COATED RIGID STEEL WITH URETHANE INTERIOR COATING A. UL labeled, Schedule 40 zinc coated with 40 mil thick PVC exterior coating, 2 mil thick urethane interior and thread coating, threaded ends. B. Threaded fittings shall meet the same requirements as rigid steel conduits, with PVC exterior coating, urethane interior coating and UL label. C. Insulated bushings D. Touch-up compounds for interior urethane and exterior. E. Manufacturer: Perma-cote 2.06 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT A. Steel flexible metallic conduit. 1. Zinc coated inside and out. 2. 18-inches minimum length, 36-inches maximum length B. Steel flexible metallic conduit for tap connections to light fixtures: 1. 18 inches minimum length, 6 feet maximum length. C. Liquid tight flexible steel conduit. 1. Type L.A. - Grounded - UL Approved. 2. 18-inches minimum length, 24-inches maximum length 2.07 PVC CONDUIT A. UL labeled Schedule 40 B. PVC fittings and solvent welded joints. C. Acceptable PVC condulet manufacturer: Cantex • CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0533 - 2 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS • 2.08 CONDULETS AND CONDUIT BODIES A. UL Labeled B. Approved Manufacturer 1. Appleton 2.09 ROOF MOUNTED CONDUIT AND BOX SUPPORTS A. Conduit supports and pads suitable for direct sunlight, conduit size, weight, quantity and roof system with unistrut supports and accessories. Conduit supports shall allow for conduit expansion and contraction.. B. Approved Manufacturer: 1. Portable Pipe Hangers 2. Cooper B-Line C-Port 3. Miro Industries Models 2.5, 2.5-5, 2.5-AH, 12-AH, 16-AH 2.10 ALUMINUM CONDUIT A. UL Labeled B. Fittings shall meet the same requirements of aluminum conduits 1. UL Labeled PART 3 -EXECUTION ,� 3.01 INSTALLATION •) A. Install electrical conduits and fittings for all wiring of any type unless specifically specified or instructed to do otherwise. Install conduits and fittings in accordance with local codes and applicable sections of the NECA "Standard of Installation", concealed where possible. 1. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces. 2. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. 3. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. 4. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. 5. Arrange conduit to maintain head room and present neat appearance. 6. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. 7. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. 8. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. 9. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sides and tops of electrical equipment, device, box, gutter, wireway, disconnect, etc. in damp and wet locations. 10. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. 11. Ground and bond conduit as required. 12. Identify conduit as required. 13. Route all conduits perpendicular or parallel to building lines. 14. Do not use no -thread couplings and connectors for galvanized steel, PVC coated galvanized steel, or aluminum rigid conduit. CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0533 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS B. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; • provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. C. In areas where raceway systems are exposed and acoustical or thermal insulating material is to be installed on walls, partitions, and ceilings, raceways shall be blocked out proper distance to allow insulating material to pass without cutting or fitting. Also provide Kindorf galvanized steel channels to serve as standoffs for panels, cabinets and gutters. D. Securely fasten conduits, supports and boxes, to ceiling, walls, with Rawl Plugs or approved equal anchors. Use lead cinch anchors or pressed anchors. Use only cadmium plated or galvanized bolts, screws. Plastic anchors and lead anchors shall not be used for overhead applications. E. Provide separate raceway systems for each of the following when specified, indicated or required: 1. 120/208 volt circuits 2. 277/480 volt circuits 3. Emergency a. Life safety branch b. Critical branch C. Equipment branch 4. Voice/Data 5. Sound reinforcement / Theatrical and Architectural Dimming Controls 6. MATV/CATV 7. Security CCTV 8. Security System 9. Communications / PA Systems / Sound System Line Input and Speakers 10. Fire Alarm F. Unless shown otherwise, do not install conduit in or below concrete slabs. G. Unless shown otherwise, do not install conduit horizontally in concrete slabs. H. Roof penetrations shall be made in adequate time to allow the roofing installer to make proper flashing. Conduit for equipment mounted on roof curbs shall be routed through the roof curb. Conduit, gutters, pull boxes, junction boxes, etc. shall not be routed on roof unless specified otherwise. Where specifically indicated to be routed or mounted on the roof, supports shall be as specified, as recommended by roofing manufacturer and roof support manufacturer and as required by NEC. Place supports every five feet along conduit run and within 3 feet of all bends, condulets, and junction boxes. Provide roofing pad under stands at directed by Architect and as recommended by roofing manufacturer and roof support manufacturer. Provide additional unistrut supports and accessories as required. PVC coated conduit shall have all nicks and cuts to the protective coating repaired using manufacturer's approved touch-up material as recommended by manufacturer. Provide a minimum two -wraps of 3M-50 type over touch-up. J. Conduit terminations at switchgear, pull boxes, outlet boxes, stub -up, and stub -outs, or where wire size is #4 or larger: 1. Provide insulated throat connectors for EMT conduits. 2. Provide insulated bushing on all rigid conduit terminations. 3. Provide locknuts inside and outside of all boxes and enclosures. 40 CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0533 - 4 2737.04 •) A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS 4. Provide threaded type plastic bushing at all boxes and enclosures K. In suspended ceilings, support conduit runs from the structure, not the ceiling system construction. 1. Do not support from structural bridging. 2. Do not support from metal roof deck. L. Completely install each conduit run prior to pulling conductors. All boxes are to be accessible after completion of construction. M. All conduits must be kept dry and free of water or debris with approved pipe plugs or caps. Cap or plug conduit ends prior to concrete pours. N. Ream ends of conduits after cutting and application of cutting die to remove rough edges. O. Hold horizontal and vertical conduits as close as possible to walls, ceilings and other elements of the building construction. P. Install all conduits perpendicular or parallel to building lines in the most direct, neat and workmanlike manner. 1. Install conduits to conserve building space and not obstruct equipment service space or interfere with use of space. Conduit shall not be routed on floors, paved areas or grade. 2. Where a piece of equipment is wired from a switch or box on adjacent wall, the wiring shall go up the wall from the box, across at or near the ceiling, and back down to the equipment. Wiring shall not block the walkway between wall and •j equipment. 3. Horizontal runs of conduit on exposed walls shall be kept to a minimum. 4. Conduit for mechanical/plumbing equipment installed outdoors shall be routed with the associated mechanical/plumbing pipe support rack system where practical, coordinate with Division 23. 5. Conduits installed in public areas, not concealed by architectural ceilings, shall be supported by galvanized steel channel racks tight to bottom of roof deck or floor deck. Conduits shall be grouped for neat workman -like appearance. Q. Install expansion and deflection fittings and bonding jumpers on straight runs which exceed 200-feet, on center, and at 200-feet maximum, on center, on straight runs which exceed 400-feet, and where conduits cross building expansion joints. R. Provide grounding bushings at concentric/eccentric knockouts or where reducing washers are used. S. Run conduit to avoid proximity to heat producing equipment, piping, and flues, keeping a minimum of 8-inches clear. T. Install conduit as a complete system, without conductors, continuous from outlet to outlet and from fitting to fitting. Make up threaded joints of conduit carefully in a manner to ensure a tight joint. Fasten the entire conduit system into position. A run of conduit between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fitting shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends, including those bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting. CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0533 - 5 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS U. Conceal conduit systems in finished areas. Conduit can be exposed in mechanical and electrical rooms and where otherwise shown or indicated only. Run the conduit parallel and perpendicular to the structural features of the building and support with malleable iron conduit clamps at intervals as required by NEC or on conduit racks, neatly racked and bent in a smooth radius at corners. V. Conduit bends shall be factory elbows or shall be bent using equipment specifically designed to bend conduit of the type used to maintain the conduit's UL listing. W. Support conduit on galvanized channel, using compatible galvanized fittings (bolts, beam clamps, and similar items), and galvanized threaded rod pendants at each end of channel and secure raceway to channel and channel to structure. Where rod pendants are not used, channel supports are to be secured to structure at each end. Conduit supports are to be secured to structure using washers, lock washers, nuts and bolts or rod pendants (use of toggle bolt "wings" are not acceptable. Support single conduit runs using a properly sized galvanized conduit hanger with galvanized closure bolt and nut and threaded rod. Raceway support system materials shall be galvanized and manufactured by Kindorf, Unistrut, Superstrut, Caddy, or Spring Steel Fasteners, Inc. Provide chrome or nickel -plated escutcheon plates on conduit passing through walls and ceilings in finished areas. Do not support conduit from structural bridging or fire rated ceiling system. Do not support more than one conduit from a single all -thread rod support. Provide electrical insulating sleeve or wrapping for aluminum conduit supported by zinc coated supports or fasteners. Channel supports shall have cut ends filed smooth. When installed outside of the building, or in areas subject to moisture, the cut ends shall be painted with ZRC galvanized paint or equivalent. X. Flexible conduit for lighting fixture connection shall be supported from the structure with #13 AWG galvanized iron wire pendants and "Caddy clips". Do not support conduit from structural bridging. Flexible conduit shall not be longer than 6 feet and shall contain an equipment grounding conductor. Y. Terminate all motor connection conduits in mechanical room spaces with a floor pedestal and with "Tee" conduit at motor outlet height for flexible conduit. Z. Where conduit is not embedded in concrete or masonry, conduit shall be firmly secured by approved clamps, half -straps or hangers. Tie wire and short pieces of conduit used as supports and or hangers are not approved. AA. Where "LB" condulets are used, 2-inches and larger shall be type "LBD". BB. No more than 12 conduits containing branch circuits may be installed in junction boxes, pull boxes or gutters. CC. "Daisy Chaining" light fixtures installed for lay -in ceiling areas is not allowed. Each light fixture shall have it's own fixture whip form junction box. The only exception being light fixtures installed end to end using chase nipples between them, or light fixtures recessed in non -accessible ceilings. DD. Flexible metal conduit and liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall only be used for final connections from junction box to equipment, light fixtures, power poles, etc. They are not to be used in lieu of conduit runs. They shall not be used for wall or roof penetrations unless they are installed in a conduit sleeve at least one size larger than the OD of the flexible conduit. CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0533 - 6 2737.04 • is •) •) 0) A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS EE. Where 3-1/2-inch conduit is specified and the required or specified material is Schedule 80 PVC, provide 4-inch conduit. 3.02 CONDUITS A. Conduit above grade indoors: 1. Concealed Conduits: EMT with set screw fittings 2. Exposed conduits: a. Below nine feet AFF where not directly attached and against building walls, ceiling, or structure: Rigid galvanized conduit. b. Where subject to physical damage: Rigid galvanized conduit. C. Wet locations: PVC coated galvanized rigid steel d. Damp Locations: EMT with steel compression fittings e. Exposed conduits in mechanical rooms shall be rigid galvanized steel when installed below four feet above finished floor. B. Conduit run outside the building underground; conduit where indicated beneath the building slab: 1. PVC Coated Galvanized rigid steel or PVC. a. PVC conduit and fittings shall be used only for straight horizontal runs. Provide PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit and fittings with urethane interior coating at all changes in direction and at all vertical runs to 18 inches above finished floor elevation. For slab penetrations, provide continuous PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit and fittings with urethane interior coating from change in direction to 18 inches above finished floor elevation. b. Change in direction for all underground conduit shall be with long sweep radius. C. Conduit for all floor boxes shall be routed below building slab from floor box to nearest column, wall, or as indicated. d. Conduits shall not be routed in building slab. 2. Encase all underground conduits in concrete. a. Concrete shall be dyed red throughout with a ratio of 10 pounds of dye per yard of concrete. b. Provide minimum 3-inch concrete encasement around conduits. C. Provide conduit spacers for parallel branch/feeder conduits. d. When prior written approval from Owner and Architect to omit concrete encasement of conduits below building slab is given, conduits either specified or approved in writing to be routed under building slab without concrete encasement for electrical branch circuits or voice / data / video / communications horizontal drops or outlets shall be installed 18 inches below finished floor and on select fill. All other conduits, including but not limited to electrical feeders, voice / data / video / communications vertical, riser, tie, trunk, or service cable conduits shall be installed 48- inches below finished floor and on select fill. e. Use suitable manufactured separators and chairs installed 4 feet on centers. Band conduit together with suitable banding devices. Securely anchor conduit at each chair to prevent movement during concrete placement. 3. Install building voice / data / video / communications main service conduits and electrical service transformer primary and secondary conduits with top of VLK Architects, 2008 CONDUIT SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 7 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS concrete encasement minimum 48-inches below finished grade or pavement. Voice / data / video / communications conduits and electrical service primary is for utility owned electrical service transformers shall also comply with the respective utility company requirements and standards. All other underground conduits outside of building other than voice / data / video / communications main service conduits and electrical service transformer primary and secondary conduits shall have top of concrete encasement at 36 inches minimum below finished grade or pavement. 4. Provide two "caution" plastic tapes at 6-inches and 18-inches below finished slab, grade, or pavement; identify as specified. 5. Provide magnetic locator tape at top of first compacted layer of backfill or concrete. 6. Changes in direction of underground conduit runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends .having a minimum radius of curvature of 5-feet and shall be separated by a minimum of 10-feet straight section of conduit. 7. During construction, partially completed underground conduits shall be protected from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of conduit plugs. As each section of the underground conduit is completed, a testing mandrel with diameter %-inch smaller than the conduit, shall be drawn through each conduit. A brush with stiff bristles shall be drawn through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be installed. 8. Utility underground conduit for Utility Company cable shall be installed per Utility Company standards, and their specifications for this project. 9. Concrete shall be Portland Cement conforming to ASTM-C-150, Type 1, Type III or Type V if specified. Cement content shall be sufficient to product minimum strength of 2,500 PSI. • 10. Contractor shall stake out routing and location of underground conduits using actual field measurements. He shall obtain approval of the Owner and Architect before beginning trenching and excavation. 11. Verify location and routing of all new and existing underground utilities with the Owner and Architect on the -job site. Stake out these existing utilities so that they will not be damaged. Stake out new utilities to provide coordination with other trades and with new and existing utilities, easements, property lines, restricted land use areas, and right-of-ways. 12. Where long sweep turns are specified or required, change in direction of runs, either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet and a maximum arc of 22.5 degrees. The long sweep bends may be made up of one or more curbed PVC coated galvanized steel or straight PVC sections. Manufactured bends shall have the largest radius possible. C. Conduit installed above grade outdoors: 1. Galvanized rigid steel where subject to physical damage or where located less than four feet above finished floor. 2. Aluminum where not subject to physical damage and where located four feet above finished floor. D. Conduit shown in concrete floor or roof slab: 1. PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid steel. E. Conduits within 100 feet of cooling towers, at designated corrosive locations, or where conduit penetrates concrete slab. • CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0533 - 8 2737.04 0) V A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS PVC coated galvanized rigid steel F. Connections to equipment mounted on roof, rotating equipment, transformers, and kitchen or food processing equipment, or where flexible conduit is required outdoors. 1. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (1/2 inch may be used for roof top supply / exhaust fans only) 2. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit 24-inch maximum length G. Light fixture whips: 1. %-inch flexible conduit 2. Length not to exceed 6-feet 0-inches 3. Dedicated ground wire inside conduit 4. Light fixture whips shall not be supported from the ceiling suspension system. Provide support from structure with "Caddy" clips. Light fixture whips shall not rest on ceiling grid or tile. H. Conduits at Natatorium or therapeutic pool areas; conduit within 100 feet of Natatorium or therapeutic pool exhaust equipment openings; conduit at Natatorium or therapeutic pool HVAC, pumping and water treatment areas: 1. PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit, fittings and accessories Conduits in classified hazardous (Classified) locations: 1. Conduit fittings and seals UL listed for the classification 3.03 CONDUIT PENETRATIONS, SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Furnish sleeves for placing in construction for all conduit passing through concrete or masonry walls, partitions, beams, grade level other than floor, and roofs. A conduit sleeve shall be one size larger than the size of conduit, which it serves except where larger sizes are required for manufactured water, fire, or smoke stop fittings. 1. Sleeves set in concrete floor construction shall be minimum Schedule 40 galvanized steel. 2. Sleeves shall extend 3-inches above the finished floor. B. Sleeves in concrete or masonry walls shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel. Sleeves shall be set flush with finished wall. C. Install manufactured UL listed water, fire, and smoke stop fittings, or caulk around conduit or cables in sleeves with sufficient UL listed fire safe insulation or foam to maintain wall or floor slab fire or smoke rating. Refer to Architecture drawings for locations of rated walls. D. Provide Linkseal Mechanical Seals around conduit penetrations through walls below grade. Provide a pull box to serve as a water stop inside wall penetration. Internally seal low voltage cabling conduit penetrations with waterproof caulking. E. Sleeves penetrating walls or grade beams below grade shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with '/-inch thick steel plate secured to the pipe with continuous fillet weld. The plate shall be located in the middle of the wall and shall be 2-inches wider all around than the sleeve that it encircles. The sleeve should extend a minimum of 24-inches on either side of the penetration. The entire assembly shall be hot -dipped galvanized after fabrication. F. Conduit passing through the housing on connected equipment shall pass through a cleanly cut hole protected with an approved grommet. Route conduit through roof openings, for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack, with pitch pocket. CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0533 - 9 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS Coordinate location with roofing installation as required. G. Conduit passing through fire rated wall shall be sealed with Fire Stop. Route conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the provisions of Division 7. 3.04 POWER UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SYSTEMS AND SERVICE ENTRANCE UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Power underground conduits and service entrance shall be of individual conduit encased in concrete. Unless shown otherwise, the type of conduit used shall not be mixed in any one underground conduit and shall be the size indicated on the drawings. The concrete encasement surrounding the underground conduit shall be rectangular in cross-section, having a minimum concrete thickness of 3-inches, except that conduit for 120V and above shall be separated from control and signal conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 3-inches. Encasement concrete shall be tinted in red. B. During construction, partially completed underground conduits shall be protected from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of conduit plugs. As each section of the underground conduit is completed, a testing mandrel shall be drawn through until each conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be installed. C. Furnish the exact dimensions and location of power underground conduit to be encased in time to prevent delay in the concrete work. D. Conduit for service entrance underground conduits shall be as indicated on the drawings. E. Primary power underground conduit shall be installed in accordance with utility company standards and the utility company specifications for this project. 3.05 TECHNOLOGYNOICE/DATANIDEO COMMUNICATIONS, SIGNAL, LOW VOLTAGE AND EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEM RACEWAYS A. Conduit shall be installed in accordance with the specified requirements for conduit and with the additional requirements that no length of run shall exceed 100-feet for 1 inch or smaller trade sizes, and shall not contain more than two 90-degree bends or the equivalent. Pull or junction boxes shall be installed to comply with these requirements. Provide plastic bushings at all conduit terminations. Provide a grounding bushing on each data and voice conduit. B. Conduits shall be installed from outlet box to above an accessible ceiling. All cables routed through open spaces (no -ceiling below roof deck or above floor deck) shall be routed in conduit. Technology, telephone, communication systems, CATV, CCTV, fire alarm and BMCS cables can be installed above accessible ceilings without conduit. Cables installed above accessible ceiling shall be plenum rated. Conduit rough in of these cables shall include a 90-degree turn -out to an accessible location with insulated bushings on the end of the conduit. 1. Provide conduit from each telephone / voice outlet box to accessible ceiling plenum. 2. Provide conduit from each technology / data / communications outlet box to CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0533 -10 2737.04 • • W 0) A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS accessible ceiling plenum. 3. Provide conduit from each cable TV / video / audio outlet box to accessible ceiling plenum. 4. Provide conduit from each security / surveillance device outlet box to accessible ceiling plenum. 5. Provide two conduits for each combination data/voice/video outlet box and each outlet box indicated to contain more than four data, voice, or video drops to accessible ceiling plenum. C. All conduit in which cable is to be installed by others shall have pull string installed. The nylon pull string shall have not less than 200 lb. tensile strength. Not less than 12-inches of slack shall be left at each end. Provide blank cover plate before substantial completion if box is for a future installation after substantial completion of the project. Conduit shall extend to a minimum six inches above nearest accessible ceiling, and be turned horizontally with plastic bushing at terminations. D. Conduits for Building Entrance Facilities: 1. Outside Plant: Install a pull box every 300-feet or after 180 degree turns. All turns should be large sweeps (not sharp 90s) with the radius of the sweep at least 1 OX the diameter of the conduit. Hence a 4-inch conduit requires a 40-inch radial sweep. If field conditions absolutely mandate a sharp 90 bend to be installed, then a pull box shall be installed at that location regardless of distance. 2. Inside Plant: Install a pull box every 150-feet or after 180 degree turns. All turns shall be large sweeps, not sharp 90s, with the radius of the sweep at least 1 OX the diameter of the conduit. Hence, a 4-inch conduit requires a 40-inch radial sweep. If field conditions absolutely mandate a sharp 90 degree bend to be installed, then a pull box shall be installed at that location regardless of distance. 3. Building entrance facilities shall not terminate in an IDF or any other space except the MDF. 4. Coordinate the termination location of the building entrance facilities in the MDF with the room layout and equipment configuration. 5. Provide (3) one -inch ribbed innerducts in each 4-inch conduit. 3.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Conduit Systems: Provide adequate marking of major conduit exposed or concealed in interior accessible spaces to distinguish each run as either a power or signal/communication conduit. Except as otherwise indicated, use orange banding with black lettering. Provide self-adhesive or snap -on type plastic markers. Locate markers at ends of conduit runs, near switches and other control devices, near items of equipment served by the conductors, at points where conduit passes through walls or floors or enters non -accessible construction, and at spacing of not more than 50-feet along each run of exposed conduit. Switch -leg conduit and short branches for power connections need not be marked, except where conduit is larger than 1-inch. VLK Architects, 2008 END OF SECTION CONDUIT SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 11 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE SECTION 26 0537 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 0") PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide electrical box and fitting work as required, scheduled, indicated, and specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Label: Electrical boxes and fittings shall be UL labeled. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS A. Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape, and size, including depth of box, to suit respective locations and installation. Construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides. Provide gang boxes where devices are shown grouped. Single box design; sectional boxes are not acceptable 1. Type of Various Locations: a. Ceilings: 4-inch square, 2-1/8-inch deep. b. Plaster Walls: 4-inch square, 2-1/8-inch deep, with raised plaster cover; set with face flush with finished surface, shallow boxes where necessary. C. Dry -wall Construction Walls: Standard galvanized switch box, 2-1/8-inch deep, and shallow boxes where necessary. d. Masonry Walls: Galvanized switch boxes made especially for masonry installations; depths of boxes must be coordinated for each installation. • e. Surface: Type FS or FD box with surface cover. f. Corrosive locations or natatorium areas: Aluminum or 304 stainless steel construction suitable for the installation. g. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Explosion proof boxes, seals and fittings. h. Special: Where above types are not suitable, boxes as required, taking into account space available, appearance, and Code requirements 2. Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Outlet box accessories required as for installation, including covers or wall device plates, mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, plaster rings for boxes in plaster construction, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes. Accessories shall be compatible with outlet boxes used and meet requirements of individual wiring. B. Damp Location Outlet and Damp or Wet Location Switch Boxes: Deep type hot dipped galvanized cast -metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of type, shape, and size required. Include depth of box, threaded conduit ends, and stainless steel cover plate with spring -hinged waterproof caps suitable for application. Include faceplate gasket and corrosion -resistant fasteners. r� C. Wet Location Outlet Boxes: Hot dipped galvanized cast-iron weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of type, shape, and size required. Include depth of box, threaded conduit ends, and rain tight while -in -use cover plate Leviton 5977/5997-GY. Include faceplate gasket and corrosion -resistant fasteners. D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw -on covers, of type, shape, and size, to suit respective location and installation. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0537 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE 1. Type for Various Locations: a. 100 Cubic Inches in Volume or Smaller: Standard outlet boxes with stamped knockouts. b. 101 Cubic Inches in Volume or Larger: Code gauge steel with sides formed and welded, screw covers unless shown or required to have hinged doors. Boxes with covers of 12-inches or more in any dimension shall have hinged doors with locking device same as furnished on panelboards. Knockouts factory stamped or formed in field with a cutting tool to provide a clean symmetrically cut hole. C. Exterior or Wet Areas: 304 stainless steel NEMA 4X construction with gaskets and corrosion -resistant fasteners E. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast -metal conduit bodies, of type, shape, and size, to suit location and installation. Construct with threaded conduit ends, removable cover, and corrosion -resistant screws. F. Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Provide corrosion -resistant punched -steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts, and insulated conduit bushings of type and size to suit use and installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS A. Install electrical boxes and fittings as shown and as required, in compliance with NEC requirements, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, in accordance with industry practices. B. Junction and pull boxes above 2-foot x 2-foot grid ceilings shall be mounted within 18- inches of ceiling grid. Junction and pull boxes above 2-foot x 4-foot grid ceiling shall be mounted within 30-inches of ceiling grid. All junction box or pull box openings shall be side or bottom accessible. C. Use outlet and switch boxes for junctions on concealed conduit systems except in utility areas where exposed junction or pull boxes can be used. D. Determine from the drawings and by measurement the location of each outlet. Locate electrical boxes to accommodate millwork, fixtures, marker boards, and other room equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. The outlet locations shall be modified from those shown to accommodate changes in door swing or to clear interferences that arise from construction as well as modifying them to center in rooms. The modifications shall be made with no cost as part of coordination. Check the conditions throughout the job and notify the Architect of discrepancies. Verify modifications before proceeding with installation. Set wall boxes in advance of wall construction, blocked in place and secured. Set all wall boxes flush with the finish and install extension rings as required extending boxes to the finished surfaces of special furring or wall finishes. Provide wall box support legs attached to stud to prevent movement of box in wall. E. Unless noted or directed otherwise at installation, place outlet boxes as indicated on architectural elevations and as required by local codes. F. Outlets above counters, mount long axis horizontally. Refer to architectural elevations and coordinate to clear backsplash and millwork. • ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0537 - 2 2737.04 C�7 lei A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE G. Provide pull boxes, junction boxes, wiring troughs, and cabinets where necessary for installation of electrical systems. Surface mounted boxes accessible to the public shall not have stamped knockouts. H. Provide weatherproof boxes for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. J. Locate boxes and conduit bodies to ensure access to electrical wiring. Provide minimum 12-inch clearance in front of box or conduit body access. K. Secure boxes to the substrate where they are mounted, or embed boxes in concrete or masonry. L. Boxes for any conduit system shall not be secured to the ceiling system, HVAC ductwork or piping system. M. Provide junction and pull boxes for feeders and branch circuits where shown and where required by NEC, regardless of whether or not boxes are shown. N. Coordinate locations of boxes in fire rated partitions and slabs to not affect the fire rating of the partition or slab. Notify the Architect in writing where modification or construction is required to maintain the partition or slab fire rating. O. Exterior boxes installed within 50-feet of cooling towers or water treatment areas shall be of 304 stainless steel, of weatherproof NEMA 4X construction. P. Identification: Paint the exterior and cover plates of building interior junction boxes and pull boxes to correspond to the following colors: 1. Orange: - 480/277 VAC systems 2. Blue: - 240 VAC three phase delta systems. 3. Red - Emergency circuits and exit lights, fire alarm system. 4. Green - 120/208 VAC 3 phase and 120/240 VAC single-phase systems 5. Blue - Mechanical and miscellaneous equipment power branch circuits 6. White - Security and Surveillance equipment circuits Q. All boxes shall be labeled with each circuit number and each circuit relay number if applicable on the cover plate, visible from the outside of the box. R. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. S. Use flush ' mounting outlet box in finished areas unless specifically indicated as being used with exposed conduit. T. Locate flush -mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. U. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. V. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. W. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0537 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE X. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. Y. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. Z. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. AA. Support boxes independently of conduit. BB. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. CC. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. DD. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. EE. Anchor outlets in suspended ceilings to the building construction. FF. In finished areas not receiving furred ceilings, install outlet boxes on concrete deck of the floor or roof above. Exercise extreme care in locating outlet boxes. GG. Mount boxes to the building structure with supporting facilities independent of the conduits entering or leaving the boxes. HH. Where multiple feeders are in one pull box, conductors shall be wrapped with 3M No. 7700 Arc and fireproof tape. II. Where required, provide plaster rings of suitable depth on outlet boxes. Face of outlet box or plaster ring shall be not more than 1/8 inch from finished surface. JJ. Equip boxes supporting fixtures designed to accept fixture studs with 3/8-inch stud (galvanized malleable iron) inserted through back of box and secured by locknut. Boxes not equipped with outlets shall have level metal covers with rust -resisting screws. KK. Do not mount junction boxes above inaccessible ceilings or in inaccessible spaces. Do not mount junction boxes above ceilings accessible only by removing light fixture. At inaccessible spaces use junction box furnished with light fixture or light fixture wiring compartment UL listed for through wiring. LL. No more than 12 conduits containing branch circuits may be installed in any junction or pull box. MM. Junction boxes shall be protected from building finish painters' over spray; ie: mechanical rooms, to comply with item "P" in this section. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. END OF SECTION I� ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS VLK Architects, 2008 26 0537 - 4 2737.04 ABM CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE SECTION 26 1216 - THREE PHASE, ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING 01, TRANSFORMERS (HMT) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work Included: Low Voltage (less than 600 Volt) transformer work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and specified. B. Types: Transformers required for the project include energy efficient dry -type harmonic mitigating transformers. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Transformers shall be designed and tested in accordance with NEMA and ANSI C33.4 and C89.2 standards. B. UL Label: Transformers shall be UL labeled. C. EPA Energy Star Standards 1.03 STANDARDS A. UL-506 B. ANSI C75.11 10 C. NEMA ST-20 D. NEMA TP-1 •) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Include outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, KVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, no load core loss, full load winding conductor loss, full load losses, efficiency at 0, 25, 35, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated loads based on IEEE Standard 519-1992 Table 43 for non -linear load profile, percent regulation with 80 percent and 100 percent power factor loads, sound level, tap configurations, insulation system type and rated temperature rise. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Powersmiths International Corp. B. Power Quality International C. Hammond Power Solutions D. G.E. (OEM = Hammond Power Solutions) THREE-PHASE, ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS VLK Architects, 2008 26 1216 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS • A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide transformer manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended, and as required for a complete installation. 2.03 ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS A. General: Indoor transformers shall be dry -type, multiple -winding transformers, rated as shown, and shall have manufacturer's standard impedance. B. Construction: Transformer core shall be constructed of cold -rolled, oriented, high permeability silicon steel, either formed as a coil or laminated. Windings shall be copper, individual winding terminated with tin-plated copper bars, or wire electrically welded to the end of the windings. C. Windings: Transformer secondary windings shall be zig-zag (0-degree phase shift). The secondary windings shall provide for magnetic flux cancellation of the zero sequence (triplen) harmonic currents from non -linear loads connected to the transformer secondary. Triplen harmonic currents shall not appear on the current waveform of the transformer primary winding. D. Taps: Transformers 15 to 30 kva shall have two 5% taps, one above and one below normal. Transformers 45 kva and larger shall have four 2-1/2% taps, two above and two below normal. E. Temperature Rating: Transformers shall use an insulation system that has been temperature classified and approved by UL. Transformers shall have a maximum winding • temperature rise of 1500C with an insulation system temperature classification of 220°C. F. Accessories: Transformers shall have insulated ground bus, 200% neutral bus, and electrostatic winding shield. G. Load Rating: 1. Transformers shall be capable of operating at 100% of nameplate rating continuously while in an ambient temperature not exceeding 40°C. 2. Transformers shall be capable of meeting the daily overload requirement of ANSI C57.12. H. Vibration Isolation: Each transformer core and coil shall be mounted in the transformer enclosure on rubber vibration isolators. Sound Rating: The transformer shall have sound levels equal to or lower than those ratings established in NEMA ST-20 and as shown in the following table. Sound ratings shall be measured in accordance with ANSI C89.91. Transformer Rating (kva) Maximum Sound Level (600 Volt Class) Decibels: NEMA ST-20 0to9 40 10 to 50 45 51 to 150 50 151 to 300 55 301 to 500 60 Efficiency: Transformers shall meet the EPA Energy Star energy savings requirement of • THREE-PHASE, ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS VLK Architects, 2008 26 1216 - 2 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE efficiencies greater than 98% with both linear and non -linear load profiles. Non -linear load 401) profile based on IEEE Std. 519-1992 Table 4.3 Spectrum of typical switch mode power supplies, or a typical K-13 load profile. K. Impedance - positive and negative sequence: 2.5 — 4.0% (up to 75kVA), 2.3-4.8% (112.5- 300kVA). L. Zero sequence impedance and reactance: Less than 0.95% and 0.3% respectively. M. Testing: 1. The manufacturer shall have tested each transformer for proper operation before shipment. 2. The manufacturer shall have performed the following additional tests on units identical to the design type being supplied. Furnish proof of performance of these tests in the form of test data sheets upon request: a. Sound levels. b. Temperature rise tests. C. Full -load core and winding losses. d. Percent regulation with 80 and 100% power factor load. e. Percent impedance. f. Exciting current. g. Insulation resistance. h. Non -linear load testing efficiency at 0, 25, 35, 50, 75 and 100% load under non -linear load profile based on IEEE Std. 519-1992 Table 4.3. Spectrum of typical switch mode power supplies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 0 3.01 INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMERS A. General: Install transformers where shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and industry practices to ensure that the transformers meet the specifications. Comply with requirements of NEMA and NEC standards, and applicable portions of NECA Standard of Installation, for installation of transformers. Transformers shall be floor mounted. Ceiling mounted transformers are not acceptable unless written permission by Owner/Engineer. B. Dry -Type Transformer Mounting: Indoor, floor mount transformer on properly sized Amber/Booth Type RVD rubber -in -shear vibration isolators. Only where specifically indicated on the plans or approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer, transformers shall be trapeze mounted using properly sized Amber/Booth type BRD rubber -in -shear hangers. Transformer enclosures shall make no contact with wall surfaces. C. Conduit: Conduit directly connected to transformer enclosures shall be flexible liquid tight conduit extending for a minimum of 18-inches and a maximum of 36 inches from transformer enclosure as measured along the conduit centerline. Include a ground wire, size in accordance with NEC, internal in each length of flexible conduit. D. Grounding: Ground and bond transformers as a separately derived system unless noted otherwise, refer to NEC 250. Installation of bonding strap or bonding conductor between ground and neutral bus shall be witnessed by the Engineer prior to applying power and terminating secondary conductors. E. Transformers shall be provided with secondary load neutral conductor rated at 200%. THREE-PHASE, ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS VLK Architects, 2008 26 1216 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE 3.02 TESTING A. Insulation Tests: Before energizing, check transformer windings for continuity. B. Winding Current: During initial no-load energizing, check current in each primary winding. C. Tap Settings: Measure and record load current and voltage of transformers while loaded to verify proper transformer tap settings. D. Submittals: Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit four copies of certified test results to Engineer for review. Reports include transformer tested, date and time of tests, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions. E. Notification: Notify Engineer in writing of any deviation from manufacturer's pre -shipment test data. END OF SECTION • �J THREE-PHASE, ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS VLK Architects, 2008 26 1216 - 4 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES •) PART 1 - GENERAL •) 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinet, as shown, scheduled, indicated, and specified. B. Types: Panelboards and enclosures required for the project include the following: 1. Power distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance panelboards. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Standards: Panelboards and enclosures shall confirm to all applicable UL standards and shall be UL labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Square D 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Lighting and appliance panelboards shall be dead -front safety -type equipped with molded case circuit breakers as shown and scheduled. Power distribution panelboards shall be dead -front type equipped with fusible switches or circuit breakers as shown and scheduled. B. Bussing Assembly: Panelboard and power distribution panelboard bussing shall be copper. Bus structure and mains shall have ratings as shown and scheduled. Ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or busbar not to exceed 650C rise above 400C ambient. Heat rise test shall be conducted in accordance with UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions is not accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. Furnish a bare uninsulated ground bus inside each panelboard enclosure. Two section panelboards shall be connected with copper cable, with an ampacity meeting or exceeding the main bus ampacity. Panelboards serving non -linear loads and fed with neutrals greater than 100% shall have 200% neutral bussing and isolated ground bus. C. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic type equipped with individually insulated, braced, and protected connectors. The front faces of circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Tripped indication shall be shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF. Make prepared space provisions for additional breakers so that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. Circuit breakers in lighting and appliance panelboards shall have bolt -in breakers. Two and three pole breakers shall have internal common trips. External handle ties will not be accepted. Circuit breakers for distribution panelboards shall have plug -on circuit breakers. 1. Provide lighting and appliance panelboard branch circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as shown, but in no case less than the following symmetrical amperes RMS: PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES VLK Architects, 2008 26 2416 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE Voltage (volts) Interrupting Capacity • 120/208/240 10,000 AIC 277/480 14,000 AIC 2. Circuit breakers for lighting circuits shall be UL listed switch duty (SWD). 3. Ground fault interrupter (GFI) circuit breakers, where shown, shall be 5 mA ground fault trip and shall include a TEST button. 4. Provide distribution panel circuit breakers with high interrupting capacity, or integral current limiters as shown. Circuit breakers shall have interrupting capacity not less than the following symmetrical amperes RMS: CONVENTIONAL FRAME SIZE/ VOLTAGE INTEGRAL INTERRUPTING CAPACITY 100A/240V 10,000 AIC 225A/240V 25,000 AIC 400A/240V 65,000 AIC 600A/240V 65,000 AIC 800A/240V 65,000 AIC 1000A/240V 65,000 AIC 1200A/240V 65,000 AIC 100A/480V 18,000 AIC 225A/480V 35,000 AIC 400A/480V 35,000 AIC 600A/480V 65,000 AIC 800A/480V 65,000 AIC 1000A/480V 65,000 AIC 1200A/480V 65,000 AIC D. Fusible Switches: Fusible switches shall be quick -make, quick -break type. Each switch shall be enclosed in a separate steel enclosure. The enclosure shall employ a hinged cover for access to the fuses. Interlock cover with the operating handle to prevent opening the cover when the switch is in the ON position. This interlock shall be constructed so that it can be overridden for testing fuses without interrupting service. The switches shall have padlocking provisions in the OFF position. Switches shall include positive pressure rejection type fuse clips for use with UL Class R fuses and be UL labeled for 200,000 AIC. E. Spaces: Where space for future breakers or switches is shown, panelboard enclosure shall include removable blank panels or knockouts to allow installation of future breakers or switches, prepared spaces, and panelboard busing shall be complete, including required connectors. F. Integrated Equipment Rating: Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short- circuit rating equal or greater than the available short circuit current. Rating shall have been established by tests on similar panelboards with the circuit breakers or fusible switches installed. Series rated panelboards and their protective upstream devices shall be labeled as required by the NEC. L_J G. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide sheet steel enclosures, minimum 16-gauge nominal • PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES 'VLK Architects, 2008 26 2416 - 2 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE thickness, with multiple knockouts, unless shown otherwise. Provide all panelboard fronts •�jj with piano hinged door in hinged trim to box, spring -loaded door pulls, and flush lock and l key, panelboard enclosures keyed alike to match the Owner's standard key system; coordinate with Owner. Equip with interior circuit directory frame, card, and clear plastic covering for lighting and appliance panelboards. Provide gray powder coat finish over a rust inhibitor. Panelboards located in kitchen preparation or natatorium areas shall have stainless steel door and trim (NEMA 1). Enclosures at exterior locations shall be NEMA 4X. Enclosure shall be for recessed or surface mounting as shown. Enclosures shall be fabricated by the same manufacturer as panelboards to be enclosed. Multi -section panelboards shall have same physical dimensions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES A. General: Install panelboards and enclosures, as shown, including electrical connections, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the requirements of NEC, NECA Standard of Installation, and industry practices. B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with conductor and raceways installation work. C. Anchoring: Anchor enclosures to walls and structural surfaces ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secured. D. Directory Card: Provide a typed circuit directory card(s) upon completion of work. Directory card shall be of super heavy -weight index card stock, 110 lb, white. Directory shall include type of load (ie: receptacles, lighting, exhaust fan, etc.) and location (ie: Room 102, Gymnasium, etc.) Room number shall be identified as the actual graphics room number assigned to the space and not the room number identified on the Plans. Circuits with shunt trip shall be identified with the control circuit operating the shunt trip (ie: Kitchen Hood No. 2). Shunt trip breakers with common trip circuit shall be grouped in the panelboard (ie: circuits 1, 3, 5 and 7). E. Fuses: Install fuses, of the ratings and class shown, in each power distribution and motor control panelboard. F. Circuit Arrangement: Arrange branch circuit connections to 3-phase lighting and appliance panelboards so that when two or three circuits are run with a common neutral, each circuit is connected to a different phase unless shown otherwise. Branch circuits shall be connected to the circuit breakers in the lighting and appliance panelboard to provide the best possible phase balance, unless shown otherwise. G. Spare Conduits: Provide (3) 1-inch and (3) 3/-inch spare conduits capped to 6-inches above accessible ceiling space and (3) 1-inch and (3) %-inch conduits capped down to ceiling space on floor below for all recessed lighting and appliance panelboards and all lighting and appliance panelboards located above ground floor. H. Arrange each phase conductor to enter each circuit breaker or fuse switch at a 90- degree angle. Conductors shall be bent neatly opposite the fuse or circuit breaker to which they are to be attached. Vertically installed conductors should be neatly tie - wrapped. Conductors shall be connected in a neat and professional manner. Provide excess wire in panelboard for each circuit. Conductors brought in from the top or bottom of the cabinet shall be bent neatly opposite the fuse or circuit breaker to which they are to •l be attached. Excess conductor length shall be equal to the height plus the width of the J PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES VLK Architects, 2008 26 2416 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE cabinet. Each conductor shall be run along the panel and looped back 180 degrees before being connected to its fuse or circuit breaker. Panelboard shall be cleaned of all • construction debris prior to substantial completion review. Neutral and grounding conductors shall be installed similar to the phase conductors except omit the excess wire length. Circuit breakers and conductors installed for TVSS devices shall be located at the top or bottom of the panelboard in respect to the location of the TVSS device. Route all conductors to the TVSS device using long sweep bends and the shortest conductor length possible. J. Install ground bus for ground conductors. Ground conductors size #1 and larger are to be landed to can with mechanical lugs and not to ground buss. K. Install panels so that breaker number 1 is the top left breaker. Panel interiors shall not be installed where breaker number 1 is the bottom right breaker. L. In panels that contain multi -layered neutral bus install neutrals beginning with the back neutral bus row and work forward. Do not make up neutrals on front neutral bus row unless all other rows are full. M. Label breaker mounting space with stick -on number labels. 3.02 TESTING A. Before energizing, energization, check for continuity of circuits and short circuits. END OF SECTION • • PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES VLK Architects, 2008 26 2416 - 4 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE SECTION 26 2425 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS •) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Safety and disconnect switch work where required, scheduled, indicated, and specified. B. UL Approved: Safety and disconnect switches shall have UL approval and the UL label. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Square D 2.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. General: Provide heavy duty type, dead -front, sheet steel enclosed, surface -mounted safety switches of the type and size indicated. Safety switches shall be rated for the voltage of the circuit where they are installed. Safety switches used as motor disconnects shall be horsepower rated for the motor served. B. Switch Mechanism: 1. Safety switches shall be quick -make, quick -break type with permanently attached arc suppressor. Constructed so that switch blades are visible in the OFF position with the door open. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Switch shall have provision to padlock in the OFF position. Safety switches shall have a cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door when the switch mechanism is in the ON position, or closing of the switch mechanism when the switch door is open. 2. Cover interlock shall have an override mechanism to permit switch inspection by authorized personnel. Current -carrying parts shall be constructed of high conductivity copper with silver-plated switch contacts. Lugs shall be suitable for copper conductors and front removable. C. Fusing: Provide fusible safety switches where required or indicated. Fuse clips shall be positive pressure rejection type fuse clips suitable for use with UL Class R or Class J fuses. D. Neutral: Provide safety switches with number of switched poles indicated. Where a neutral is present in the circuit, provide a solid neutral with the safety switch. Where a ground conductor is present in the circuit, provide a separate solid ground with the safety switch. 2.03 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front - mounted, field -adjustable trip setting. • 3. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field -replaceable rating plug; ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS VLK Architects, 2008 26 2425 - 1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE with the following field -adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip b. Long -and short -time pickup levels. C. Long -and Short -time time adjustments. d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay and I2t response B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame izes, trip ratings and number of poles. 1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings and material of conductors. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 2.04. ENCLOSURES A. Enclosures in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 heavy duty enclosures unless shown otherwise. B. Enclosures in exterior locations shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel, heavy duty. C. Enclosures at kitchen and food preparation locations, hose down areas, cooling towers, and in other corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install safety and disconnect switches where required or indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of the NEC, NECA Standard of Installation, and industry practices. Provide fuse identification label showing type and size inside door of each switch. Include devices in coordination study to indicate overcurrent devices will selectively coordinate. B. Location: Provide safety switches where shown and at each motor out of sight of, or more than 50' from the switch or panel from which the motor circuit is fed. C. Supports: Provide all safety and disconnect switches with galvanized angle or other supports where mounting on wall or other rigid surface is impractical. Switches shall not be supported by conduit alone. Where safety and disconnect switches are mounted on equipment served, the switch shall not inhibit removal of service panels or interfere with access areas. Provide mounting hardware that will allow removal of safety and disconnect switches. Do not utilize drive pin anchors through enclosure. D. Safety and Disconnect Switches: Install disconnect switches used with motor -driven appliances, motors and controllers within sight of the controller position unless indicated otherwise. E. Coordination: Coordinate safety and disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work as necessary for interface. F. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Warning Plaque: Yellow -White -Yellow 3-layer laminated plastic engraved plaque "WARNING" (1/2 Inch Letters). "TURN OFF VFD BEFORE OPENING THIS SWITCH FOR MAINTENANCE." (1/4 inch letters). Provide VFD warning plaque at safety disconnect switches which are located down -stream of VFDs. Secure ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS VLK Architects, 2008 26 2425 - 2 2737.04 • • •) A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE plaque to disconnect switch or immediately adjacent to disconnect switch with fasteners. G. Provide disconnect switch for all electric duct heaters. 3.02 TESTING A. General: Before energizing, check for continuity of circuits and short circuits. END OF SECTION ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS VLK Architects, 2008 26 2425 - 3 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE SECTION 26 2913 - COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Motor controller work as required, scheduled and specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Square D 2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. General: Combination motor controllers shall consist of an integrally mounted, thermal magnetic or magnetic only circuit breaker disconnect or disconnect switch as specified in Section 16170; magnetic, full voltage non -reversing (FVNR) or two speed controller as required, in a heavy duty type, dead front enclosure, surface -mounted; size and number of poles as required. Controllers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with NEMA Standards. Refer to Division 23 for Variable Frequency Inverter furnished by Division 23, installed by Division 26. B. Contacts: Magnetic controller contacts shall be silver alloy, and not require any filing dressing, or cleaning for the life of the controller. C. Operating Coils: Operating coils shall be 120V, pressure molded and designed so that accidental exposure to excessive voltage up to 480V will not damage the coil. Design controller so that when a coil fails due to over voltage, the controller shall open, and not freeze in the closed position. D. Overload Relays: Controllers shall have manual -reset, trip -free, solid state, overload relays in each phase conductor. Three phase FVNR controllers shall have three overload relays. Single-phase FVNR controllers shall have an overload relay in each ungrounded conductor. Two speed, full -voltage magnetic controllers shall have overload relays for all six ungrounded conductors. Overload relays shall not be field -convertible from manual to automatic reset. Provide reset button located in front cover to reset all overload relays. E. LED Pilot Lights: Provide 30.5mm run and stop pilot lights for all motor controllers. Furnish additional pilot lights for motor controllers as shown. Provide FAST and SLOW pilot lights for two -speed controllers. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the controller enclosure cover. Pilot lights shall be operated from an interlock on the motor controllers, and not be wired across -the operating coil. Green - Stop Red - Run Yellow - Slow Blue - Fast F. Controls: Controllers shall have 30.5mm HAND -OFF -AUTOMATIC switches. Provide for FAST -SLOW, REMOTE -LOCAL speed selection from HVAC control system for two -speed controllers. Two -speed controllers shall have deceleration relays between fast and slow speeds. Coordinate motor controller controls with the requirements of Division 23. Motor controller controls shall be mounted in the controller enclosure cover. 0) G. Control Power: A single phase control power transformer shall be included with each controller for 120V control power. The primary shall be connected to the line side of the motor COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS VLK Architects, 2008 26 2913 -1 2737.04 A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE controller through two fuses; the secondary shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded. Arrange transformer terminals so that wiring to terminals is not located above the • transformer. H. Auxiliary Contacts: Each controller shall have two normally open and two normally closed nonconvertible auxiliary contact in addition to the number of contacts required for the holding interlock and control wiring. One or more additional auxiliary contacts can be field installed without removing existing wiring, or removing the controller from its enclosure. Phase Failure Monitors: Provide a 3 phase failure monitor for each motor controller. Monitor on any or all phases, for phase reversal from A-B-C sequence, under/over voltage, and phase failure. Provide adjustable relay for trip range. Provide automatic reset upon restoration of power to all phases. Where solid state overload relays provide this specified requirement, separate phase failure relays may be omitted. Unit Wiring: Unit shall be completely pre -wired to terminals to eliminate any interior field wiring except for: connection of power supply conductors to switch line side terminals; motor leads to the controller load side terminals; and control conductors to holding coil terminals. K. Enclosure: 1. Motor Controllers installed in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 heavy duty enclosures unless shown otherwise. 2. Motor Controllers installed at kitchen and food preparation locations, hose down areas, cooling towers, exterior locations, and in other corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel. L. Minimum interrupting rating shall be 35KAIC. 2.03 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS • A. General: Manual motor controllers shall consist of an integral controller and overload protection in a common enclosure, surface mounted. Size and number of poles shall be as shown and required with pilot light. B. Manual Motor Controller: Manual motor controller with overload protection, 1 HP maximum, 115 or 230V; General Electric Model #CK101 Y1-(1) Pole, CR101 H1-(2) Pole; General Electric Model #CR101Y11-(1) Pole, with pilot light, CR101H11-(2) Pole; with pilot light. C. Enclosures: 1. Manual motor controllers installed in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 heavy duty enclosures unless shown otherwise. 2. Manual motor controllers installed at kitchen and food preparation locations, hose down areas, cooling towers, exterior locations, and in other corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel. D. Disconnect Switch: For self -protected motors where one pole toggle motor control switch is allowed, the switch shall be horsepower rated and as specified for toggle switches in Section 16140. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. General: Install combination motor controllers where required or indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of the NEC and NECA Standard of isInstallation, and industry practices. COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS VLK Architects, 2008 26 2913 - 2 2737.04 0 0) A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL AGRICULTURAL FACILITY RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE B. Overloads: Install overload relays with manual reset in each phase of motor controller. Overload adjustable settings shall be based on actual motor nameplate full load amps. Field verify nameplate full load amps and adjust all relay settings accordingly. C. Phase Failure Relay: Adjust phase failure relay to 10 percent over voltage and 10 percent under voltage. D. Coordination: Motor controllers shall be provided to coordinate with motors furnished by Division 23. Motor controller controls shall be provided to coordinate with controls specified in Division 23. E. Supports: Provide individual and combination motor controllers with galvanized angle or other suitable supports if mounting on wall or other rigid surface is impractical. Controllers shall not be supported by conduit alone. Where motor controllers are mounted on equipment served, the switch shall not inhibit removal of any service panels or interfere with any required access areas. Manual motor controllers shall be installed plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall where they are installed. F. Identify each motor controller as specified in Section 26 0500. G. Where motor controllers are indicated to be installed as part of a Motor Control Center, refer to the Motor Control Center specification. 3.02 TESTING A. Pre-Energization Check: Check motor controllers for continuous circuits and short circuits. B. Post Hook -Up Test: After wire and cable hook-ups, energize motor controller to show it functions as specified. END OF SECTION COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS VLK Architects, 2008 26 2913 - 3 2737.04 0 • • SECTION 31 1000 SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas A. Section Includes: Clearing the site of vegetation, site improvements and obstructions to make way for new work. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Contractor shall visit the site and verify the nature and extent of clearing work required. B. Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of adjoining property and improvements outside the limits of the work. Protect walks, curbs and paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks. Take precautions to prevent injury to trees which are to remain. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE A. Clearing: 1. Remove trees, shrubs and other vegetation from within the area of the site where shown on the drawings. Grub out roots to a depth of at least 18" below natural grade. 2. Break up and remove foundations, paving, walks and curbs. Dig out and remove buried obstructions to a depth of 24" below natural grade or 24" below the intended excavation elevation, whichever is lower. 3. Refer to SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK for handling of piping and conduit encountered below grade. 4. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, trees with calipers greater than 3" shall not be cleared (removed). B. Pavement Removal 1. Bituminous and concrete pavements shall be removed to neatly sawed edges. Saw cuts shall be made to a minimum depth of 1 Yz". If a saw cut in concrete pavement falls within 3' of an existing score joint, construction joint, sawjoint, cold joint, expansion joint, or edge, the concrete shall be removed to that joint or edge. All saw cuts shall be parallel and/or perpendicular to the line of existing pavement. If an edge of a cut is damaged subsequent to saw cutting, the concrete shall again be sawed to a neat, straight line for the purpose of removing the damaged area. C. Disposal: 1. Cleanup and remove from the site the stumps, logs, broken paving, rubble and debris that is existing and resulting from the clearing and grubbing operations. 2. Material to be wasted shall be legally disposed of off site. 3. Burning of combustible materials on the site will not be permitted. 3.02 BACKFILLING A. All holes, cavities, and depressions in the ground caused by site preparation operations will be backfilled and tamped to normal compaction and will be graded to prevent ponding of water and to promote drainage. In areas that are to be immediately excavated, the Architect/Engineer may permit holes, etc., to remain open. 3.03 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PRACTICES A. During the progress of the work, the contractor shall provide and maintain storm water erosion and silt control measures in place at the site and shall provide additional erosion control barriers, silt fences, and other techniques in accordance with best management practices. Contractor shall remove storm water management items at completion of project. END OF SECTION VLK Architects, 2008 SITE CLEARING 31 1000 - 1 2737.04 ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 0 SECTION 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Excavating, filling, backfilling, grading, and compacting of earth at the site. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 31 1000 -Site Clearing. 3. Section 312313 - Building Subgrade Preparation 4. Section 312333 -Trenching and Backfilling. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit a one gallon sample and material analysis results of imported topsoil from a testing laboratory indicating compliance with these specifications. Any topsoil delivered to the site which does not comply with the approved sample shall be re -tested at the Contractor's expense and replaced. B. Test Reports: 1. Submit copies of test reports in accordance with SECTION 01 4523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES. 2. Submit copies of test reports for select fill material. No select fill material shall be delivered to the site until after the tests have been made and test reports confirmed. 3. Compaction Tests: Submit copies of compaction test reports. 1.03 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Laboratory Control: Select fill imported material and topsoil, if required, shall be inspected and tested by an independent testing laboratory. 1. Testing laboratory shall make tests of the soil from the selected source to determine that it meets the specified requirements for select fill and imported topsoil. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Sheeting: Shore and sheet excavations to protect utilities and to prevent cave-in. Maintain sheeting secure until permanent construction is in place. Remove sheeting as excavations are backfilled. B. Drainage: Provide for adequate surface drainage during construction to keep the site free of surface water without creating a nuisance in adjacent areas. C. Pumping: Keep the excavations free of water at all times by pumping or other means. This shall be the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of the cause, source, or nature of the water. D. Protection: 1. Property: Protect adjoining property, including improvements out -side the limits of the work. Protect walks, curbs, and paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks. 2. Trees: Protect tops, trunks, and roots of trees on the site which are to remain. Box or fence trees vulnerable to damage during construction. Remove interfering branches with care and cover scars with tree paint. Do not permit fires, storage of materials or excavation within the branch spread of trees to remain. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. Topsoil on the building and paving site areas shall be stripped, cleaned of grass, roots and debris to a depth of between 4" to 6", and stockpiled for later use. EXCAVATION AND FILL VLK Architects, 2008 31 2300 - 1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas quired where scheduled and as required to achieve a minimum 6" depth planting 2. Imported topsoil shall be re bed for all lawn areas. a. Contractor shall haul and place imported topsoil obtained from off -site sources as necessary to construct the topsoil layer and various other details of the construction drawings. All costs related not such imported topsoil fill will be included in the contract price, and. no additional or separate paye for imported fill will be due the Contractor. b. Topsoil shall be secured from an approved off -site location. It shall be fertile, friable, natural loam ble cegrowth. It nreeo aining vigorous ant a'fstone lumps, earth, plants op clods of had earhei roots,tsticks, and otherlextraneous matter• bef Under no circumstances will topsoil be accepted unless it is free of the aforementioned contaminants. topsoil Contractor may use approved means of treating the topsoil to ensure its acceptability. Importted top shall be rock free. c. The soil texture shall be classified as loam or sandy loam according to the "soil triangle" published y the United States Agriculture Department and the hollowing criteria: 1) Sand (2.0 to 0.05 mm dia.)(No. 10 sieve): Loam 25-50%; Sandy Loam 45-85%. 2) Silt (0.05 to 0.002 mm dia.)(No. 270 sieve): Loam 30-50%; Sandy Loam less than 50%. 3) Clay (smaller than 0.002 mm dia.XHydrometer Analysis): Sandy Loam less than 50%. 4) Natural organic content: Not less than 1.5%. 5) pH of Soil: Not more than 7.6. 6) Soil texture shall be determined by utilizing processes as prescribed in ASTM D 422 using the No. 10 and No. 270 sieves and a hydrometer analysis. in his 3. opinion, any of the following conditionsoil or s orematterll be anddparticles are present ared as lto a degreeArchitect at isjudged opinion, y detrimental to the proposed use of the material: a. Moisture. b. Decayed or un-decayed vegetation. c. Hardpan clay, heavy clay, or clay balls. d. Rubbish. e. Construction rubble. f. Sand or gravel. g. Rocks, cobbles, or boulders. h. Cementitious matter. i. Foreign matter of any kind. of 4. Unsuitable slmaterials fill mater ial be ds unsatisfactory for euse aseembankment cified in solely because sof high CLEARING. 5. Wet content, the Architect may grant the Contractor permission to process the material to reduce the moisture content to a usable optimum condition. B. Unselected Earth Fill: Clean, sandy soil free of organic matter and refuse, roots, clay lumps and rocks larger than 2". C. Granular lular fill for areas to be covered with membrane waterproofing shall berock gaded to produce a mixture passing 3clean pea gravel " sieve and 'graded no sieve. Gran larger than'/.". nd gravel mixture with less than 12% passing a No. 200 sieve, and D. Free -Draining Fill: Coarse sand or sand a a Plasticity Index less than 4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Establish extent of excavation by area and elevation; designate and identify datum elevation. B. Set required lines and levels. C. Maintain bench marks, monuments and other reference points. 3.02 PREPARATION tion and extent of underground utilities occurring in work area. A. Before starting excavation, establish loca B. Notify utility companies to remove and relocate lines which are in way of excavation. C. Maintain, reroute or extend as required, existing utility lines to remain which pass through work area. EXCAVATION AND FILL 2737.04 VLK Architects, 2008 31 2300 - 2 ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 0 D. Protect and support utility services uncovered by excavation. E. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation; cap, plug or seal such lines and identify at grade. F. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines rerouted or extended on Project Record Documents. G. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed condition, discontinue affected work and notify Architect. H. Remove grass, weeds, roots and other vegetation from areas to be excavated, filled and graded. Fill stump holes and like small excavations with suitable material placed in lifts and thoroughly tamped. I. Scarify the subgrade soil in place to a depth of 6" and compact to between 95 and 100 percent of Standard Density, at or above optimum moisture content, in accordance with ASTM D 698. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. Allow space for the construction of forms. Excavate as required regardless of the condition or type of material encountered. 1. Cut areas accurately to the indicated cross -sections and grades. Take care to prevent excavation below the grades indicated. Any bottoms and slopes that are undercut shall be backfilled with earth fill and compacted. 2. Finish the excavating required for graded areas to a tolerance of 0.10 foot above or below the rough grade. 3. Remove underground obstructions except for piping and conduit which shall be handled as specified in SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK. B. Overcut planting and lawn areas to allow a layer of topsoil not less than 6" thick. • C. D. Maintain excavations to drain and be free of excess water. Ponding of water on site will not be permitted. Exercise extreme care in grading around existing trees. Do not disturb existing grades around existing trees except as otherwise noted. When excavation through roots is necessary, and after review by Architect, perform by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. E. Fill over -excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces in accordance with Architect's direction. F. Do not allow construction equipment to create "pumping" of soils. G. Stockpile excavated clean fill for reuse where directed. Remove excess or unsuitable excavated fill from site. 3.04 WASTING A. Surplus excavated material not suitable or required for embankment fill and backfill shall be wasted off site. 3.05 FILL AND BACKFILL A. Filling: Construct compacted fills to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. 1. Complete stripping and wasting operations in advance of fill construction. 2. Deposit and mix fill material in horizontal layers not more than 8" deep, loose measurement. Manipulate each layer until the material is uniformly mixed and pulverized. 3. Fill material shall have a moisture content at or slightly above optimum, to achieve specified compaction. If fill is too wet, dry by aeration to achieve desired moisture content. If fill is too dry, add water and mix in by blading and discing to achieve desired moisture content. 4. Exercise care to prevent movement or breakage of walls, trenches, and pipe during filling and compaction. Place fill near such items by means of light equipment and tamp with pneumatic or hand tampers. B. Backfilling: Construct compacted fill against and around items below finish grade. 1. Do not backfill until underground construction has been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed, and the excavations cleaned of trash and debris. 2. Do not backfill against items until all of the permanent supports and bracing members are in place or until . adequate shoring has been erected to prevent displacement and deflection under horizontal load. Exercise care in the placing and compacting of backfill so as not to damage the structure in any way. 3. Bring backfill to required grades by depositing material in horizontal layers not more than 8" deep, loose measurement. EXCAVATION AND FILL VLK Architects, 2008 31 2300 - 3 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 4. If subgrade membrane waterproofing over concrete is installed, the Architect shall inspect the waterproofing before any backfill is placed. Do not puncture or otherwise damage the waterproofing while backfilling. 0 3.06 GRADING A. Site Grading: Shape and finish earthwork to bring the site to the finish grades and elevations shown on the drawings. 1. Establish grades by means of grade stakes placed at corners of units, at abrupt changes of grade, and elsewhere as may be required. 2. Rough grade for walks, paving, and site improvements to the subgrade elevations required. Soft and unstable material which will not readily compact when rolled or tamped shall be removed and the resulting depressions filled with stable material and re -compacted. 3. Finish grade to the finish contours and spot grades shown. Extend cuts and fills to feather out beyond the last finish contour or spot grade shown. Grade to uniform levels and slopes between points for which elevations are given, round off abrupt changes in elevation, and finish off smoothly. Finish grades shall slope away from the building in all directions to assure proper drainage. B. Grading Around Trees: Where grading is required within the branch spread of trees that are to remain, perform the work as follows: 1. When trenching occurs, the tree roots shall not be cut but the trench shall be tunneled under or around the roots by hand digging. 2. When the existing grade at a tree is below the new finished grade, and fill not exceeding 6" is required, clean washed gravel graded from 1" to 2" size shall be placed directly around the tree trunk. The gravel shall extend out from trunk on all sides a minimum of 18" and finish approximately 2" above the finished grade at the tree. Install gravel before earth fill is placed. 3. Trees in areas where the new finished grade is to be lowered shall have re -grading work done by hand to elevation as indicated. Existing grades immediately surrounding the trunk shall not be altered except at the direction of the Architect. 3.07 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Prior to placing topsoil, scarify subgrade to a depth of 6". Following scarification, topsoil shall be spread in one 6" thick lift. Topsoil shall be compacted to the approximate density of undisturbed soil. If there is insufficient stockpiled topsoil from on -site sources to complete the work, bring in topsoil from off -site sources as needed. After topsoil has been placed. Blade, roll lightly, and rake as required to comply with compaction tests. B. After placement of topsoil, Contractor shall eliminate all low or hollow places that would allow water to stand or pond during rainfall or during operation of lawn irrigation systems. The area shall be free of all natural debris and shall also be free of all clods and rocks which are %" in size or larger. C. Finish surfaces shall be not be more than 0.10 feet above or below established grade elevation. D. Provide uniform roundings at top and bottom of slopes and other breaks in grade. Correct irregularities and areas where water will stand. E. Uniformly distribute topsoil to required grades; feather back to where grades remain unchanged. F. Finish lawn and unpaved areas to 1" below top of walk and curbs. 3.08 PROTECTION, CLEAN-UP AND EXCESS MATERIALS A. Protect grades from construction and weather damage, washing, erosion and rutting, and repair such damage that occurs. B. Correct any settlement below established grades to prevent ponding of water. C. At locations where lime, concrete or other foreign matter has penetrated or been mixed with earth, remove damaged earth and replace with clean material. D. Remove excess stockpiled material, debris, waste, and other material from site and leave work in clean finished condition for final acceptance. Contractor is responsible for disposal of debris and excess materials. END OF SECTION 4b EXCAVATION AND FILL VLK Architects, 2008 31 2300 - 4 2737.04 • PART 1 - GENERAL A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 31 2313 BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Excavating, filling, backfilling, grading, and compacting of earth at the building site. 1. Building foundations shall consist of: a. Concrete floor system placed on grade. b. Provide "Select Fill; Concrete Floor System" under those areas of the building to have concrete floor slab on grade (not suspended). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 31 1000 -Site Clearing. 3. Section 31 2300 - Excavation and Fill. 4. Section 312300 - Trenching and Backfilling. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit a one gallon sample and material analysis results of imported topsoil from a testing laboratory indicating compliance with these specifications. Any topsoil delivered to the site which does not comply with the approved sample shall be re -tested at the Contractor's expense and replaced. B. Test Reports: 1. Submit copies of test reports in accordance with SECTION 01 4523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES. 2. Submit copies of test reports for select fill material. No select fill material shall be delivered to the site until after the tests have been made and test reports confirmed. 3. Compaction Tests: Submit copies of compaction test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Laboratory Control: Select fill material and imported topsoil, if required, shall be inspected and tested by an independent testing laboratory. 1. Testing laboratory shall make tests of the soil from the selected source to determine that it meets the specified requirements for select fill and imported topsoil. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Sheeting: Shore and sheet excavations to protect utilities and to prevent cave-in. Maintain sheeting secure until permanent construction is in place. Remove sheeting as excavations are backfilled. B. Drainage: Provide for adequate surface drainage during construction to keep the site free of surface water without creating a nuisance in adjacent areas. C. Pumping: Keep the excavations free of water at all times by pumping or other means. This shall be the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of the cause, source, or nature of the water. • D. Protection: 1. Property: Protect adjoining property, including improvements outside the limits of the work. Protect walks, curbs, and paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks. 2. Trees: Protect tops, trunks, and roots of trees on the site which are to remain. Box or fence trees vulnerable to damage during construction. Remove interfering branches with care and cover scars with tree paint. Do not permit fires, storage of materials or excavation within the branch spread of trees to remain. BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION VLK Architects, 2008 31 2313 -1 2737.04 ABM Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Select Earth Fill; Concrete Floor System: Clean clayey sand or a very sandy clay soil from a selected borrow source with a Liquid Limit less than 35 and a Plasticity Index between 10 and 18. B. Select Earth Fill; Perimeter Grade Beam: Clean soil from on site or a selected borrow source with a Liquid Limit between 30 and 49 and a Plasticity Index (PI) between 19 and 30. C. Unselected Earth Fill: Clean, sandy soil free of organic matter and refuse, roots, clay lumps and rocks larger than 2". D. Granular Fill: Clean gravel or crushed rock graded to produce a passing 1'/4" sieve and retained on %" sieve. Granular fill for areas to be covered with membrane waterproofing shall be clean pea gravel graded no larger than 3/4". E. Free -Draining Fill: Coarse sand or sand and gravel mixture with less than 12% passing a No. 200 sieve, and a Plasticity Index less than 4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove grass, weeds, roots and other vegetation from areas to be excavated, filled and graded. Fill stump holes and like small excavations with suitable material placed in lifts and thoroughly tamped. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. Allow space for the construction of forms. Excavate as required regardless of the condition or type of material encountered. 1. Cut areas accurately to the indicated cross -sections and grades. Take care to prevent excavation below the grades indicated. Any bottoms and slopes that are undercut shall be backfilled with earth fill and compacted. 2. Finish the excavating required for graded areasto a tolerance of0.10 foot above or belowthe rough grade. 3. Remove underground obstructions except for piping and conduit which shall be handled as specified in SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK. B. Scarify the subgrade soil in place to a depth of 12" and compact to a minimum of95% of Standard Density, at a moisture content in the range of 2 percent belowto 2 percent above optimum moisture content, in accordance with ASTM D 698. C. Excavation for Select Fill: 1. Excavate under those areas of the building to have concrete floor slab on grade (not suspended), 2. Replace weak existing soils that were excavated as part of the proof -rolling operations. 3. Excavation should be defined by a perimeter that extends at least five feet horizontal distance away from the outside face of the structures. 4. All building pad subgrade surfaces exposed after the stripping of the vegetation and the removal of the existing surficial soils and other surficial building foundation, utility, sidewalk, or paving materials should be proof -rolled with a 10-ton pneumatic roller or equivalent vehicle to identify any areas of soft or weak soils. 5. The soft or weak soils in the identified areas should then be removed and replaced with compacted select fill. D. Footings: Make excavations for footings to undisturbed soil and leave the bottom bearing surface clean and smooth, accurately to indicated grade and elevation. If footing excavations are made deeper than intended, only concrete shall be used as fill to bring bottom bearing surface up to desired elevation. 3.03 FILL AND BACKFILL A. Filling: Construct compacted fills to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. 1. Complete stripping and wasting operations in advance of fill construction. 2. Deposit and mix fill material in loose lifts less than 6" thick, loose measurement. Manipulate each layer until the material is uniformly mixed and pulverized. 4b BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION VLK Architects, 2008 31 2313 - 2 2737.04 • • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. Fill material shall have a moisture content of 1 percent below to 3 percent above optimum, to achieve specified compaction. If fill is too wet, dry by aeration to achieve desired moisture content. If fill is too dry, add water and mix in by blading and discing to achieve desired moisture content. 4. Exercise care to prevent movement or breakage or walls, trenches, and pipe during filling and compaction. Place fill near such items by means of light equipment and tamp with pneumatic or hand tampers. B. Backfilling: Construct compacted fill against and around concrete beams below finish grade. 1. Do not backfill until underground construction has been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed, and the excavations cleaned of trash and debris. 2. Do not backfill against beams until all of the permanent structural concrete supports and bracing members are in place or until adequate shoring has been erected to prevent displacement and deflection of the beams under horizontal load. Exercise care in the placing and compacting of backfill so as not to damage the structure in any way. 3. Provide "Select Earth Fill; perimeter grade beam" at backfill for grade beams and footings. Unless noted otherwise, concrete walls extending five feet or more below the outside grade shall be backfilled with sand to within two feet of finish grade. The top two feet of backfill against these walls shall be "Select Earth Fill; perimeter grade beam". 4. Bring backfill to required grades by depositing material in horizontal layers not more than 6" deep, loose measurement. 5. If subgrade membrane waterproofing over concrete is installed, the Architect shall inspect the waterproofing before any backfill is placed. Do not puncture or otherwise damage the waterproofing while backfilling. 6. Provide "Select Fill; concrete floor system" at floor system on grade. 3.04 COMPACTION A. Compact each layer of earth fill and backfill thoroughly and evenly until there is no evidence of further compaction and a solid and uniform density is secured. 1. Equipment for compacting shall be sheepsfoot and rubber tired rollers or other compactors capable of obtaining the required density. Compact the fill with power tampers and by hand in areas not accessible to rollers. 2. Compact each layer of fill to the density listed below as a function of the location. The required density in each case is indicated as a percentage of the maximum dry unit weight determined using the standard compaction test ASTM D 698. 3. Compact select fill to the density listed below at a moisture content between 1 percent below to a maximum of 3 percent above the optimum moisture content (-1 to +3). Compact select fill at the perimeter grade beams to the density listed below at a moisture content between 2 percent below to 2 percentage points above optimum (-2 to +2). a. Material under the building slab -on -grade -------- 95 to 100% b. Material adjacent to grade beams ---------------- 93 to 98%. 3.05 GRADING A. Grading Under Slabs On Grade: Shape and finish select earth fill to form the subgrade for concrete floor slabs on grade. Fine grade the areas to the proper elevations and leave the compacted surfaces smooth, without waves and ruts. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Tests: Field density testing of the select fill material under the building and at perimeter grade beam shall be performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. Testing laboratory shall make one in place density test for each 2000 sq. ft. of area per lift, but in no case less than three tests, and one test per 100 linear feet of backfill area adjacent to grade beams, to insure that the specified density is obtained. END OF SECTION BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION VLK Architects, 2008 31 2313 - 3 2737.04 • • L A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 312333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Excavating, backfilling, and compacting required for the installation of piping and utility lines, including storm and sanitary sewers, gas, and water lines and electrical cables. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 312300 - Excavation and Fill; building and site earthwork. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Sheeting: Shore and sheet trench excavations as necessary to protect utilities and to prevent cave-in. Remove sheeting as trenches are backfilled. B. Pumping: Keep the trench excavations free of water at all times by pumping or other means until the backfilling has been completed. This shall be the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of the cause, source, or nature of the water. C. Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for protecting site improvements which are to remain. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Earth Fill: Material for general backfill shall consist of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, and gravel or other approved materials free of organic matter and refuse, clay lumps, and rocks larger than 1%" in diameter. Excavated material may be used for backfilling if it meets the above requirements. B. Sand: Unwashed natural sand free of clay, dirt and debris. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. General: 1. Excavate to the depths indicated and as otherwise required for the proper installation of piping and utility lines. Excavate all materials encountered, including rock and filled -in material. Minimum cover for exterior lines shall be 24" unless otherwise indicated. Generally, more cover shall be provided if grade will permit. 2. Excavations less than five feet deep shall be made by open cut with trench banks kept as nearly vertical as practicable. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance back from edges of trenches to avoid over -loading and consequent slides and cave-ins. 3. Excavate trenches to the necessary width for proper laying of pipe and cables. Grade bottom of trenches to provide proper fall and uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on undisturbed soil or 2" of sand fill at every point along its entire length except where it is necessary to excavate for bell holes and for the proper sealing of pipe joints. 4. Where inverts are not shown, grading shall be determined by the National Plumbing Code requirements for the service intended and the size of the pipe used. 5. Dig bell holes and depressions for joint make-up after the trench bottom has been graded. Dig bell holes and joint depressions only to such length, depth and width as will permit accurate work in the making of the joints and to insure that the pipe will rest directly upon the prepared trench bottom for its maximum possible length. 6. Except where rock excavation is required, care shall be taken not to excavate trench bottom below the depths required. Excavate rock to a minimum overdepth of 6" below the indicated trench depth. Backfill overdepth rock excavation and excess trench excavation with sand. 7. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil is incapable of supporting the pipe is encountered in the trench bottom, such soil shall be removed to the depth and for the length required and the trench backfilled with sand to indicated trench bottom grade. VLK Architects, 2008 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 8. At all underground utilities which enter/exit the building perimeter, provide a continuous clay plug on each side of the grade beam to encompass that zone between the edge of the grade beam to a minimum of 3'-0" laterally, each way, into the utility ditch. Also, provide a similar 3'-0" clay plug at the site termination end of the utility line. B. Sanitary Sewers: 1. The width of the trench at and below the level of the top of the pipe shall be no more than 16" wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to be installed. The width of the trench above that level may be as wide as necessary for the proper performance of the work. 2. The bottom 4" or so of the pipe trenches shall be excavated only a few feet in advance of the pipe laying and shall be done manually by persons skilled in this type of work. Round the bottom of the trench so that at least the bottom quadrant of the pipe rests firmly on undisturbed soil. C. Water Lines: Unless specifically otherwise indicated, grade trenches so as to avoid high points which would necessitate the placing of vacuum and relief valves in the water lines. Grade trench bottoms as specified under Article 3.01 A. above for pipe laying requirements. D. Gas Lines: Grade trench bottoms as specified under Article 3.01 A. above for pipe laying requirements. Excavate deeper as may be required to avoid interference of gas lines with other utilities. E. Electrical Systems: 1. The banks of trenches for the electrical cables and duct lines need not be vertical but may be sloped or widened provided there is no interference with other utilities. 2. Where rock is encountered, overexcavating and backfilling with sand will not be required. 3.02 BACKFILLING A. General: 1. Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified in the several sections under Division 15 and 16 covering the installation of the utilities. 2. Remove all trash, paper, organic material and debris from the trenches before backfilling. 3. Trenches which are improperly backfilled or in which settlement occurs shall be reopened to the depth required for correction and then refilled, mounded over and smoothed off. 4. Rock, broken concrete or pavement and boulders shall not be used as backfill material. B. Lower Part of Trench: 1. Backfill trench with sand deposited in 6" lifts and compacted with suitable tampers to a depth of 12" above the top of the pipe. Settling of sand will be permitted. 2. Take care not to damage or puncture the coating or wrapping of pipes. C. Upper Part of Trench: 1. Backfill the remainder of the trench with the earth fill as specified in paragraph 2.01 A above. 2. Deposit material in layers not more than 12" deep, loose measurement, and compact each layer as it is placed. 3. Exercise care in the placing' and compacting of backfill to prevent movement or breakage of pipe. 4. Restore the surface as near as practicable to its original condition and grade. 3.03 COMPACTION A. Compact each layer of backfill material thoroughly and evenly until there is no evidence of further compaction and a solid and uniform density is secured. Compact each layer to the densities listed below for the various locations as a percentage of the maximum dry unit weight determined using the standard compaction test, ASTM D 698. 1. Under building 95 to 100% 2. Under asphalt and concrete paving 95 to 100% 3. Under lawn areas and sidewalks 85 to 90% 4. Under other areas density same as adjacent soil. END OF SECTION r� TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING VLK Architects, 2008 31 2333 - 2 2737.04 SECTION 313200 SOIL STABILIZATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas A. Section Includes: In -place lime treatment to stabilize the subgrade under the paving. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 312300 - Excavation and Fill. 3. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lime Stabilization for Paving Areas: 1. Hydrated Lime: Type A (dry): Per TSDHPT Item 264-2. 2. Lime should meet the requirements of Items 2.5.2 and 2.5.3 in the North Central Texas Council of Governments standard specifications for Public Works Construction. B. Soil: Upper 6" of the material in -place after the subgrade has been established, compacted and shaped. C. Lime: Hydrated lime made from "high -calcium" type limestone with an unhydrated lime content not exceeding 6% by dry soil weight and a "free" water content not exceeding 4% by weight. Waste lime will not be acceptable. There must be sufficient lime to produce a minimum pH of 12.4 within the upper 6" thickness. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Distributor truck or tank equipped with agitator to maintain a uniform mixture of lime and water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Insure that surfaces have been brought to approximate rough grades (plus or minus 0.10 feet). Loosen and pulverize soil to a depth of 6 inches below bottom of designated paving or slab areas, including a distance of one foot outside perimeter of paving. B. The percentages of lime indicated in this specification section are for bidding purposes only. Prior to, beginning any soil stabilization, the contractor shall verify with the Owner the amount and type of soil stabilization material to be used. 3.02 PERFORMANCE - PAVING SUBGRADE A. General: It is the primary requirement to secure a completed 6" deep subgrade of treated material containing a uniform lime mixture, free of loose areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent paving and slabs to achieve a soils Plasticity Index of not greater than 15. Construction methods and equipment shall comply to NCTCOG Items 4.6. B. Scarification: Excavate and scarify the material to be treated down to the secondary grade (proposed bottom of lime treatment). Wet or unstable material belowthe secondary grade shall be corrected by scarifying, adding lime and compacting to uniform stability. Then spread the excavated and scarified material to the desired cross section. Full depth of treatment shall be 6 inches and full width shall be the entire area to be paved between points and lines located one foot beyond pavement edges. C. Placing Lime: Add lime to the scarified material in an amount equal to 6% by dry weight measurement, of 6" depth of compacted subgrade. Apply lime mixed with water to form a slurry. Spread lime only on that area where mixing operations can be completed during the same working day. SOIL STABILIZATION VLK Architects, 2008 31 3200 - 1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Mixing: Mix the soil and lime thoroughly with suitable road mixers or other approved equipment until a homogeneous, friable mixture is obtained free from clods and lumps. Aerate or sprinkle the mixture as necessary to secure the optimum moisture content Necessary optimum moisture content shall be between optimum and 4% wet of optimum. E. Curing: Allow the mixture to cure for a period of from 48 to 72 hours. During the curing period keep the material moist. F. Final Mixing: After the required curing time, mix the material uniformly with a rotary mixer to reduce the size of the particles so that 100% will pass a 1 %" sieve and 60% will pass a No. 4 sieve. Lime -soil mixture pH shall be 12.4 or greater. If not possible to attain 12.4, maximum pfH attainable shall be validated by laboratory test for soil being treated. G. Compacting: Sprinkle the mixture as required and compact by rolling and tamping to a minimum of 95% standard density, ASTM D 698, with moisture content between optimum and 4% wet of optimum. Correct irregularities and weak spots by scarifying, adding or removing material and re -shaping and re -compacting. Maintain the surface of the subgrade smooth, free from undulations and ruts and to the established lines and grades. H. Surface Moisture: Keep the surface of the compacted subgrade moist by sprinkling until such time as the paving is placed. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Tests: Field density testing of the completed stabilized subgrade under paving shall be performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. The Laboratory shall make one density test for each 5000 sq. ft. of stabilized subgrade to insure that the specified density is obtained. END OF SECTION 40 ! SOIL STABILIZATION VLK Architects, 2008 31 3200 - 2 2737.04 SECTION 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL i[�j1E�PI�I_l�7 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas A. Section Includes: Concrete walks, curbs and gutters, paving, approaches, and other concrete flatwork outside the building, including patching existing sidewalks. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -place Concrete. 2. Section 03 3519 - Colored Concrete Finishing. 3. Section 07 9200 -Joint Sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. 1. Submit % cu. ft. of aggregate for exposed aggregate finish. B. Provide a diagram of proposed control joints and expansion joints. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. City Standards: Street sidewalks, curbs and gutters, and approaches shall be constructed to meet or exceed the requirements of the city standard specifications where the city standards are applicable. • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS • A. Formwork shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 03 1100 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES. B. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing to meet the requirements of SECTION 03 2000 -CONCRETE REINFORCING Minimum reinforcement at paving, parking, and flatwork shall be #3 rebars at 18" o.c. each way. C. Concrete shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. Minimum compressive strength shall be 3000 psi at 28 days. D. Exposed Aggregate: Selected and washed pea gravel graded from approximately 3/a" to %" in size, color as selected by Architect. E. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. ASTM D 1751 preformed strips of asphalt saturated cane fiberboard for joints in standard finished flatwork (walks, curbs and gutters). 2. ASTM D 1752, Type I preformed strips of elastic sponge rubber compound for joints to be caulked with sealant and joints in architectural concrete flatwork. 3. The use of redwood expansion joints is prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the lines and grades for concrete site work items by means of line and grade stakes. Complete any fine grading required to prepare the subgrade. Maintain the finished subgrade cushions in a satisfactory condition. CONCRETE PAVING VLK Architects, 2008 32 1313 - 1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Forming: Set forms to lines and grades, and brace and secure to withstand wet concrete without deflection or leakage. Stake forms securely in position with joints keyed to prevent relative displacement. Clean and oil forms each time they are used. 1. Walks: 4" thick. Surfaces shall be crowned or sloped to drain. 2. Curbs and Gutters: As detailed. 3. Paving, Drive Approaches, [and Playgrounds]: 6%z" thick at bus lanes and delivery routes; 5" thick elsewhere. Thicken edges as required. 4. Miscellaneous: Catch basins, flagpole base, and other miscellaneous items of concrete shall be constructed to detail. B. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing to meet the requirements of SECTION 03 2000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING. Minimum reinforcement at paving, parking and flatwork shall be #3 rebars at 18" o.c. each way. C. Concrete: Place concrete to meet the requirements of SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. 1. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and 304. Deposit concrete so that specified slab thickness will be obtained after vibrating and finishing operations. Minimize handling to prevent segregation. Consolidate concrete by suitable means to prevent formation of voids or honeycombs. Exercise care to prevent disturbance of forms and reinforcing and damage to vapor retarder. Place concrete to lines and levels shown, properly sloped to drain into adjacent yard areas and drainage structures. 2. Hot Weather Placement: ACI 305. 3. Cold Weather Placement: ACI 306. 4. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. 5. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. D. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints around fixed objects within or abutting concrete, and at intervals of not more than 30 ft. o.c. along walks and curbs and 50 ft. o.c. along drive and parking paving. 1. Install preformed filler with the top edge approximately %" below the finished concrete surface to leave a neat, straight joint. 2. Joints shall be wide unless specifically dimensioned otherwise on the drawings. Joint edges shall be rounded with an edging tool. 3. There shall be no connection by reinforcement or keyway across expansion joints. Joints shall be held in alignment with sleeved, smooth dowels where required. E. Scoring: 1. Saw cut walks, approaches, and paving using an abrasive or diamond blade. Cut joint width shall be '/a" and depth shall be'/." deep at walks and Y. slab thickness at approaches and paving. Cutting of joints must be done as soon as concrete surface is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by the blade (within 4 to 12 hours), and before random shrinkage cracks can form in the concrete slab. a. Score walks at approximately 5 foot intervals each way. Where walks abut curbs, the scoring of walks and curbs shall align. b. Score curbs and gutters at approximately 5 foot intervals. c. Score approaches and paving at approximately 10 foot intervals each way or as shown. F. Standard Finishing: Strike slabs off true by double screeding to the required level at or below the elevations and grades shown on the drawings. Set edge forms and screed strips accurately to produce the designated elevations and contours. 1. Walks: Float with wood floats to true planes with no coarse aggregate visible. Hand trowel to produce smooth surfaces. Brush surfaces with a soft fiber brush to produce a uniformly striated finish. Edge concrete surfaces with a rounded edging tool. 2. Curbs and gutters: Finish the curb and flow lines of gutters with a steel "S" shaped trowel to the contour of the curb and gutter and then cross brush surfaces with a soft fiber brush to produce a fine brush finish. 3. Approaches: Screed and float to a monolithic medium float finish and belt with a canvas belt to produce a herringbone texture finish. 4. Curb Ramps: Score surface, as detailed, to meed the Texas Accessibility Standards. Provide integral contrasting color, per Specification SECTION 03 3519 - COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING. 5. Paving: The surface shall be troweled and edged with a steel trowel and then broomed to obtain a smooth, uniform brush finish. • C! C CONCRETE PAVING VLK Architects, 2008 32 1313 - 2 2737.04 • • • A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas G. Curing: 1. Cure concrete 7 days as specified in SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. Coat exposed surfaces with curing compound and protect surfaces from pedestrian and vehicular traffic during the curing period. Damaged areas shall be re -sprayed. 2. Concrete surfaces designated to receive chemical stain must be free of curing compound. Accordingly, finished concrete shall be "water -cured" orshall be completely sandblasted if cured with a curing compound membrane. H. Removing Forms: Forms shall remain in place for at least 12 hours after concrete has been placed and finished. Remove forms without damaging the concrete. Bars and heavy tools shall not be used to pry against the concrete in removing the forms. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Tests: Testing and acceptance of concrete shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. B. Grade and Smoothness Tests: 1. Plan Grade: Finished surface of the flatwork shall not vary more than 0.04 ft. above or below the plan grade or elevation. Finished surfaces of abutting pavement and walks shall coincide at theirjuncture. Where a new pavement or walk abuts an existing surface, transition pavement or walk strip shall be installed. 2. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of the flatwork shall have no abrupt changes of more than 1/8" and shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 12 ft. straight edge more than %" plus or minus tolerance. Flow line of gutters shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 10 ft. straight edge more than %" plus or minus tolerance. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove debris, scraps, surplus materials, tools and equipment from the premises upon completion of the work. Clean concrete droppings from walks and curbs. Leave the graded areas free of debris and rubble. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete under provisions of SECTION 01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS from premature, drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. END OF SECTION VLK Architects, 2008 CONCRETE PAVING 321313-3 2737.04 0 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 32 3113 GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Galvanized steel chain link fences and gates. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Include plan layout, gird, spacing of compoenents, accessories, fittings, hardware, anchorages, and schedule of components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide chain link fences and gates as manufactured by one of the following: Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. American Chain Link Fence Company American Tube Company Anchor Fence, Inc. Capitol Wire and Fence Co., Inc. Century Tube Corp. Cyclone Fence Div./USX Corp. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Fabric: Comply with Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) Product Manual. Furnish one-piece fabric widths for fencing up to 12 feet high. All fencing shall have a knuckled selvage top and bottom. Wire size includes zinc coating. Provide 2-inch mesh, 9-gage (0.148-inch diameter) wire, typical. B. Galvanized Steel Finish: ASTM A 392, Class 1, with not less than 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface. C. Framing: Strength requirements for posts and rails shall comply with ASTM F 669. D. Pipe shall be straight, true to section, material, and sizes specified, and shall conform to the following weights per foot: NPS in Outside Diameter Type I Type II inches (OD) in inches Steel Steel 1-1/4 1.660 2.27 1.84 1-1/2 1.900 2.72 2.28 2 2.375 3.65 3.12 2-1/2 2.875 5.79 4.64 3-1/2 4.000 9.11 6.56 E. Steel Framework, General: Posts, rails, braces, and gate frames. 1. Type I Pipe: Hot -dipped galvanized steel pipe conforming to. ASTM F 1083, plain ends, standard weight (schedule 40) with not less than 1.8 oz. zinc per sq. ft. of surface area coated. 2. Type II Pipe: Manufactured from steel conforming to ASTM A 569 or A 446, grade D, cold formed, electric welded with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi and triple coated with minimum 0.9 oz. zinc per sq. ft. after welding, a chromate conversion coating and a clear polymer overcoat. Corrosion protection on inside surfaces shall protect the metal from corrosion when subjected to the salt spray test of ASTM B 117 for 300 hours with the end point of 5 percent Red Rust. F. End, corner, and pull posts: 2.875-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe. GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING VLK Architects, 2008 32 3113 -1 2737.04 A&M Consolidated High School Agricultural Facility Renovations and Addition College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas G. Line or intermediate posts: 2.375-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe. H. Top Rail: Manufacturer's longest lengths, with expansion -type couplings, approximately 6 inches long, for each joint. Provide means for attaching top rail securely to each gate corner, pull, and end post. I. Galvanized Steel: 1-1/4-inch NPS (1.66-inch OD) Type I or II steel pipe. I. Tension Wire: ASTM A 824, 0.177-inch-diameter metallic -coated steel marvelled tension wire with finish to match fabric. J. Tie Wires: 12-gauge (0.1064nch diameter) galvanized steel with a minimum of 0.80 oz. per sq. ft. of zinc coating of surface area in accordance with ASTM A 641, Class 3. K. Post and Line Caps: Provide weathertight closure cap for each post Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail. L. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Hot -dip galvanized steel with minimum length 2 inches less than full height of fabric, minimum cross-section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch and minimum 1.2 oz zinc coating per sq. ft. of surface area. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into post. M. Tension and Brace Bands: Minimum 3/4-inch-wide hot -dip galvanized steel with minimum 1.2 oz zinc coating per sq. ft. of surface area. 1. Tension and Brace Bands: Minimum 12 gage A105 inch) thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fence in compliance with ASTM F 567. Do not begin installation and erection before final grading is completed. B. Setting Posts: Floor flange with 4%" anchor bolts. Space maximum 10 feet o.c. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. C. Top Rails: Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and at other posts terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer. D. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. E. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric before stretching fabric and tie to each post with not less than same gage and type of wire. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 11-gage hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced maximum 24 inches o.c. F Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through or clamp to fabric 4 inches o.c., and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not over 15 inches o.c. G. Tie Wires: Use U-shaped wire of proper length to secure fabric firmly to posts and rails with ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. 1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches o.c. and to rails and braces 24 inches o.c. H. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. END OF SECTION • • VLK Architects, 2008 GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING 323113-2 2737.04